1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
123 \notefontcolor #0000ff
127 \color #00ff00 #ff00ff
132 \color #aa55ff #55aa00
140 \paragraph_separation skip
143 \math_numbering_side default
144 \quotes_style english
148 \paperpagestyle default
150 \tracking_changes true
151 \output_changes false
153 \postpone_fragile_content false
157 \docbook_table_output 0
158 \docbook_mathml_prefix 1
159 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
160 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
161 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
162 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
163 \author -131811572 "Yuriy Skalko"
167 \author 5863344 "Enrico Forestieri"
168 \author 244031559 "Yuriy"
169 \author 274215730 "scott"
170 \author 630872221 "Jean-Pierre Chrétien" jeanpierre.chretien@free.fr
171 \author 1549938239 "Kornel Benko"
172 \author 1675569489 "Stephan Witt"
183 by the \SpecialChar LyX
188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
190 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation,
191 please send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
192 Documentation mailing list:
194 \begin_inset CommandInset href
196 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
208 \begin_inset Newline newline
212 \begin_inset Newline newline
216 \change_deleted -131811572 1600339801
218 \change_inserted -131811572 1600339801
222 \begin_inset Note Note
225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
226 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
227 \begin_inset Newline newline
232 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
240 \begin_layout Standard
241 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
242 LatexCommand tableofcontents
249 \begin_layout Chapter
253 \begin_layout Section
254 What is \SpecialChar LyX
258 \begin_layout Standard
260 is a document preparation system.
261 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
264 business letters and proposals,
266 \change_deleted 5863208 1598113909
270 It is unlike most other
271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
278 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core editing style.
279 That means that when you type a section header,
281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
295 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
301 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
310 takes care of the typesetting for you;
311 so you deal only with concepts,
315 \begin_layout Standard
316 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
321 If you haven't read it yet,
327 \begin_layout Standard
332 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
335 the format of all of the manuals.
336 If you don't read it,
337 you will have a difficult time navigating the manuals.
338 Additionally it provides a high level content description of the other manuals giving the user an idea of where to look for specific information.
341 \begin_layout Section
346 \begin_layout Standard
347 Like most applications,
349 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its window.
350 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
351 There is of course a work area for editing documents complete with a vertical scrollbar.
354 \begin_layout Standard
355 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
356 This is not a bug or an oversight,
358 When you read a book,
359 you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the next line.
360 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion,
361 hence the need for only a vertical scrollbar.
364 \begin_layout Standard
365 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
366 The first case is large images.
367 To avoid images being displayed larger than your screen,
368 left click on the image and use the option
379 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than the \SpecialChar LyX
381 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through both.
384 \begin_layout Standard
385 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
386 menus and toolbar buttons,
387 have a look at Appendix
392 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
394 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
402 \begin_layout Section
406 \begin_layout Standard
407 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
409 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
411 Just select the manual you want to read from the
418 \begin_layout Section
419 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
421 \begin_inset CommandInset label
423 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
430 \begin_layout Standard
431 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
432 can be configured via the menu
434 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
438 \begin_inset Index idx
443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
450 is able to inspect your system to see what programs,
453 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
454 packages are available.
455 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences settings.
456 Although this configuration was performed when \SpecialChar LyX
457 was installed on your system,
458 you might have some items that you installed locally,
460 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
464 \begin_inset space \space{}
467 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
469 which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
471 To force \SpecialChar LyX
472 to re-inspect your system use
474 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
478 \begin_inset Index idx
483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
484 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
490 Then restart \SpecialChar LyX
491 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
494 \begin_layout Section
497 \begin_inset CommandInset label
499 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
506 \begin_layout Standard
507 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
508 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
509 installed but you will not be able to create PDFs
510 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122369
511 or print your documents
515 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122520
516 Some \SpecialChar LyX
517 documents use DocBook instead of \SpecialChar LaTeX
519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
523 \begin_inset Quotes erd
526 which can produce PDFs and the like.
529 Even without \SpecialChar LaTeX
531 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122546
534 every \SpecialChar LyX
535 document can still be output as plain text
536 \change_inserted 5863208 1598122500
543 \begin_layout Standard
544 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
546 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122571
550 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required files installed,
551 but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
554 \begin_layout Standard
555 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
556 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
557 finds on your system are listed in a file you can view from the menu
559 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
567 If you are missing needed packages then you must install them and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
570 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
574 \begin_inset Index idx
579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
580 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
588 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
595 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
599 \begin_layout Chapter
600 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
604 \begin_layout Section
605 Basic File Operations
606 \begin_inset Index idx
611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
620 \begin_layout Standard
625 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations common to any word processor as well as some more advanced operations:
628 \begin_layout Itemize
651 \begin_layout Itemize
668 arg "dialog-show lyxfiles templates"
674 \begin_layout Itemize
697 \begin_layout Itemize
705 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
709 \begin_layout Itemize
711 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
723 \begin_layout Itemize
736 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
740 \begin_layout Itemize
742 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
750 \begin_layout Itemize
773 \begin_layout Itemize
786 arg "buffer-write-as"
790 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
794 \begin_layout Itemize
796 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
808 \change_inserted 630872221 1620202805
812 \begin_layout Itemize
814 \change_inserted 630872221 1620202811
822 \begin_layout Itemize
836 \begin_layout Itemize
851 \begin_layout Standard
852 They all do pretty much the same thing as other word processors,
853 with a few minor differences.
856 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
867 command lists the available templates.
868 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
869 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
870 and possibly propose text fragments
874 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
877 you would otherwise need to
878 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
880 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
884 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
888 They can be of use for certain classes,
889 especially those for writing letters (see section
894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
896 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
903 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
904 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a \SpecialChar LyX
907 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
915 \begin_layout Standard
916 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
938 \begin_inset Quotes erd
942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
949 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
950 to open a file or create a new one,
952 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174669
957 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174681
962 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174691
974 \begin_layout Standard
996 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174707
998 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174708
1001 people work on the same document at the same time.
1005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1006 If you plan to do this,
1007 you should check out the Version Control feature in \SpecialChar LyX
1009 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174722
1014 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174782
1015 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
1017 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1019 \begin_inset Flex Emph
1022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1024 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1025 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
1034 \begin_inset Flex Emph
1037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1039 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1047 help manual\SpecialChar endofsentence
1058 \begin_inset space ~
1062 \begin_inset space ~
1067 will reload the document from disk.
1068 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document and want to restore it to the last save
1069 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174796
1076 \begin_inset space ~
1081 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify them as your changes.
1082 \change_inserted -712698321 1676620203
1086 \begin_layout Section
1088 \change_inserted -712698321 1676622914
1089 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1091 name "sec:Safety-Nets"
1096 Rescuing Files If Things Go Awry
1099 \begin_layout Standard
1101 \change_inserted -712698321 1676623979
1103 lays much stress on safety.
1104 We know how much effort you invest in your work,
1105 and thus the last thing we want is that this work gets lost.
1107 we cannot completely prevent bad things from happening:
1109 might crash (although we put in all effort that it doesn't),
1110 you might face a power outage while you are working on a document with unsaved changes,
1111 disks might get corrupt or files might get lost or damaged during synchronization or simply because you deleted it by mistake.
1114 provides a multi-layered safety net that will hopefully prevent you from major hassles.
1115 This means that \SpecialChar LyX
1116 does not simply make a backup file,
1117 it makes several such files that might be useful in different scenarios.
1118 Parts of this multi-layered net can be switched off,
1119 if you prefer to go a bit more risky over having multiple files (see section
1120 \begin_inset space ~
1124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1126 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
1131 but all measures are on by default to provide you with most possible security.
1134 \begin_layout Standard
1136 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624009
1138 we elaborate on the diverse files and when they might become useful.
1141 \begin_layout Subsection
1143 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624109
1147 \begin_layout Standard
1149 \change_inserted -712698321 1676629660
1152 makes backup copies of files when they are saved.
1154 these files are stored in the same directory than the original file and with the same file name but the extension
1159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1168 If you prefer to have all backups in a central place (and maybe on a separate disk),
1173 in preferences (see section
1174 \begin_inset space ~
1178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1180 reference "sec:Paths"
1189 then all backups are stored there.
1190 In order to prevent file name clashes,
1191 the files then do not simply have the original file name,
1192 but also the path in their name,
1194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1202 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1208 !home!paula!work!myfile.lyx~
1213 \begin_layout Standard
1215 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624464
1216 Note that some file managers hide backup files by default,
1217 and you need to enable
1218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1225 in order to see them.
1228 \begin_layout Standard
1230 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624516
1231 Backup files provide the latest saved version of a document.
1232 They are never deleted by \SpecialChar LyX
1234 but overwritten if new changes are saved in the original file.
1237 \begin_layout Subsection
1239 \change_inserted -712698321 1676633415
1243 \begin_layout Standard
1245 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624657
1248 also makes automatic snapshots of all opened documents that have unsaved changes in a regular time interval (which can be adjusted in preferences,
1250 \begin_inset space ~
1254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1256 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
1261 As opposed to the backup files,
1262 these also contain unsaved changes and thus might be newer than the backups.
1265 \begin_layout Standard
1267 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624841
1268 These files are always stored in the same directory than the original file and with the same name,
1270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1278 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1287 Auto-save snapshots are deleted when a document is closed normally,
1289 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1293 with all changes saved.
1294 They are left on disk in case of non-normal termination (e.
1295 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1299 program crash or power outage),
1300 and this is when they might become useful.
1303 \begin_layout Subsection
1305 \change_inserted -712698321 1676633419
1309 \begin_layout Standard
1311 \change_inserted -712698321 1676629567
1313 crashes and documents have unsaved changes,
1314 the program furthermore tries to write an emergency file,
1315 which is a version of the document containing all unsaved changes,
1316 even those that have been made after the latest snapshot.
1319 \begin_layout Standard
1321 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625158
1322 These files are always stored in the same directory than the original file and with the same name but the extension
1327 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1333 myfile.lyx.emergency
1336 When the respective document is reopened with \SpecialChar LyX
1338 the application recognizes the emergency file and asks you whether it should try to recover your file to that last state.
1341 and if this succeeds it will ask you next whether the emergency file can be deleted.
1342 Agree on this only after you checked that everything has been correctly recovered!
1345 \begin_layout Subsection
1347 \change_inserted -712698321 1676633427
1348 Backup Files from Old \SpecialChar LyX
1352 \begin_layout Standard
1354 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625452
1355 If you open a \SpecialChar LyX
1356 document for the first time with a new major version of \SpecialChar LyX
1358 it gets converted to the new file format (allowing for new features).
1361 keeps a copy of the old version,
1364 <filename>-lyxformat-<n>.lyx
1367 where <n> is the old format (e.
1368 \begin_inset space ~
1374 myfile-lyxformat-474.lyx
1377 Those files are stored at the same location than the backup files,
1378 that is alongside the original document or,
1380 in the backup directory.
1383 \begin_layout Standard
1385 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625483
1386 As with backup files,
1387 these files are never deleted by \SpecialChar LyX
1391 \begin_layout Subsection
1393 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625510
1394 When to Use Which File?
1397 \begin_layout Standard
1399 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625539
1400 Now why all these files?
1401 Because they have different purposes.
1405 \begin_layout Standard
1407 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625820
1409 terminates unexpectedly,
1412 \begin_layout Enumerate
1414 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625790
1415 first try to restore from the emergency file (by reopening the document in \SpecialChar LyX
1417 This file has the latest changes,
1418 even changes you made after the last auto-save snapshot has been made.
1421 \begin_layout Enumerate
1423 \change_inserted -712698321 1676634256
1424 If the rescue file way did not work because there is no rescue file (e.
1425 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1429 after a power outage) or the rescue file is damaged (it might happen in mean cases that the rescue files contains just that latest addition that makes \SpecialChar LyX
1431 look if there is an auto-save snapshot.
1433 remove the trailing # so that the file can be opened with \SpecialChar LyX
1434 (not the first # in order to keep the original file until you checked the snapshot) and see if that works for you.
1436 you will have lost five minutes of work in the worst case (with the default settings at least).
1439 \begin_layout Enumerate
1441 \change_inserted -712698321 1676626178
1442 If there is no auto-save snapshot or this one is garbled as well,
1443 use the backup file.
1444 It does not have all the unsaved changes,
1445 but it might still be the most recent you can get.
1446 This is particularly the case if the original file itself got lost or is damaged.
1449 \begin_layout Standard
1451 \change_inserted -712698321 1676626301
1452 The fourth type of file,
1453 the backup file from old versions,
1454 is useful if the conversion process did not work and results in a non-working document (although we put in all efforts to prevent this) or if you mistakenly opened and saved a document with a newer version (such as a development version) and actually want to keep on using the old version.
1457 \begin_layout Standard
1459 \change_inserted -712698321 1676629641
1460 So much for the safety net.
1461 We hope you will not need it,
1463 that it catches you as high up as possible.
1464 Now let us return to the actual writing process.
1469 \begin_layout Section
1470 Basic Editing Features
1471 \begin_inset Index idx
1476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1483 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1485 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
1492 \begin_layout Standard
1493 Like most modern word processors,
1495 can perform cut and paste operations on blocks of text,
1496 can move by character,
1499 and can delete whole words as well as individual characters.
1500 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
1501 editing features and how to access them.
1502 We will start with cut and paste.
1505 \begin_layout Standard
1506 As you might expect,
1511 menu and the standard toolbar have the cut and paste commands,
1512 along with various other editing features.
1513 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
1517 \begin_layout Itemize
1523 \begin_inset Index idx
1528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1558 \begin_layout Itemize
1564 \begin_inset Index idx
1569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1599 \begin_layout Itemize
1605 \begin_inset Index idx
1610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1636 \begin_layout Itemize
1640 \begin_inset space ~
1646 \begin_layout Itemize
1650 \begin_inset space ~
1656 \begin_layout Itemize
1660 \begin_inset space ~
1664 \begin_inset space ~
1670 \begin_inset Index idx
1675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1684 \begin_inset Index idx
1689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1705 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1715 arg "dialog-toggle findreplace"
1721 \begin_layout Standard
1722 The first three are self-explanatory.
1723 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1724 and other programs using
1746 put two versions of text into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted) so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1751 supports formatted and unformatted text as well as graphics.
1752 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1753 For example if the clipboard contains text in a Comma Separated Values (CSV) format and the cursor is inside a table,
1754 the text will be pasted into individual cells.
1758 \begin_inset space ~
1763 shows you a list of the last several strings you have pasted.
1764 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list entry.
1767 \begin_layout Standard
1771 \begin_inset space ~
1776 may also contain optional items for specific formats depending on the clipboard contents.
1777 Possible formats include HTML,
1782 \begin_inset space ~
1789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1798 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents in different formats and you want to select one format explicitly.
1800 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1804 \begin_inset space \space{}
1807 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short text which is often meaningless.)
1810 \begin_layout Standard
1814 \begin_inset space ~
1817 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1819 \begin_inset space ~
1823 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1827 \begin_inset space ~
1836 with the only difference being that it acts on text only.
1837 It will paste the text in the clipboard such that the whole text selection is inserted as one paragraph.
1838 A new paragraph is only started where there is a blank line in the text.
1842 \begin_inset space ~
1848 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph.
1849 This is useful when copying contents of tables from webpages to a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1854 \begin_inset space ~
1857 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1859 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1863 \begin_inset space ~
1871 \begin_inset space ~
1874 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1877 paste from the primary selection.
1878 This is normally the currently selected text.
1881 \begin_layout Standard
1884 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1886 \begin_inset space ~
1890 \begin_inset space ~
1898 \begin_inset space ~
1902 \begin_inset space ~
1908 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466403
1910 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466406
1914 Once you have found a word or expression,
1918 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466954
1923 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1926 \begin_inset space ~
1937 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466364
1939 \begin_inset space ~
1943 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466368
1945 \begin_inset space ~
1953 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466698
1967 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1971 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1975 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466747
1980 \begin_inset space ~
1992 arg "word-find-backward"
1995 shortcut) to search backwards
1999 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466989
2000 Even if you close the widget,
2010 arg "word-find-backward"
2013 will search further.
2018 \begin_layout Standard
2020 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467040
2025 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
2028 \begin_inset space ~
2033 field and searches the next match.
2039 \begin_inset space ~
2044 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
2046 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467539
2048 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467537
2052 \begin_layout Standard
2054 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467208
2056 the following options are available:
2059 \begin_layout Itemize
2062 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467225
2068 \begin_inset space ~
2074 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467228
2077 can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search word.
2078 If the toggle is set,
2080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2091 will not match the word
2092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2105 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467232
2109 \begin_layout Itemize
2112 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467234
2116 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467207
2120 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467237
2125 can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
2126 to only find complete words,
2128 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2132 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126824
2137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2149 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2162 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467241
2166 \begin_layout Itemize
2169 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467258
2174 will limit search and replace,
2176 to the current cursor selection.
2179 \begin_layout Itemize
2182 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467288
2187 starts searching (forwards) immediately on input,
2188 without pressing the
2191 \begin_inset space ~
2199 \begin_layout Itemize
2201 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467400
2206 starts from the beginning/end of the document if the end/beginning has been reached without asking.
2207 If this is not checked,
2208 a dialog will pop up asking you what to do.
2209 Note that responding to this dialog makes the cursor leave the search widget,
2210 so you need to put it back manually.
2213 \begin_layout Standard
2214 \paragraph_spacing single
2216 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467875
2217 The widget also has a
2221 button that lets you shrink the widget to only the first row (the search widget),
2222 hiding replace and options.
2225 \change_deleted 630872221 1620400535
2227 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467875
2232 button brings you back to the full size.
2235 \begin_layout Standard
2236 \paragraph_spacing single
2239 also offers an advanced
2242 \begin_inset space ~
2246 \begin_inset space ~
2251 feature that is described in section
2252 \begin_inset space ~
2256 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2258 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
2266 \begin_layout Standard
2270 \begin_inset space \space{}
2274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2282 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal text.
2283 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an inset and pressing
2287 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
2294 \begin_layout Standard
2298 arg "inset-select-all"
2301 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
2302 When the cursor is inside an inset
2305 arg "inset-select-all"
2308 selects the content of the inset.
2312 arg "inset-select-all"
2315 consecutively will increase the selection scope to the whole inset and then to the whole document.
2319 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
2322 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end of the document.
2325 \begin_layout Section
2327 \begin_inset Index idx
2332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2339 \begin_inset Index idx
2344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2351 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2353 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
2360 \begin_layout Standard
2361 If you make a mistake,
2362 you can easily recover from it.
2364 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
2367 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2370 or the toolbar button
2377 If you accidentally undo too much,
2380 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2383 or the toolbar button
2390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2397 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
2398 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2401 steps to minimize memory overhead.
2404 \begin_layout Standard
2406 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338243
2407 Note that if you undo all changes to arrive at the document as it was last saved,
2409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2416 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
2417 This is a consequence of the 100
2418 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2421 step undo limit mentioned above.
2424 \begin_layout Standard
2433 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
2435 However they will not undo or redo text character by character,
2436 but by blocks of text.
2439 \begin_layout Section
2441 \begin_inset Index idx
2446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2455 \begin_layout Standard
2456 These are the most basic mouse operations.
2459 \begin_layout Enumerate
2464 \begin_layout Itemize
2469 once anywhere in the edit window.
2470 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
2474 \begin_layout Enumerate
2479 \begin_layout Itemize
2486 highlights the text between the old and new mouse positions.
2489 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2492 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
2493 's buffer (and the clipboard).
2495 \change_inserted 5863208 1598175891
2496 You can also use the context menu triggered by right clicking on the selected text.
2501 \begin_layout Itemize
2502 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
2505 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2512 \begin_layout Enumerate
2520 \begin_layout Standard
2521 Right-click on them to set their properties.
2522 Check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
2526 \begin_layout Section
2528 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2530 name "sec:Navigating"
2535 \begin_inset Index idx
2540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2549 \begin_layout Standard
2551 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
2554 \begin_layout Itemize
2559 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can click to jump to the corresponding document part.
2562 \begin_layout Itemize
2564 which is accessed either by the menu
2566 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
2568 \begin_inset space ~
2573 or by the toolbar button
2576 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
2582 \begin_layout Itemize
2583 You can set bookmarks in your document under
2585 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2588 and use the same menu to return to them.
2589 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
2592 \begin_layout Standard
2596 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
2601 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2602 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
2604 \begin_inset space ~
2609 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
2610 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled to another document part to look for something and want to go back to your last editing position.
2613 \begin_layout Standard
2618 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
2622 \begin_layout Subsection
2624 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2626 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
2631 \begin_inset Index idx
2636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2638 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2653 \begin_inset Index idx
2658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2667 \begin_layout Standard
2668 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window you can choose between several different lists including other TOC-like objects such as lists of tables and figures,
2670 labels and cross-references (see section
2671 \begin_inset space ~
2675 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2677 reference "sec:Cross-References"
2684 or citations (see section
2685 \begin_inset space ~
2689 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2691 reference "sec:Bibliography"
2697 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your document.
2700 \begin_layout Standard
2701 In many cases right clicking on elements in the Outline opens a context menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
2702 For example with citations,
2703 the context menu allows you to open the citation dialog and to modify the citation.
2706 \begin_layout Standard
2711 field at the top allows you to filter which entries appear in the outline.
2713 if you are displaying the list of
2715 Labels and References
2717 and wish to see only references to subsections,
2718 you can enter the text
2719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2726 in the filter and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
2729 \begin_layout Standard
2730 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons that allow you to further control the display.
2735 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
2736 Otherwise the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the document.
2741 option keeps it in the current view state.
2742 Keeping means that when you have the subsections of sections
2743 \begin_inset space ~
2746 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
2747 \begin_inset space ~
2751 the subsections of sections
2752 \begin_inset space ~
2755 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
2760 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
2761 \begin_inset space ~
2766 the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
2767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2775 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
2778 \begin_layout Standard
2785 button refreshes the TOC (
2786 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2788 \change_inserted 5863208 1598176913
2792 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2794 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2798 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2802 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2806 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2810 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2812 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2816 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2818 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2822 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2824 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2828 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2832 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2834 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2838 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2842 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2846 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2850 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2854 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2858 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2862 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2866 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2868 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2872 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections in your document.
2885 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
2887 you can move section
2888 \begin_inset space ~
2892 \begin_inset space ~
2895 2.4 or after section
2896 \begin_inset space ~
2901 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2914 (or the corresponding key bindings
2922 ) you can change the level of sections.
2923 You can make section
2924 \begin_inset space ~
2928 \begin_inset space ~
2932 \begin_inset space ~
2938 \begin_layout Standard
2939 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole section to copy,
2943 \begin_layout Subsection
2944 Horizontal Scrolling
2945 \begin_inset Index idx
2950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2952 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2962 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2979 \begin_layout Standard
2981 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because standard output page formats such as ISO
2982 \begin_inset space ~
2985 A4 are not as wide as PC or laptop screens.
2986 Therefore you will have trouble with the output of your document if document parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2990 \begin_layout Standard
2991 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2995 \begin_layout Itemize
2997 is used on a small tablet computer
3000 \begin_layout Itemize
3001 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
3005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3013 \begin_inset space ~
3026 \begin_layout Itemize
3027 Math constructs with long command names
3030 \begin_layout Standard
3031 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
3032 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor is moved.
3033 As an example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
3034 window so that table
3035 \begin_inset space ~
3039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3041 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
3047 You will now see a dotted red line on the right and/or left side of the table.
3048 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
3051 \begin_layout Standard
3052 \begin_inset Float table
3059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3060 \begin_inset Caption Standard
3062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3063 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3065 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
3069 Horizontal scrolling test.
3077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3079 \begin_inset Tabular
3080 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
3081 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3082 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
3083 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
3084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
3086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3126 \begin_layout Section
3127 Input/Word Completion
3128 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3130 name "sec:Input-Completion"
3135 \begin_inset Index idx
3140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3147 \begin_inset Index idx
3152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3183 \begin_layout Standard
3185 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently opened.
3186 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that is used to propose completions.
3189 \begin_layout Standard
3190 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
3193 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3198 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
3205 \begin_inset space ~
3209 \begin_inset space ~
3214 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
3218 \begin_inset space ~
3223 the completions are always shown in a popup.
3224 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
3227 \begin_inset space ~
3233 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and popup completion,
3234 you can set the minimal number of characters a word must have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose if long completions should be abbreviated.
3237 \begin_layout Standard
3239 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are completions available.
3244 key to accept a proposed completion.
3245 If several completions are possible,
3246 a popup is opened showing them.
3247 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys
3248 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
3252 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
3259 \begin_layout Standard
3260 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the corresponding options for text.
3262 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
3265 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
3267 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
3270 he special math option
3274 enables characters to be composed.
3276 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180192
3279 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180192
3284 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180208
3287 you want to insert the character
3288 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
3293 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180217
3296 input the characters
3297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3309 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180228
3311 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180229
3315 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180234
3317 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180235
3322 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180245
3324 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180246
3327 his is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use of the math toolbar.
3329 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180267
3331 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180267
3334 supported character combinations can be found in the file
3339 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180288
3341 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180288
3345 's installation folder.
3347 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
3348 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation mark key “!”.
3354 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
3359 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
3360 In the example above,
3366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3399 \begin_layout Section
3401 \begin_inset Index idx
3406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3413 \begin_inset Index idx
3418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3420 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
3423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3435 \begin_inset Index idx
3440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3442 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
3445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3459 \begin_layout Standard
3460 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
3476 which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
3479 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
3483 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
3484 \begin_inset space ~
3488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3490 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
3498 \begin_layout Standard
3503 \begin_inset space ~
3512 \begin_inset space ~
3537 do exactly what you expect them to do.
3541 \begin_layout Labeling
3542 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3546 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3547 LatexCommand nomenclature
3549 description "Tabulator key"
3556 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
3558 If you do not understand this,
3560 \begin_inset space ~
3564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3566 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
3572 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3574 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
3581 \begin_inset space ~
3585 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3587 reference "subsec:Lists"
3596 If you are still confused,
3602 \begin_inset Newline newline
3610 key is only used to accept proposed input completions,
3611 to move the cursor in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or Enumerate.
3614 \begin_layout Labeling
3615 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3619 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3620 LatexCommand nomenclature
3622 description "Escape key"
3630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3639 to cancel operations.
3640 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
3643 \begin_layout Labeling
3644 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3649 These move the cursor,
3651 to the beginning and end of a line,
3652 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning or end of the file.
3655 \begin_layout Standard
3656 There are three modifier keys:
3659 \begin_layout Labeling
3660 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3678 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3679 LatexCommand nomenclature
3681 description "Control key"
3686 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses depending on which keys it is used in combination with:
3690 \begin_layout Itemize
3700 it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
3703 \begin_layout Itemize
3713 it moves by words instead of characters.
3716 \begin_layout Itemize
3726 it moves to the beginning and the end of the document,
3731 \begin_layout Labeling
3732 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3750 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3751 LatexCommand nomenclature
3753 description "Shift key"
3758 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select the text between the old and new cursor positions.
3761 \begin_layout Labeling
3762 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3780 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3781 LatexCommand nomenclature
3783 description "Alt or Meta key"
3788 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards,
3789 unless your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
3790 If you have both keys,
3791 you will need to try out which one actually performs the
3796 \begin_inset Newline newline
3799 This key does many different things,
3800 but it also activates the
3802 menu accelerator keys
3805 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a menu or menu item,
3806 it selects that menu item.
3810 \begin_layout Standard
3813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3819 \begin_inset space ~
3823 \begin_inset space ~
3829 \begin_inset space ~
3837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3856 \begin_inset space ~
3862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3872 \begin_layout Standard
3877 manual lists all other things bound to the
3885 \begin_layout Standard
3886 You will learn more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use \SpecialChar LyX
3887 because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
3888 's main window describing the name of the action you have just triggered and any existing key bindings for that action.
3890 menus also list the defined key bindings.
3891 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used in this documentation so you should not have any problems understanding it.
3892 However notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned,
3894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3909 followed by a capital
3916 \begin_layout Chapter
3919 \begin_inset Index idx
3924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3927 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3944 \begin_layout Section
3946 \begin_inset Index idx
3951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3953 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3970 \begin_layout Subsection
3974 \begin_layout Standard
3975 Before you do anything else,
3976 before you ever start writing a document,
3977 you need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3978 Different types of documents use different types of spacing,
3983 different documents use different paragraph environments,
3984 and format the title of your document differently.
3987 \begin_layout Standard
3992 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3993 By setting the document class,
3994 you automatically select these properties,
3995 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3996 If you don't choose a document class,
3998 picks one for you by default.
3999 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
4002 \begin_layout Subsection
4004 \begin_inset Index idx
4009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4011 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4026 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4028 name "sec:Document-Classes"
4035 \begin_layout Standard
4036 You can select a class using the
4038 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4039 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4043 \begin_inset Index idx
4048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4050 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4065 Select the class you want to use,
4066 and make any fine tunings of the options you may need.
4069 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4073 \begin_layout Standard
4074 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
4079 \begin_layout Description
4080 Article for basic articles
4083 \begin_layout Description
4084 Report for basic reports
4087 \begin_layout Description
4088 Book for writing a book
4091 \begin_layout Description
4092 Letter for US-style letters
4095 \begin_layout Standard
4096 There are also some non-standard classes,
4097 which \SpecialChar LyX
4098 only uses if you have installed the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
4100 though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
4101 distributions will include many of these.
4102 Here are some of the classes.
4103 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
4105 Special Document Classes
4114 \begin_layout Description
4115 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
4118 \begin_layout Description
4119 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry Society
4122 \begin_layout Description
4123 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical Union
4126 \begin_layout Description
4127 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American Mathematical Society (AMS).
4128 There are three article layouts available.
4129 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc.,
4130 that prepends the section number to the number of the result.
4131 All result-type statements (propositions,
4133 and so on) are sequenced together,
4136 and the like have their own sequence.
4138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4141 sequential numbering
4142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4145 scheme does not place the section number with each result,
4146 but numbers them throughout the article in a single sequence.
4147 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
4148 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
4151 \begin_layout Description
4152 Beamer Layout for presentations
4155 \begin_layout Description
4156 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
4157 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
4159 but a new one that is distributed with \SpecialChar LyX
4163 \begin_layout Description
4164 Chess Layout to write about chess games
4167 \begin_layout Description
4169 \begin_inset space ~
4172 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
4175 \begin_layout Description
4176 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
4179 \begin_layout Description
4180 Foils Used to make transparencies
4183 \begin_layout Description
4184 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
4185 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
4187 but a new one that is distributed with \SpecialChar LyX
4191 \begin_layout Description
4192 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
4195 \begin_layout Description
4196 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
4199 \begin_layout Description
4200 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
4203 \begin_layout Description
4204 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes,
4205 offers many useful features like caption formatting,
4206 automatic print space calculation etc.
4207 (Is used by this document.)
4210 \begin_layout Description
4211 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
4214 \begin_layout Description
4215 Powerdot Layout for presentations
4218 \begin_layout Description
4223 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical Society (APS),
4224 American Institute of Physics (AIP),
4225 and Optical Society of America (OSA).
4226 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
4230 \begin_layout Description
4231 Slides Used to make transparencies
4234 \begin_layout Description
4236 \begin_inset space ~
4239 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
4242 \begin_layout Description
4243 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
4246 \begin_layout Standard
4247 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes here.
4248 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
4250 Special Document Classes
4258 we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all of the document classes.
4261 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4265 \begin_layout Standard
4266 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
4268 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4269 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4273 \begin_inset Index idx
4278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4280 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4303 If you open a document that uses such a class,
4304 you will receive a warning saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are not installed.
4305 So it may seem that something is wrong.
4308 \begin_layout Standard
4311 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
4318 are highly specialized.
4320 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
4321 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files,
4322 with a growing number.
4323 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
4324 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed by some document class.
4325 There are just too many of them.
4326 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
4329 \begin_layout Standard
4330 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
4331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4339 you just need to install the appropriate package files.
4340 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that document class for a new file.
4342 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
4345 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
4352 manual for information on how to install them.
4353 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
4359 \begin_layout Standard
4360 Although \SpecialChar LyX
4361 provides support for many different sorts of documents,
4362 it does not include support for every document class people might want to use.
4364 many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
4365 class files to be used for dissertations submitted to those universities.
4366 The \SpecialChar LyX
4367 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
4370 users can write their own layout files,
4371 and many users have done so.
4374 Installing New Document Classes,
4382 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
4385 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4387 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4389 name "subsec:Modules"
4394 \begin_inset Index idx
4399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4401 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4418 \begin_layout Standard
4419 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the chosen document class.
4420 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
4421 This is not available in any document class,
4422 so you have to load the corresponding module in the
4428 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4432 \begin_inset Index idx
4437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4439 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4454 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what it does.
4457 \begin_layout Standard
4458 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
4459 packages or file format converters that are not always installed by default.
4461 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter,
4462 and it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
4463 You can still use the module while editing your file,
4464 but you will not be able to export to PDF or print your document,
4465 since \SpecialChar LyX
4466 will not be able to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4467 file without the missing prerequisites.
4468 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output,
4469 then you need to install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
4472 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
4476 \begin_inset Index idx
4481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4482 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
4489 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
4493 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
4497 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
4506 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
4508 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
4519 manual for more information on installing required packages.
4522 \begin_layout Standard
4523 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4532 Some modules require other modules,
4533 and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
4535 will advise you about these things.
4543 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4545 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4547 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
4552 \begin_inset Index idx
4557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4559 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4576 \begin_layout Standard
4577 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
4578 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
4580 They are intended to be used in a variety of different documents.
4581 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different documents,
4582 you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
4585 a particular document has very special needs,
4586 but you need a specific inset or
4587 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
4589 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182122
4592 style only that one time.
4593 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
4595 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
4597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4613 manual for information on how to use it.
4616 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4620 \begin_layout Standard
4621 Each class has a default set of options.
4622 Here's a quick table describing them:
4625 \begin_layout Standard
4626 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4632 \begin_layout Standard
4634 \begin_inset Tabular
4635 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
4636 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
4637 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4638 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4639 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4640 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4641 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
5002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
5019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
5037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
5055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
5073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5095 \begin_layout Standard
5096 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
5102 \begin_layout Standard
5103 You're probably also wondering what
5104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5108 \begin_inset space ~
5112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5116 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
5117 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
5123 the rest do not and begin instead with the
5128 Some document classes,
5129 such as the ones for letters,
5130 don't use any section headings.
5151 We will describe these headings fully in section
5152 \begin_inset space ~
5156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5158 reference "subsec:Headings"
5166 \begin_layout Subsection
5168 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5170 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
5175 \begin_inset Index idx
5180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5182 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5197 \begin_inset Index idx
5202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5204 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5221 \begin_layout Standard
5222 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
5224 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5231 \begin_inset space ~
5239 \begin_inset space ~
5245 you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated list.
5246 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
5247 doesn't support special options you want to use for your document.
5248 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
5249 -class and its options,
5250 you have to read its manual.
5253 \begin_layout Standard
5255 \change_deleted -712698321 1597235163
5259 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182166
5263 \begin_inset space ~
5270 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5276 \begin_inset space ~
5281 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
5282 You can choose between the following five options:
5285 \begin_layout Labeling
5286 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5291 Use default page style of current class.
5294 \begin_layout Labeling
5295 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5300 No page numbers or headings.
5303 \begin_layout Labeling
5304 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5312 \begin_layout Labeling
5313 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5318 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
5319 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
5320 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the maximum sectioning level of the class.
5323 \begin_layout Labeling
5324 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5329 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
5335 \begin_inset Index idx
5340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5343 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5358 How they are defined is explained in section
5359 \begin_inset space ~
5363 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5365 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
5373 \begin_layout Standard
5374 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
5375 \begin_inset space ~
5379 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5381 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
5389 \begin_layout Subsection
5390 Paper Size and Orientation
5391 \begin_inset Index idx
5396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5398 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5413 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5415 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
5422 \begin_layout Standard
5423 You can find the following options in the menu
5426 \begin_inset space ~
5433 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5437 \begin_inset Index idx
5442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5444 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5461 \begin_layout Labeling
5462 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5466 \begin_inset space ~
5471 What size paper to print on.
5476 \begin_layout Itemize
5482 \begin_layout Itemize
5488 \begin_layout Itemize
5494 \begin_layout Itemize
5500 \begin_layout Itemize
5508 \begin_layout Itemize
5514 \begin_layout Itemize
5521 \begin_layout Labeling
5522 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5527 To choose whether to output as
5538 \begin_layout Labeling
5539 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5543 \begin_inset space ~
5548 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
5549 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
5552 \begin_layout Subsection
5554 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5556 name "subsec:Margins"
5561 \begin_inset Index idx
5566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5568 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5583 \begin_inset Index idx
5588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5597 \begin_layout Standard
5598 Paper margins are set in the menu
5600 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5604 \begin_inset Index idx
5609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5611 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5628 \begin_layout Standard
5629 If you use a KOMA-Script document class,
5630 you can use the default settings because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking the paper format and the font size into account.
5633 \begin_layout Subsection
5637 \begin_layout Standard
5638 If you change a document class,
5640 has to convert everything into the new class.
5641 That includes the paragraph environments.
5642 Some paragraph environments are standard,
5643 in so far as all of the document classes have them;
5644 but some classes have special paragraph environments.
5645 If this is the case,
5646 and you change the document class,
5648 will mark the paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
5649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5657 The name of the style is retained,
5658 in case you should want to go back to the old class.
5659 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting,
5660 so you will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraphs manually to a style present in your new document class.
5663 \begin_layout Section
5664 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
5665 \begin_inset Index idx
5670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5672 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5689 \begin_layout Subsection
5691 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5693 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
5700 \begin_layout Standard
5701 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments,
5702 we'd like to say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
5705 \begin_layout Standard
5706 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
5707 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
5708 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
5709 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
5713 paragraph of a section,
5724 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
5725 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document language than English.
5727 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
5730 \begin_layout Standard
5731 The space between paragraphs,
5732 like the line spacing,
5733 the space between headings and text —
5735 all the spacing for just about everything —
5736 is pre-coded into \SpecialChar LyX
5739 you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
5743 these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a range.
5746 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures fit on a page with text,
5747 so that sections don't start at the bottom of a page,
5752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5754 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
5755 goes to produce a printable file.
5761 pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
5763 gives you the ability globally to change
5767 these pre-coded spacings.
5768 We will explain more later.
5771 \begin_layout Subsection
5772 Paragraph Separation
5773 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5775 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
5780 \begin_inset Index idx
5785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5787 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5804 \begin_layout Standard
5812 \begin_inset space ~
5820 \begin_inset space ~
5827 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5831 \begin_inset Index idx
5836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5838 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5852 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs,
5856 \begin_layout Subsection
5860 \begin_layout Standard
5861 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
5864 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5866 \begin_inset space ~
5871 dialog and toggle the
5874 \begin_inset space ~
5879 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
5882 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
5886 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation,
5887 this button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling this).
5890 \begin_layout Standard
5891 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph if you need to do some fine-tuning.
5894 \begin_layout Subsection
5896 \begin_inset Index idx
5901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5903 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5920 \begin_layout Standard
5923 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5927 \begin_inset Index idx
5932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5934 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5948 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
5951 \begin_inset space ~
5960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5961 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
5967 \begin_inset Index idx
5972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5975 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5989 installed to use this feature.
5994 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
5996 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5998 \begin_inset space ~
6003 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing is normally defined in the environment's style.
6006 \begin_layout Section
6007 Paragraph Environments
6008 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6010 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
6015 \begin_inset Index idx
6020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6022 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6037 \begin_inset Index idx
6042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6043 Paragraph environments
6051 \begin_layout Subsection
6055 \begin_layout Standard
6056 Paragraph environments correspond to the
6059 \begin_layout Standard
6068 } \SpecialChar ldots
6078 \begin_inset Newline newline
6081 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6083 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
6085 or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally alien to you,
6086 we urge you to read the
6095 also contains many more examples than this section does.
6098 \begin_layout Standard
6099 A paragraph environment is simply a
6100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6107 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
6108 This can include a particular style of font,
6115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6122 the different environments inside one another,
6123 allowing one environment to inherit some of the properties of another.
6124 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy tab stops,
6125 on the fly margin adjustment,
6126 and other hangovers from the days of typewriters.
6127 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular document type.
6128 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
6131 \begin_layout Standard
6132 To choose a new paragraph environment,
6133 use the pull-down box
6134 \begin_inset Graphics
6135 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
6141 at the left end of the toolbar.
6143 will change the environment of the
6147 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
6148 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if you select them before choosing the new environment.
6151 \begin_layout Standard
6160 create a new paragraph using the
6164 paragraph environment.
6166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6173 because if you are in one of these environments:
6176 \begin_layout Itemize
6182 \begin_layout Itemize
6188 \begin_layout Itemize
6194 \begin_layout Itemize
6200 \begin_layout Itemize
6206 \begin_layout Itemize
6212 \begin_layout Itemize
6218 \begin_layout Standard
6220 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
6225 rather than resetting it to
6230 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
6231 \begin_inset space ~
6235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6237 reference "sec:Nesting"
6245 \begin_layout Subsection
6249 \begin_layout Standard
6250 The default paragraph environment is
6255 It creates a plain paragraph.
6257 resets the paragraph environment,
6258 this is the one it chooses.
6260 the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in this manual) are in the
6267 \begin_layout Standard
6268 You can nest a paragraph using the
6272 environment in just about anything else,
6273 but you can't really nest anything in a
6280 \begin_layout Subsection
6282 \begin_inset Index idx
6287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6289 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6306 \begin_layout Standard
6307 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
6308 title page has three parts:
6310 the name(s) of the author(s) and a
6311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6318 for thanks or contact information.
6319 For certain types of documents,
6321 places all of this on a separate page along with today's date.
6322 For other types of documents,
6324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6331 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
6334 \begin_layout Standard
6336 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph environments
6351 Here's how you use them:
6354 \begin_layout Itemize
6355 Put the title of your document in the
6362 \begin_layout Itemize
6363 Put the author name in the
6370 \begin_layout Itemize
6371 If you want the date to have a certain appearance,
6372 want to use a fixed date,
6373 or want other text to appear in place of today's date,
6374 put that text in the
6379 Note that using this environment is optional.
6380 If you don't provide any,
6382 will automatically insert today's date.
6383 If you don't want a date,
6386 Suppress default date on front page
6390 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6391 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
6393 \begin_inset space ~
6401 \begin_layout Standard
6402 You can use footnotes to insert
6403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6410 or contact information.
6413 \begin_layout Subsection
6415 \begin_inset Index idx
6420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6427 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6429 name "subsec:Headings"
6436 \begin_layout Standard
6437 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
6439 takes care of the numbering for you.
6442 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6444 \begin_inset Index idx
6449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6451 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6468 \begin_layout Standard
6469 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
6473 \begin_layout Enumerate
6479 \begin_layout Enumerate
6485 \begin_layout Enumerate
6491 \begin_layout Enumerate
6497 \begin_layout Enumerate
6503 \begin_layout Enumerate
6509 \begin_layout Enumerate
6515 \begin_layout Standard
6517 labels each heading with a series of numbers,
6518 separated by periods.
6519 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
6520 Unlike the other headings,
6521 parts are numbered with
6522 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182388
6524 \change_deleted 5863208 1598182398
6526 \change_deleted -131811572 1596358192
6532 \begin_layout Standard
6533 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
6535 suppose you're writing a book.
6536 You group the book into chapters.
6538 does a similar grouping:
6541 \begin_layout Itemize
6546 is divided into either
6557 \begin_layout Itemize
6569 \begin_layout Itemize
6581 \begin_layout Itemize
6593 \begin_layout Itemize
6605 \begin_layout Itemize
6617 \begin_layout Standard
6618 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6627 Not all document types use the
6631 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
6636 is the top-level heading.
6644 \begin_layout Standard
6650 environment to label a new sub-subsection,
6652 labels it with its number,
6653 along with the number of the subsection,
6656 chapter that it's in.
6658 the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the label
6659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6669 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6671 \begin_inset Index idx
6676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6678 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6695 \begin_layout Standard
6696 The unnumbered section headings have a
6697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6704 at the end of their name.
6705 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in the table of contents,
6707 \begin_inset space ~
6711 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6721 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6722 Changing the Numbering
6723 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6725 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
6732 \begin_layout Standard
6733 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear in the Table of Contents.
6735 this doesn't remove any of the levels;
6736 that's preset in the document class.
6737 Just as certain classes start with
6752 not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
6762 This is something you can change.
6765 \begin_layout Standard
6768 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6772 \begin_inset Index idx
6777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6779 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6796 \begin_inset space ~
6800 \begin_inset space ~
6805 you will see two counters.
6810 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
6811 numbers a section heading.
6812 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table of contents.
6815 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6816 Short Titles of Headings
6817 \begin_inset Index idx
6822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6824 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6839 \begin_inset Argument 1
6842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6849 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6851 name "sec:Short-Titles"
6858 \begin_layout Standard
6859 Some section or chapter titles,
6862 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
6864 if the header of the page is set to show the current section title,
6865 a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
6868 \begin_layout Standard
6870 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
6871 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
6872 avoiding the problem mentioned.
6873 To specify a short title,
6874 set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
6876 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6878 \begin_inset space ~
6884 This will insert a box labeled
6885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6889 \begin_inset space ~
6893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6896 which you can use to enter the short title text.
6897 This also works for captions inside floats.
6898 There can only be one short title per title.
6901 \begin_layout Standard
6902 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
6905 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6909 \begin_layout Standard
6910 The following information applies to all section headings:
6913 \begin_layout Itemize
6914 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
6917 \begin_layout Itemize
6918 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
6921 \begin_layout Itemize
6922 You can only use inline math in these environments.
6925 \begin_layout Itemize
6926 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
6929 \begin_layout Subsection
6933 \begin_layout Standard
6935 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
6951 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
6952 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
6953 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below the text they contain.
6954 They also allow nesting,
6964 as well as in some other paragraph environments.
6967 \begin_layout Standard
6968 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments:
6977 when you start a new paragraph.
6979 you can type in that poem and merrily enter
6983 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
6986 once you are done typing in that poem,
6987 you have to change back to the
6991 environment yourself.
6994 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6996 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7003 \begin_inset Index idx
7008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7017 \begin_layout Standard
7018 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments,
7019 it's time for the differences.
7028 are identical except for one difference:
7033 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
7042 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
7045 \begin_layout Standard
7046 Here's an example of the
7060 extending this line out further and further until it wraps.
7061 See – no indentation!
7065 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
7067 there's no indentation,
7068 but there is extra space between me and the other paragraph.
7071 \begin_layout Standard
7072 Here's another example,
7080 \begin_layout Quotation
7087 you will see the indentation.
7088 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting the first line,
7093 is the environment for you!
7099 you were quoting other text.
7102 \begin_layout Quotation
7103 Here's a new paragraph.
7104 I could ramble on and on,
7105 like a politician at election time.
7111 \begin_layout Standard
7112 As the examples show,
7117 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
7118 They should put quotes in the
7123 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
7127 paragraph environment for quoted text.
7130 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7132 \begin_inset Index idx
7137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7139 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7154 \begin_inset Index idx
7159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7166 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7175 \begin_layout Standard
7180 is a paragraph environment for poetry,
7189 \begin_inset Newline newline
7192 Which I did not rehearse!
7196 It could be much worse.
7197 This line could be long,
7200 so very long that it wraps around.
7201 It looks okay on screen,
7202 but in the printed version,
7203 the extra lines are indented a bit more than the first.
7205 so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
7211 \begin_inset Newline newline
7214 And make things look fine
7215 \begin_inset Newline newline
7221 arg "newline-insert newline"
7227 \begin_layout Standard
7233 does not indent both margins.
7234 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
7235 To separate the individual lines of a stanza,
7239 arg "newline-insert newline"
7245 \begin_layout Subsection
7247 \begin_inset Index idx
7252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7259 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7268 \begin_layout Standard
7270 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds of lists.
7281 labels your list items with bullets or numbers,
7293 lets you provide your own label.
7294 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after describing some general features of all four of them.
7297 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7301 \begin_layout Standard
7302 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments in several ways.
7305 treats each paragraph as a list item.
7314 reset the environment to
7318 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
7319 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
7320 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting depth,
7324 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
7328 If you do this at the top level of a list,
7329 it returns you to the
7336 \begin_layout Standard
7337 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
7340 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is nested.
7341 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments,
7342 we suggest you read all of section
7343 \begin_inset space ~
7347 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7349 reference "sec:Nesting"
7357 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7359 \begin_inset Index idx
7364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7366 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7381 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7390 \begin_layout Standard
7391 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
7395 paragraph environment.
7396 It has the following properties:
7399 \begin_layout Itemize
7400 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
7404 \begin_layout Itemize
7406 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
7409 \begin_layout Itemize
7410 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
7414 \begin_layout Itemize
7415 The items can have any length.
7417 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
7418 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
7425 \begin_layout Itemize
7430 environment inside another
7435 the label changes to a new symbol.
7439 \begin_layout Itemize
7440 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
7443 \begin_layout Itemize
7445 always shows the same symbol on screen.
7448 \begin_layout Itemize
7450 \begin_inset space ~
7454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7456 reference "sec:Nesting"
7461 for a full explanation of nesting.
7465 \begin_layout Standard
7467 that explanation was also an example of an
7476 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
7479 \begin_layout Standard
7480 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
7481 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
7484 \begin_layout Itemize
7485 The label for the first level
7489 is a large black dot,
7494 \begin_layout Itemize
7495 The label for the second level is a dash.
7499 \begin_layout Itemize
7500 The label for the third is an asterisk.
7504 \begin_layout Itemize
7505 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
7509 \begin_layout Itemize
7510 Back out to the third level.
7514 \begin_layout Itemize
7515 Back to the second level.
7519 \begin_layout Itemize
7520 Back to the outermost level.
7523 \begin_layout Standard
7524 These are the default labels for an
7529 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
7531 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
7534 dialog in the submenu
7539 \begin_inset Index idx
7544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7546 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7560 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
7564 \begin_layout Standard
7565 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
7566 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths in section
7567 \begin_inset space ~
7571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7573 reference "sec:Nesting"
7581 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7583 \begin_inset Index idx
7588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7590 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7605 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7607 name "sec:Enumerate"
7614 \begin_layout Standard
7619 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
7620 It has these properties:
7623 \begin_layout Enumerate
7624 Each item has a numeral as its label.
7628 \begin_layout Enumerate
7629 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
7633 \begin_layout Enumerate
7635 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
7638 \begin_layout Enumerate
7643 environment resets the counter to one.
7646 \begin_layout Enumerate
7660 \begin_layout Enumerate
7661 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
7662 Items can have any length.
7665 \begin_layout Enumerate
7666 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
7669 \begin_layout Enumerate
7670 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
7673 \begin_layout Enumerate
7674 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
7678 \begin_layout Standard
7688 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
7690 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
7691 labels the four different levels in an
7698 \begin_layout Enumerate
7699 The first level of an
7703 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
7707 \begin_layout Enumerate
7708 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
7712 \begin_layout Enumerate
7713 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
7717 \begin_layout Enumerate
7718 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
7721 \begin_layout Enumerate
7723 notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth increases.
7727 \begin_layout Enumerate
7728 Back to the third level
7732 \begin_layout Enumerate
7733 Back to the second level.
7737 \begin_layout Enumerate
7738 Back to the outermost level.
7741 \begin_layout Standard
7742 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
7748 \begin_inset space ~
7752 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7754 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7760 Such customization only shows up in the printed version,
7761 not in \SpecialChar LyX
7765 \begin_layout Standard
7766 There is more to nesting
7770 environments than we've stated here.
7771 You should read section
7772 \begin_inset space ~
7776 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7778 reference "sec:Nesting"
7783 to learn more about nesting.
7786 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7788 \begin_inset Index idx
7793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7795 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7812 \begin_layout Standard
7813 Unlike the previous two environments,
7818 list has no fixed label.
7822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7829 of the first line as the label.
7833 \begin_layout Description
7835 This is an example of the
7842 \begin_layout Standard
7844 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the rest of the line.
7847 \begin_layout Standard
7849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7856 it is meant that the first usage of the
7860 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an item.
7861 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
7862 \change_deleted 177693 1654619261
7866 \change_inserted 177693 1654619261
7875 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7880 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7881 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7883 \change_deleted 177693 1654619271
7885 \change_inserted 177693 1654619271
7889 \begin_inset space ~
7896 \begin_inset space ~
7900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7902 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
7907 for more information.) Here is an example:
7910 \begin_layout Description
7912 \begin_inset space ~
7916 This one shows how to use a
7917 \change_deleted 177693 1654619281
7921 \change_inserted 177693 1654619281
7925 \begin_inset space ~
7937 \begin_layout Description
7943 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
7944 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text that describes it.
7945 It's not a good idea to use a
7949 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
7950 You're better off using
7962 paragraphs into them.
7965 \begin_layout Description
7971 environments inside one another,
7972 nest them in other types of lists,
7976 \begin_layout Standard
7977 Notice that after the first line,
7979 indents subsequent lines,
7980 offsetting them from the first line.
7983 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7985 \begin_inset Index idx
7990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7992 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8009 \begin_layout Standard
8014 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8015 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
8019 \begin_layout Standard
8028 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional features.
8029 Here are its properties:
8032 \begin_layout Labeling
8033 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8035 \begin_inset space ~
8038 labels \SpecialChar LyX
8040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8047 of each line as the item label.
8052 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
8053 If you need to use more than one word in an item label,
8055 \change_deleted 177693 1654619285
8057 \change_inserted 177693 1654619287
8060 space as described above.
8063 \begin_layout Labeling
8064 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8065 margins As you can see,
8067 uses different margins for the item label and the body of the item text.
8068 The body of the text has a larger left margin,
8069 which is equal to the default label width plus a little extra space.
8072 \begin_layout Labeling
8073 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8075 \begin_inset space ~
8078 width \SpecialChar LyX
8079 uses the width of the label,
8080 or the default width,
8082 If the label width is larger,
8084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8091 into the first line.
8093 the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left margin of the rest of the item text.
8096 \begin_layout Labeling
8097 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8099 \begin_inset space ~
8102 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all items in a
8106 environment has the same left margin.
8107 \begin_inset Newline newline
8110 To change the default width,
8111 select all items in the list.
8114 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8116 \begin_inset space ~
8121 dialog (toolbar button
8124 arg "layout-paragraph"
8131 \begin_inset space ~
8136 determines the default label width.
8137 You can use the text of your largest label here,
8138 but you can also use the letter
8139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8146 multiple times instead.
8147 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
8150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8157 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
8160 \begin_inset space ~
8165 every time you alter a label in a
8170 \begin_inset Newline newline
8173 The predefined default width is the length of
8174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8182 \begin_inset space ~
8188 \begin_layout Standard
8193 list the same way as the
8198 When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes it.
8203 environment gives you another way to do this,
8204 using a different overall layout.
8207 \begin_layout Standard
8212 lists inside one another,
8213 nest them in other types of lists,
8215 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
8217 \begin_inset space ~
8221 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8223 reference "sec:Nesting"
8228 to learn about nesting.
8231 \begin_layout Standard
8232 There is yet another feature of the
8237 As you can see in the examples,
8239 left-justifies the item labels by default.
8240 You can use additional
8243 \change_inserted 177693 1654621595
8248 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
8249 justifies the item label.
8253 \change_inserted 177693 1654621600
8255 \change_deleted 177693 1654621601
8257 \change_inserted 177693 1654621603
8262 are documented in section
8263 \begin_inset space ~
8267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8269 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
8275 Here are some examples:
8278 \begin_layout Labeling
8279 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8280 Left The default for
8287 \begin_layout Labeling
8288 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8289 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
8295 \change_inserted 177693 1654621610
8300 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
8303 \begin_layout Labeling
8304 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8305 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
8309 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
8315 \change_inserted 177693 1654621617
8320 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
8323 \begin_layout Subsection
8325 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8327 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
8332 \begin_inset Index idx
8337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8339 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8356 \begin_layout Standard
8357 The features described in this section require that the module
8359 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
8361 is loaded in the document settings.
8362 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
8368 \begin_inset Index idx
8373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8376 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8393 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8394 Custom Enumerate Lists
8395 \begin_inset Index idx
8400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8402 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8412 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8429 \begin_layout Standard
8431 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional argument (menu
8433 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
8436 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
8437 There you add the command
8440 \begin_layout Standard
8448 \begin_layout Standard
8460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8461 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
8464 \begin_inset space ~
8468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8470 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
8484 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
8491 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
8492 For capital Roman numerals replace
8504 in the command above.
8505 For Arabic numerals use
8513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8520 items with capital or small Latin letters use
8536 \begin_layout Standard
8538 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8547 You can only number 26
8548 \begin_inset space ~
8551 items with Latin letters,
8552 because this numbering is limited to single letters.
8560 \begin_layout Standard
8561 To change the numbering for the list sublevels,
8562 replace the 'i' in the command by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi,
8568 \begin_layout Standard
8569 Here is a list with custom numbering:
8572 \begin_layout Enumerate
8573 \begin_inset Argument 1
8576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8602 \begin_layout Enumerate
8603 \begin_inset Argument 1
8606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8629 \begin_layout Enumerate
8634 \begin_layout Enumerate
8635 \begin_inset Argument 1
8638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8662 \begin_layout Enumerate
8663 \begin_inset Argument 1
8666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8692 \begin_layout Standard
8693 For this list these commands were used:
8696 \begin_layout Standard
8707 \begin_inset Newline newline
8715 \begin_inset Newline newline
8723 \begin_inset Newline newline
8733 \begin_layout Standard
8740 makes the label emphasized and
8749 \begin_layout Standard
8750 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8759 When you change the label of a list level,
8760 it will be used for all following lists until you change the definition.
8768 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8770 \begin_inset Index idx
8775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8777 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8787 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8804 \begin_layout Standard
8805 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
8808 \begin_layout Enumerate
8809 \begin_inset Argument 1
8812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8831 \begin_inset Note Note
8834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8835 goes back to default numbering
8843 \begin_layout Enumerate
8847 \begin_layout Standard
8851 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
8855 \begin_layout Standard
8856 To resume an enumeration,
8863 \change_deleted -584632292 1616513280
8864 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
8865 to indicate that it is a resumed list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
8872 \begin_layout Standard
8873 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8882 If there is no previous enumeration to resume,
8883 you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
8892 \begin_layout Standard
8893 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the next one.
8894 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
8895 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item of a normal enumeration.
8900 \begin_layout Standard
8906 \begin_layout Standard
8911 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
8915 \begin_layout Enumerate
8919 \begin_layout Enumerate
8923 \begin_layout Standard
8924 Enumeration starting at a given value:
8927 \begin_layout Enumerate
8928 \begin_inset Argument 1
8931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8947 This enumeration starts at 4
8950 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8952 \begin_inset Index idx
8957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8959 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8976 \begin_layout Standard
8977 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items of a list.
8978 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
8981 \begin_layout Itemize
8985 \begin_layout Itemize
8986 with standard spacing
8989 \begin_layout Standard
8990 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item of the list.
8991 Add there the command
8995 to get no additional list space like in this example:
8998 \begin_layout Itemize
8999 \begin_inset Argument 1
9002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9021 \begin_layout Itemize
9025 \begin_layout Itemize
9029 \begin_layout Standard
9030 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
9036 \begin_inset Index idx
9041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9044 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
9047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9059 For more information see its documentation,
9061 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
9071 \begin_layout Standard
9072 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing and indentation.
9073 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs in the document and the label separation was set to 2
9074 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9077 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
9080 \begin_layout Enumerate
9081 \begin_inset Argument 1
9084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9106 \begin_layout Enumerate
9107 with negative indentation
9110 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9111 Further Customization
9112 \begin_inset Index idx
9117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9119 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
9122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9136 \begin_layout Standard
9137 You can also change the style of description lists.
9141 \begin_layout Standard
9147 \begin_layout Standard
9148 changes the description label font,
9152 \begin_layout Standard
9158 \begin_layout Standard
9159 sets the list style.
9162 \begin_layout Standard
9163 An example where the command
9166 \begin_layout Standard
9175 \begin_layout Standard
9179 \begin_layout Description
9181 \begin_inset space ~
9186 \begin_inset Argument 1
9189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9210 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules,
9211 therefore ionizing them.
9214 \begin_layout Description
9216 \begin_inset space ~
9220 In computer science,
9221 reference counting is a technique of storing the number of references,
9223 or handles to a resource such as an object,
9225 disk space or other resource.
9228 \begin_layout Standard
9229 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
9235 \begin_inset Index idx
9240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9243 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
9246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9258 For more information see its documentation
9259 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
9269 \begin_layout Subsection
9271 \begin_inset Index idx
9276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9285 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9287 \begin_inset space ~
9294 \begin_layout Standard
9295 Although \SpecialChar LyX
9296 has document classes for letters,
9297 we've also created two paragraph environments called
9304 \begin_inset space ~
9310 To use the letter class,
9311 you need to use specific paragraph environments in a specific order,
9312 otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
9313 gags on the document.
9322 \begin_inset space ~
9327 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
9328 You can even nest them inside other environments,
9329 though you can't nest anything in them.
9332 \begin_layout Standard
9334 you're not limited to using
9341 \begin_inset space ~
9350 \begin_inset space ~
9357 is useful for creating article titles like those used in some European academic papers.
9360 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9362 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9364 name "sec:Address-Usage"
9371 \begin_layout Standard
9376 environment formats text in the style of an address,
9377 which is also used for the opening and signature in some countries.
9382 \begin_inset space ~
9387 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address,
9388 which is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
9389 Here's an example of each:
9392 \begin_layout Right Address
9394 \begin_inset Newline newline
9398 \begin_inset Newline newline
9402 \begin_inset Newline newline
9409 \begin_layout Standard
9413 \begin_inset space ~
9419 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin,
9420 which \SpecialChar LyX
9421 sets to fit the largest block of text on a single line.
9422 Here's an example of the
9429 \begin_layout Address
9431 \begin_inset Newline newline
9434 Where do I send this
9435 \begin_inset Newline newline
9438 Your post office and country
9441 \begin_layout Standard
9450 \begin_inset space ~
9455 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
9460 in either of these environments,
9462 resets the nesting depth and sets the environment to
9477 and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
9486 arg "newline-insert newline"
9491 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
9492 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
9494 \begin_inset space ~
9498 \begin_inset space ~
9503 ) to start a new line in an
9510 \begin_inset space ~
9518 \begin_layout Subsection
9522 \begin_layout Standard
9523 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography or list of references.
9525 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
9528 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9530 \begin_inset Index idx
9535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9544 \begin_layout Standard
9549 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
9551 you could use this environment anywhere,
9552 but you really should only use it at the beginning of the document,
9555 don't bother trying to nest
9559 in anything else or vice versa.
9565 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
9566 The book document classes ignores the
9571 and it's utterly silly to use
9575 in a letter document class.
9578 \begin_layout Standard
9583 environment does several things for you.
9585 it puts the centered label
9586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9594 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical space.
9596 it typesets everything in a smaller font,
9597 just as you'd expect.
9599 it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and the subsequent text.
9601 that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
9603 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are using.
9606 \begin_layout Standard
9607 Starting a new paragraph by entering
9611 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9612 The new paragraph will still be in the
9618 you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you finish entering the abstract of your document.
9621 \begin_layout Standard
9622 \begin_inset Float figure
9629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9631 \begin_inset Graphics
9632 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
9639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9640 \begin_inset Caption Standard
9642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9645 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
9666 \begin_layout Standard
9667 We would love to demonstrate the
9672 but since this document is in the
9673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9682 We inserted it therefore as figure
9683 \begin_inset space ~
9687 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9689 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
9695 If you have never heard of an
9696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9704 you can safely ignore this environment.
9707 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9709 \begin_inset Index idx
9714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9721 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9723 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
9730 \begin_layout Standard
9735 environment is used to list references.
9737 you could use this environment anywhere,
9738 but you really should only use it at the end of the document.
9750 \begin_layout Standard
9751 When you first open a
9757 adds a large vertical space,
9758 followed by the heading
9759 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9763 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9774 depending on the document class.
9775 The heading is in a large boldface font.
9776 Each paragraph of the
9780 environment is a bibliography entry.
9786 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9787 Each new paragraph is still in the
9794 \begin_layout Standard
9796 usually better way to include references in your document by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
9798 For more information on that,
9799 and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
9800 's bibliography handling,
9801 have a look at section
9802 \begin_inset space ~
9806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9808 reference "sec:Bibliography"
9816 \begin_layout Subsection
9817 Special Environments
9820 \begin_layout Standard
9822 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
9825 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9830 \begin_inset Index idx
9835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9843 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9845 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
9852 \begin_layout Standard
9858 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
9860 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
9865 key as a fixed whitespace.
9869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9881 \change_deleted 177693 1654619837
9885 \change_inserted 177693 1654619839
9889 \begin_inset space ~
9893 \change_deleted 177693 1654619842
9895 \change_inserted 177693 1654619844
9900 instead of an end-of-word marker.
9919 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in \SpecialChar LyX
9921 If you need to insert blank lines,
9922 you will still need to use
9925 arg "newline-insert newline"
9944 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9946 when you finish using the
9952 you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
9959 environment inside of others.
9962 \begin_layout Standard
9963 There are a few quirks with this environment:
9966 \begin_layout Itemize
9970 arg "newline-insert newline"
9973 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
9974 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9978 \begin_inset space \space{}
9988 arg "newline-insert newline"
9994 \begin_layout Itemize
9998 arg "newline-insert newline"
10008 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10014 \begin_layout Itemize
10015 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
10016 You must put at least one
10020 in any line you want blank.
10026 \begin_layout Itemize
10027 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
10031 since that will insert
10036 You get the typewriter double quotes with
10039 arg "self-insert \""
10045 \begin_layout Standard
10046 Here is an example:
10049 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10053 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10057 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10061 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10065 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10066 printf("Hello World!
10071 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10075 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10079 \begin_layout Standard
10080 This is just the standard
10081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10091 \begin_layout Standard
10099 such as program source,
10100 shell scripts and so on.
10101 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text as if you used a typewriter.
10102 \begin_inset Index idx
10107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10108 Paragraph environments
10113 For longer parts of programming code,
10114 use the listings inset that is described in the chapter
10116 Program Code Listings
10121 \begin_inset space ~
10129 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10133 \begin_inset Index idx
10138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10147 \begin_layout Standard
10152 environment is similar to the
10157 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a computer console text.
10162 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
10176 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a
10177 \change_deleted 177693 1654619849
10179 \change_inserted 177693 1654619851
10182 space) and you can have empty lines.
10196 \begin_layout Itemize
10197 have a certain language and a text style
10200 \begin_layout Itemize
10201 contain hyperlinks,
10203 foot- and margin notes,
10207 index- and nomenclature entries,
10212 floats and \SpecialChar TeX
10216 \begin_layout Standard
10217 Because of these properties
10221 works like a typewriter.
10222 Here is an example:
10225 \begin_layout Verbatim
10230 \begin_layout Verbatim
10234 The following 2 lines are empty:
10237 \begin_layout Verbatim
10241 \begin_layout Verbatim
10245 \begin_layout Verbatim
10247 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
10252 \begin_layout Standard
10257 environment is identical to
10261 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
10262 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
10269 \begin_layout Verbatim*
10274 \begin_layout Section
10275 Nesting Environments
10276 \begin_inset Index idx
10281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10283 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
10286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10298 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10307 \begin_layout Subsection
10311 \begin_layout Standard
10313 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific properties.
10314 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of another block.
10315 For example you have three main points in an outline,
10316 but point #2 also has two subpoints.
10318 you have a list inside of another list,
10319 with the inner list
10320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10330 \begin_layout Enumerate
10334 \begin_layout Enumerate
10339 \begin_layout Enumerate
10343 \begin_layout Enumerate
10348 \begin_layout Enumerate
10352 \begin_layout Standard
10353 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
10354 Nesting an environment is quite simple:
10357 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10359 \begin_inset space ~
10363 \begin_inset space ~
10371 \begin_inset space ~
10375 \begin_inset space ~
10380 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are nested).
10381 Instead of the menu,
10382 you can also use the toolbar buttons
10385 arg "depth-increment"
10391 arg "depth-decrement"
10394 or the key bindings
10405 arg "depth-increment"
10411 arg "depth-decrement"
10415 The change will work on the current selection,
10416 if you have made one (allowing you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once),
10417 or the current paragraph.
10420 \begin_layout Standard
10421 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
10422 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
10423 If it is invalid to do so,
10424 nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
10426 if you change the depth of one paragraph,
10427 it affects the depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
10430 \begin_layout Standard
10431 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
10432 In \SpecialChar LyX
10434 you can nest just about anything inside anything else,
10435 as you're about to find out.
10436 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
10439 \begin_layout Subsection
10440 What You Can and Can't Nest
10443 \begin_layout Standard
10444 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you,
10445 we need to tell you a little bit more about how nesting works.
10448 \begin_layout Standard
10449 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated than a simple yes or no.
10450 There are three types of paragraph environments:
10453 \begin_layout Itemize
10454 Completely unnestable
10457 \begin_layout Itemize
10459 you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other things inside them.
10462 \begin_layout Itemize
10464 you can nest them into other environments,
10465 but you can't nest anything into them.
10468 \begin_layout Standard
10469 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior,
10470 and which paragraph environments have them:
10473 \begin_layout Description
10474 Unnestable Can't nest them.
10475 Can't nest into them.
10479 \begin_layout Itemize
10485 \begin_layout Itemize
10491 \begin_layout Itemize
10497 \begin_layout Itemize
10503 \begin_layout Itemize
10510 \begin_layout Description
10512 \begin_inset space ~
10515 Nestable You can nest them.
10516 You can nest other things into them.
10520 \begin_layout Itemize
10526 \begin_layout Itemize
10532 \begin_layout Itemize
10538 \begin_layout Itemize
10544 \begin_layout Itemize
10550 \begin_layout Itemize
10556 \begin_layout Itemize
10562 \begin_layout Itemize
10569 \begin_layout Itemize
10575 \begin_layout Itemize
10582 \begin_layout Description
10583 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
10584 You can't nest anything into them.
10588 \begin_layout Itemize
10594 \begin_layout Itemize
10600 \begin_layout Itemize
10606 \begin_layout Itemize
10612 \begin_layout Itemize
10618 \begin_layout Itemize
10624 \begin_layout Itemize
10630 \begin_layout Itemize
10636 \begin_layout Itemize
10642 \begin_layout Itemize
10648 \begin_layout Itemize
10654 \begin_layout Itemize
10660 \begin_layout Itemize
10666 \begin_layout Itemize
10670 \begin_inset space ~
10676 \begin_layout Itemize
10683 \begin_layout Standard
10684 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10693 Although it is possible,
10695 to nest numbered section headings like
10706 \begin_inset space ~
10710 it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas nested section headings violate this.
10718 \begin_layout Subsection
10719 Nesting Other Things:
10724 \begin_inset Index idx
10729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10731 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
10734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10748 \begin_layout Standard
10749 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments,
10750 but which are affected by nesting anyhow.
10754 \begin_layout Itemize
10758 \begin_layout Itemize
10762 \begin_layout Itemize
10766 \begin_layout Standard
10768 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10777 Figures and tables in
10781 are not affected by this.
10786 Have a look at section
10787 \begin_inset space ~
10791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10793 reference "sec:Floats"
10798 for more information about
10805 \begin_layout Standard
10807 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
10810 or an equation is inline,
10811 it goes wherever the paragraph it is in goes.
10814 \begin_layout Standard
10816 if you have an equation,
10817 figure or table in a
10818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10826 it behaves just like a
10827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10834 paragraph environment.
10835 You can nest it into any environment,
10836 but you obviously can't nest anything into it.
10839 \begin_layout Standard
10840 Here's an example with a table:
10843 \begin_layout Enumerate
10848 \begin_layout Enumerate
10849 This is (a) and it's nested.
10853 \begin_layout Standard
10854 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10860 \begin_layout Standard
10862 \begin_inset Tabular
10863 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10864 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10865 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10866 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10950 \begin_layout Standard
10951 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10958 \begin_layout Enumerate
10960 The table is actually nested inside (a).
10964 \begin_layout Enumerate
10968 \begin_layout Standard
10969 If we hadn't nested the table at all,
10970 the list would look like this:
10973 \begin_layout Enumerate
10978 \begin_layout Enumerate
10979 This is (a) and it's nested.
10983 \begin_layout Standard
10984 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10990 \begin_layout Standard
10992 \begin_inset Tabular
10993 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10994 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10995 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10996 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11080 \begin_layout Standard
11081 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
11087 \begin_layout Enumerate
11095 it's not nested at all.
11098 \begin_layout Enumerate
11102 \begin_layout Standard
11103 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested,
11104 but is also the first item of a new list!
11107 \begin_layout Standard
11108 There's another trap you can fall into:
11110 but not going deep enough.
11112 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
11115 \begin_layout Enumerate
11120 \begin_layout Enumerate
11121 This is (a) and it's nested.
11124 \begin_layout Standard
11125 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
11131 \begin_layout Standard
11133 \begin_inset Tabular
11134 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
11135 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11136 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
11137 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
11139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11222 \begin_layout Standard
11223 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
11229 \begin_layout Enumerate
11231 The table is actually nested inside Item One,
11239 \begin_layout Enumerate
11243 \begin_layout Standard
11245 item (b) turned into the first item of a new list,
11251 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
11253 if you nest tables,
11254 figures or equations,
11255 make sure you go to the right depth!
11258 \begin_layout Subsection
11259 Usage and General Features
11262 \begin_layout Standard
11263 Speaking of levels,
11265 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
11268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11275 is the innermost possible depth.
11276 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
11279 \begin_layout Enumerate
11280 level #1 – outermost
11284 \begin_layout Enumerate
11289 \begin_layout Enumerate
11294 \begin_layout Enumerate
11299 \begin_layout Itemize
11304 \begin_layout Itemize
11313 \begin_layout Standard
11314 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit,
11315 and you can see both of them in the example.
11316 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments,
11317 you can only perform a four-fold nesting with the
11327 if we tried to nest another
11332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11340 we would get errors.
11343 \begin_layout Subsection
11345 \begin_inset Index idx
11350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11352 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
11355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11369 \begin_layout Standard
11370 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
11371 We have several examples of nested environments.
11373 we explain how we created the example,
11374 so that you can reproduce them.
11377 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11379 The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
11382 \begin_layout Labeling
11383 \labelwidthstring MMM
11384 #1-a This is the outermost level.
11393 \begin_layout Labeling
11394 \labelwidthstring MMM
11395 #2-a This is level #2.
11396 We created it by using
11399 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11405 arg "depth-increment"
11412 \begin_layout Labeling
11413 \labelwidthstring MMM
11414 #3-a This is level #3.
11424 arg "depth-increment"
11428 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
11432 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11438 arg "depth-increment"
11445 \begin_layout Standard
11452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11462 We did this by entering
11465 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11472 arg "depth-increment"
11476 then changing the paragraph environment to
11481 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph —
11482 it also works for the
11499 \begin_layout Standard
11509 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11515 \begin_layout Labeling
11516 \labelwidthstring MMM
11517 #4-a This is level #4.
11521 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11524 and changed the paragraph environment back to
11530 we can't nest anything inside a
11535 which is why we're still at level #4.
11541 keep nesting things inside
11542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11553 \begin_layout Labeling
11554 \labelwidthstring MMM
11555 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
11560 \begin_layout Labeling
11561 \labelwidthstring MMM
11562 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
11563 and this is level #6.
11565 you should know how we made these two.
11569 \begin_layout Labeling
11570 \labelwidthstring MMM
11571 #5-b Back to level #5.
11575 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11581 arg "depth-decrement"
11588 \begin_layout Labeling
11589 \labelwidthstring MMM
11593 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11599 arg "depth-decrement"
11603 we're back at level #4.
11607 \begin_layout Labeling
11608 \labelwidthstring MMM
11609 #3-b Back to level #3.
11610 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
11614 \begin_layout Labeling
11615 \labelwidthstring MMM
11616 #2-b Back to level #2.
11620 \begin_layout Labeling
11621 \labelwidthstring MMM
11623 back to the outermost level,
11625 After this sentence,
11630 and change the paragraph environment back to
11637 \begin_layout Standard
11638 We could have also used the
11657 environment in place of the
11662 The example would have worked exactly the same.
11665 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11670 \begin_layout LyX-Code
11671 This is the LyX-Code environment,
11676 \begin_layout LyX-Code
11686 arg "depth-increment"
11691 \begin_inset Newline newline
11695 we will change to the
11703 \begin_layout Enumerate
11712 \begin_layout Enumerate
11713 Notice how the nested
11717 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
11722 but also inherits its font and spacing!
11726 \begin_layout Standard
11727 We ended this example by entering
11733 we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
11737 and reset the nesting depth by using
11740 arg "depth-decrement"
11746 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11759 \begin_inset Argument 1
11762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11765 Levels and other list environments
11773 \begin_layout Enumerate
11779 paragraph environment.
11780 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
11784 \begin_layout Enumerate
11789 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11795 arg "depth-increment"
11800 what happens if we nest an
11804 environment inside of this one?
11805 It will be at level #3,
11806 but what will its label be?
11811 \begin_layout Itemize
11823 even though it's at level #3.
11825 its label is a bullet.
11826 (We got here by using
11829 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11836 arg "depth-increment"
11840 then changing the environment to
11848 \begin_layout Itemize
11853 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11860 arg "depth-increment"
11864 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
11869 \begin_layout Enumerate
11871 to get to level #5.
11874 we also changed the paragraph environment back to
11879 Notice the type of numbering,
11885 because we are in the
11893 environment (that is,
11909 \begin_layout Enumerate
11914 change the paragraph environment,
11915 but decrease the nesting depth?
11916 What type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
11920 \begin_layout Enumerate
11922 as if you couldn't guess by now,
11926 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11929 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
11932 \begin_layout Enumerate
11936 arg "depth-decrement"
11939 to decrease the depth after the next
11942 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11949 \begin_layout Enumerate
11951 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
11956 \begin_layout Enumerate
11958 Even though we've changed levels,
11960 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral as the label.Why?
11963 \begin_layout Enumerate
11965 even though the nesting depth has changed,
11977 that \SpecialChar LyX
11982 reset the counter for the label.
11986 \begin_layout Enumerate
11990 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11996 arg "depth-decrement"
12000 and we're back to level #2.
12002 we not only changed the nesting depth,
12003 but we also moved back into the twofold-nested
12011 \begin_layout Enumerate
12012 The same thing happens if we do another
12015 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
12021 arg "depth-decrement"
12024 sequence and return to level #1,
12025 the outermost level.
12028 \begin_layout Standard
12030 we reset the environment to
12036 the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling \SpecialChar LyX
12046 The number of other
12050 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
12056 The same rule applies for the
12064 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12069 \begin_layout Enumerate
12070 We're going to go totally nuts now.
12071 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples,
12072 nor will we go into the same detail with how we did it.
12082 \begin_layout Standard
12091 arg "depth-increment"
12100 level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created the example in parentheses someplace.
12102 the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
12103 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
12104 Either before or after this,
12105 we will put in the level.
12109 \begin_layout Enumerate
12116 level #1) This is the next item in the list.
12120 \begin_layout Verse
12121 Now we will add verse.
12122 \begin_inset Newline newline
12125 It will get much worse.
12126 \begin_inset Newline newline
12137 arg "depth-increment"
12149 \begin_layout Verse
12152 \begin_inset Newline newline
12155 Bippitey boppitey boo!
12156 \begin_inset Newline newline
12162 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
12170 \begin_layout Verse
12171 Here comes a table:
12175 \begin_layout Standard
12176 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
12182 \begin_layout Standard
12184 \begin_inset Tabular
12185 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
12186 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
12187 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
12188 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
12190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
12193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
12231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12273 \begin_layout Verse
12277 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
12289 arg "depth-increment"
12296 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
12303 \begin_inset Newline newline
12311 arg "depth-decrement"
12318 \begin_layout Enumerate
12325 level #1) This is another item.
12326 Note that selecting a
12330 resets the nesting depth to level #1,
12331 so we increased the nesting depth 3 times to put the table inside the
12338 \begin_layout Quotation
12339 We're now ending the
12343 list and changing to
12348 We're still at level #1.
12349 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
12350 The next set of paragraphs is a
12351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12358 We will nest both the
12365 \begin_inset space ~
12370 environments inside of this one,
12371 then use another nested
12375 for the letter body.
12379 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
12382 to preserve the depth.
12383 Remember that you need to use
12386 arg "newline-insert newline"
12389 to create multiple lines inside the
12396 \begin_inset space ~
12406 \begin_layout Right Address
12408 \begin_inset Newline newline
12413 \begin_inset Newline newline
12419 \begin_layout Address
12421 \begin_inset space ~
12427 \begin_layout Quotation
12428 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
12429 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12432 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
12434 several of our cows have mysteriously exploded,
12435 creating a backlog in our orders for methane.
12436 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order as soon as possible.
12438 we thank you for your patience.
12441 \begin_layout Quotation
12444 now have a special on beef.
12445 If you are interested,
12446 please return the enclosed pricing and order form with your order,
12447 along with payment.
12450 \begin_layout Quotation
12451 We thank you again for your patience.
12454 \begin_layout Address
12456 \begin_inset Newline newline
12463 \begin_layout Quotation
12464 That ends that example!
12467 \begin_layout Standard
12469 nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
12470 gives you a lot of power with just a few keystrokes.
12471 We could have easily nested an
12493 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
12496 \begin_layout Subsection
12498 \begin_inset Index idx
12503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12505 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12520 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12522 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
12529 \begin_layout Standard
12530 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same type.
12531 For example you need two different enumerations:
12534 \begin_layout Enumerate
12539 \begin_layout Enumerate
12544 \begin_layout Enumerate
12548 \begin_layout Standard
12549 \begin_inset Separator plain
12555 \begin_layout Itemize
12561 \begin_layout Standard
12562 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
12568 \begin_layout Enumerate
12572 \begin_layout Enumerate
12576 \begin_layout Enumerate
12580 \begin_layout Standard
12581 To split an existing list into two lists,
12582 set the cursor at the end of a list item and use the menu
12584 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12585 Separated <Name> Above
12589 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12590 Separated <Name> Below
12593 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
12594 ) and before or behind it the new list.
12595 Inside nested environments,
12596 it is also possible to split the outer environment.
12599 \begin_layout Standard
12600 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator (red arrow in LyX).
12601 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
12604 \begin_layout Standard
12606 you get an environment separator when you press
12609 arg "paragraph-break"
12616 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
12619 \begin_layout Section
12621 Pagination and Line Breaks
12622 \begin_inset Index idx
12627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12636 \begin_layout Standard
12638 While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors,
12640 offers you more spaces:
12641 spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot be broken at the end of a line.
12642 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are useful.
12645 \begin_layout Subsection
12647 \change_deleted 177693 1654619480
12649 \change_inserted 177693 1654619480
12653 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12655 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
12660 \begin_inset Index idx
12665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12667 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12672 \change_deleted 177693 1654619483
12674 \change_inserted 177693 1654619483
12690 \begin_layout Standard
12692 \change_deleted 177693 1654619488
12694 \change_inserted 177693 1654619490
12698 It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
12699 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
12701 \change_inserted 177693 1654619513
12704 break the line at that point.
12705 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks,
12709 \begin_layout Quote
12710 Further documentation is given in section
12711 \begin_inset Newline newline
12715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12717 reference "sec:Bibliography"
12725 \begin_layout Standard
12727 it would be a good thing to put a
12728 \change_deleted 177693 1654619535
12730 \change_inserted 177693 1654619537
12734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12746 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12748 reference "sec:Bibliography"
12754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12759 \change_deleted 177693 1654619542
12761 \change_inserted 177693 1654619544
12766 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12767 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12769 \change_deleted 177693 1654619548
12771 \change_inserted 177693 1654619548
12775 \begin_inset space ~
12783 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
12789 \begin_layout Subsection
12791 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12793 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12798 \begin_inset Index idx
12803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12805 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12822 \begin_layout Standard
12823 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
12825 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12826 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12830 The length units are listed in Appendix
12831 \begin_inset space ~
12835 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12837 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12845 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12847 \change_deleted 177693 1654667894
12849 \change_inserted 177693 1654667898
12853 \change_inserted 177693 1654667914
12855 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12857 name "subsec:Normal-Space"
12862 \change_deleted 177693 1654667914
12864 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12866 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
12873 \begin_inset Index idx
12878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12880 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12885 \change_deleted 177693 1654667939
12887 \change_inserted 177693 1654667939
12903 \begin_layout Standard
12904 With the introduction of typewriters,
12905 it became conventional in some countries to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters at the ends of sentences.
12906 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
12907 automatically takes care about this.
12909 you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation followed by a period;
12911 \begin_inset space ~
12915 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12917 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
12923 To insert a normal space,
12926 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12927 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12929 \change_deleted 177693 1654667953
12931 \change_inserted 177693 1654667953
12935 \begin_inset space ~
12943 arg "space-insert normal"
12949 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12951 \change_inserted 177693 1654668020
12955 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12957 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
12962 \begin_inset Index idx
12967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12969 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12986 \begin_layout Standard
12988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12992 \change_inserted 177693 1654668039
12996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12999 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
13000 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13004 \change_deleted 177693 1654619681
13006 \change_inserted 177693 1654619683
13010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13014 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide,
13016 inside abbreviations:
13019 \begin_layout Quote
13021 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13025 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
13028 \begin_layout Standard
13029 or between values and units.
13030 Compare for example this:
13031 \begin_inset Newline newline
13035 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13039 \begin_inset Newline newline
13042 10 kg (normal space
13043 \change_inserted 177693 1654668105
13049 \begin_layout Standard
13050 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
13052 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13053 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13055 \change_inserted 177693 1654668120
13057 \begin_inset space ~
13063 \begin_inset space ~
13071 arg "space-insert thin"
13077 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13081 \begin_layout Standard
13082 You can also insert the following space types:
13085 \begin_layout Description
13087 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161965
13089 \begin_inset space ~
13095 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13099 \begin_inset space \medspace{}
13103 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13107 \change_deleted -712698321 1593161991
13109 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161992
13112 space between the arrows.
13113 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162006
13117 \begin_layout Description
13119 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162010
13121 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162011
13125 \begin_inset space ~
13128 space A line with a
13129 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13133 \begin_inset space \thickspace{}
13137 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13141 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162017
13143 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162018
13146 space between the arrows.
13149 \begin_layout Description
13151 \begin_inset space ~
13155 \begin_inset space ~
13158 space A line with a
13159 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13163 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
13167 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13170 negative thin space between the arrows.
13173 \begin_layout Description
13175 \begin_inset space ~
13179 \begin_inset space ~
13182 space A line with a
13183 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13187 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
13191 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13194 negative medium space between the arrows.
13197 \begin_layout Description
13199 \begin_inset space ~
13203 \begin_inset space ~
13206 space A line with a
13207 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13211 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
13215 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13218 negative thick space between the arrows.
13221 \begin_layout Description
13223 \change_deleted 177693 1654668288
13225 \change_inserted 177693 1654668297
13227 \begin_inset space ~
13233 \begin_inset space ~
13237 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13241 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13245 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
13249 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13253 \change_deleted 177693 1654668308
13255 \change_inserted 177693 1654668324
13257 \begin_inset space ~
13263 \begin_inset space ~
13267 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13270 em) space between the arrows.
13273 \begin_layout Description
13275 \begin_inset space ~
13279 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13283 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13287 \begin_inset space \quad{}
13291 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13295 \change_deleted 177693 1654668332
13297 \change_inserted 177693 1654668332
13301 \begin_inset space ~
13305 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13308 em) space between the arrows.
13311 \begin_layout Description
13313 \change_deleted 177693 1654668340
13315 \change_inserted 177693 1654668345
13317 \begin_inset space ~
13323 \begin_inset space ~
13327 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13331 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13335 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
13339 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13343 \change_deleted 177693 1654668349
13345 \change_inserted 177693 1654668352
13347 \begin_inset space ~
13351 \change_deleted 177693 1654668352
13355 \begin_inset space ~
13359 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13362 em) space between the arrows.
13365 \begin_layout Description
13367 \begin_inset space ~
13371 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13375 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
13380 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13384 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13387 cm space between the arrows.
13390 \begin_layout Standard
13392 \begin_inset space ~
13396 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13398 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
13403 lists the different space sizes.
13406 \begin_layout Standard
13407 \begin_inset Float table
13414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13415 \begin_inset Caption Standard
13417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13418 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13420 name "tab:Width-of-the"
13424 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
13432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13434 \begin_inset Tabular
13435 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="12" columns="2">
13436 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
13437 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
13438 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
13440 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13451 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13464 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13473 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13478 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13488 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13493 \change_deleted 177693 1654619715
13495 \change_inserted 177693 1654621248
13496 Non-breaking Normal
13503 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13508 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13518 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13527 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13532 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13536 \change_inserted 177693 1654620497
13538 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
13542 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13553 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
13554 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13559 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
13565 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13570 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
13572 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13581 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
13582 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13587 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
13593 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13598 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
13600 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13610 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13619 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13624 \change_deleted 177693 1654620640
13626 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13630 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
13636 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13646 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13655 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13660 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13670 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13679 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13684 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13694 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13699 \change_deleted 177693 1654620687
13701 \change_inserted 177693 1654620689
13705 \change_deleted 177693 1654620678
13707 \change_inserted 177693 1654620679
13711 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13719 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13724 \change_deleted 177693 1654620674
13726 \change_inserted 177693 1654620676
13730 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13734 \change_inserted 177693 1654620708
13736 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
13740 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13752 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13757 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13765 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13770 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13780 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13785 \change_deleted 177693 1654668383
13787 \change_inserted 177693 1654668384
13791 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13799 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13804 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13825 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13827 \begin_inset Index idx
13832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13834 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13851 \begin_layout Standard
13852 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
13853 feature for adding extra space in a uniform fashion.
13855 \change_inserted 177693 1654621642
13858 Fill is actually a variable length space,
13859 whose length always equals the remaining space between the left and right margins.
13860 If there is more than one H
13861 \change_inserted 177693 1654621633
13865 they divide the available space equally between themselves.
13868 \begin_layout Standard
13869 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
13872 \begin_layout Quote
13874 This is on the left side
13875 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13878 This is on the right
13881 \begin_layout Quote
13884 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13888 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13894 \begin_layout Quote
13897 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13901 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13905 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13911 \begin_layout Standard
13912 That was an example in the
13918 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13922 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13926 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13929 is one in a standard paragraph.
13930 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text,
13935 sitting in-between the two arrows.
13938 \begin_layout Standard
13940 \change_deleted 177693 1654621654
13942 \change_inserted 177693 1654621654
13945 s can be made visible when you choose one of the
13948 \begin_inset space ~
13953 s in the space dialog:
13954 The following patterns are available:
13957 \begin_layout Standard
13960 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
13964 \begin_inset space ~
13970 \begin_layout Standard
13973 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
13977 \begin_inset space ~
13983 \begin_layout Standard
13986 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
13990 \begin_inset space ~
13996 \begin_layout Standard
13999 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
14003 \begin_inset space ~
14009 \begin_layout Standard
14011 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242277
14013 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242278
14017 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242369
14018 (= opened downwards)
14022 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
14026 \begin_inset space ~
14032 \begin_layout Standard
14034 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242281
14036 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242282
14040 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242378
14045 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
14049 \begin_inset space ~
14055 \begin_layout Standard
14056 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14066 \change_deleted 177693 1654621656
14068 \change_inserted 177693 1654621656
14071 is at the beginning of a line,
14076 in the first line in a paragraph,
14080 \change_deleted 177693 1654621657
14082 \change_inserted 177693 1654621657
14085 s from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
14086 If you need space in this case anyway,
14088 \change_deleted 177693 1654668432
14092 \change_inserted 177693 1654668434
14097 option in the space dialog.
14105 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14107 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14109 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14114 \begin_inset Index idx
14119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14121 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14138 \begin_layout Standard
14139 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
14141 you want to create the following multiple choice question:
14144 \begin_layout Standard
14145 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
14148 What is correct English?:
14149 \begin_inset Newline newline
14153 \begin_inset Newline newline
14157 \begin_inset space ~
14160 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
14161 \begin_inset Newline newline
14165 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14176 \begin_inset Newline newline
14180 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14191 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
14197 \begin_layout Standard
14199 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
14200 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14204 \begin_inset space ~
14208 \begin_inset space ~
14212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14217 you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
14219 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14220 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14224 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two lines and insert
14225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14229 \begin_inset space ~
14233 \begin_inset space ~
14237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14240 into the phantom inset (note the space after
14241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14249 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
14250 That is why it is named
14251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14259 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
14260 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding dimension.
14263 \begin_layout Subsection
14265 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14267 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
14272 \begin_inset Index idx
14277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14279 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14296 \begin_layout Standard
14297 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph,
14300 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14301 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14303 \begin_inset space ~
14309 There you find the following sizes:
14312 \begin_layout Standard
14316 \change_inserted 177693 1654621302
14325 \change_inserted 177693 1654621304
14333 \change_inserted 177693 1654621306
14338 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
14339 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
14343 \change_inserted 177693 1654621298
14348 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
14350 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14351 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14353 \begin_inset space ~
14359 \begin_inset Index idx
14364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14366 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14380 for the paragraph separation.
14381 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
14384 \change_inserted 177693 1654621292
14392 \change_inserted 177693 1654621294
14398 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360527
14402 \begin_layout Standard
14404 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360570
14413 equal to the height,
14414 or half the height,
14415 of a line in the current font size including line spacing.
14420 \begin_layout Standard
14424 \change_inserted 177693 1654621333
14430 \begin_inset Index idx
14435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14437 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14451 is a variable space,
14452 set so that the space is maximal within one page.
14454 you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
14459 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second one at the bottom,
14460 because the space between them is then maximal.
14464 \change_inserted 177693 1654621321
14472 \change_inserted 177693 1654621325
14478 they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
14482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14486 \change_inserted 177693 1654621587
14491 s are described in section
14492 \begin_inset space ~
14496 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14498 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
14508 If there are several
14511 \change_inserted 177693 1654621344
14517 they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
14518 You can therefore use
14521 \change_inserted 177693 1654621329
14526 s to center text on a page,
14527 or even place text 2/3 down a page.
14530 \begin_layout Standard
14535 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
14536 \begin_inset space ~
14540 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14542 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
14550 \begin_layout Standard
14551 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14562 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of a page,
14563 the space is only added if you have also checked the option
14575 \begin_layout Subsection
14576 Paragraph Alignment
14577 \begin_inset Index idx
14582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14584 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14601 \begin_layout Standard
14602 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
14604 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14607 dialog (toolbar button
14610 arg "layout-paragraph"
14614 There are five possibilities:
14617 \begin_layout Itemize
14625 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
14631 \begin_layout Itemize
14639 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
14645 \begin_layout Itemize
14653 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
14659 \begin_layout Itemize
14667 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
14673 \begin_layout Itemize
14681 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
14687 \begin_layout Standard
14688 The default in most cases is justified alignment,
14689 in which the inter-word spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between the left and right margins.
14690 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory,
14691 and look like this:
14694 \begin_layout Standard
14696 This paragraph is right aligned,
14699 \begin_layout Standard
14701 this one is centered,
14704 \begin_layout Standard
14706 this one is left aligned.
14709 \begin_layout Subsection
14711 \begin_inset Index idx
14716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14718 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14733 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14735 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
14742 \begin_layout Standard
14743 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
14744 does the page breaks in your document,
14745 you can force a page break where you want one.
14746 Normally this will not be necessary,
14747 because \SpecialChar LaTeX
14748 is good at page breaking.
14749 Only if you use a lot of
14755 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
14758 \begin_layout Standard
14759 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished and you have checked in the preview to see if you
14763 have to change the page breaking.
14766 \begin_layout Standard
14767 There are two types of page breaks:
14768 One that ends the page without any special action.
14769 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
14771 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14772 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14774 \begin_inset space ~
14781 that is inserted via the menu
14783 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14784 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14786 \begin_inset space ~
14792 ends a page but stretches the content of the page,
14793 so that it fills out the complete page.
14794 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page on which only the last few lines are absent.
14797 \begin_layout Standard
14798 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears at the top of a page.
14801 the wrong way to do it.
14803 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables appear at the top of a page (or the bottom,
14804 or on their own page) without having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
14806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14808 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
14813 to learn more about
14820 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14822 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14824 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
14829 \begin_inset Index idx
14834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14836 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14853 \begin_layout Standard
14854 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed directly on the next page,
14855 you can also clear pages while breaking them.
14856 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything,
14857 including unprocessed floats,
14858 from the earlier part of the document are placed after it,
14859 if necessary by adding pages.
14862 \begin_layout Standard
14863 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
14865 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14866 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14868 \begin_inset space ~
14874 When you have a two-sided document like a book,
14875 you can use the menu
14877 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14878 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14880 \begin_inset space ~
14884 \begin_inset space ~
14889 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand page (odd-numbered),
14890 if necessary by adding a page.
14891 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706231
14895 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14897 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706295
14898 Suppressing Page Breaks
14901 \begin_inset Index idx
14906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14908 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706382
14912 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14927 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005685
14929 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14931 name "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
14936 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706444
14940 \begin_layout Standard
14942 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
14943 To discourage page break at
14944 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005668
14946 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
14947 certain point you can use
14951 \SpecialChar menuseparator
14953 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706512
14956 \SpecialChar menuseparator
14958 \change_deleted 5381 1686690158
14960 \change_inserted 5381 1686690161
14962 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706556
14969 \change_inserted 5863208 1602707015
14970 This is typically useful for paragraphs which should stay together or when you want to keep close the description for tables and pictures in case using floats or boxes is not appropriate.
14975 \begin_layout Subsection
14977 \begin_inset Index idx
14982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14989 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14991 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
14998 \begin_layout Standard
14999 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks:
15000 one simply breaks the line.
15001 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
15003 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15004 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
15006 \begin_inset space ~
15010 \begin_inset space ~
15018 arg "newline-insert newline"
15022 Another type that is inserted via the menu
15024 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15025 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
15027 \begin_inset space ~
15031 \begin_inset space ~
15039 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
15042 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between the page margins.
15043 This is useful to avoid
15044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15048 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15051 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
15054 \begin_layout Standard
15055 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
15057 as \SpecialChar LaTeX
15058 is very good at line breaking.
15061 a number of situations where it is necessary to set a line break actively,
15063 in a poem or for an address (see sections
15064 \begin_inset space ~
15068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15070 reference "sec:Quote"
15077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15079 reference "sec:Verse"
15085 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15087 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
15095 \begin_layout Subsection
15097 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15099 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
15104 \begin_inset Index idx
15109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15118 \begin_layout Standard
15120 \begin_inset CommandInset line
15131 \begin_layout Standard
15135 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15136 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
15138 \begin_inset space ~
15143 you can insert horizontal lines.
15144 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline of the current text line or the paragraph.
15145 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
15148 \begin_layout Standard
15150 \begin_inset CommandInset line
15161 \begin_layout Section
15162 Characters and Symbols
15165 \begin_layout Standard
15166 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
15167 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter,
15169 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
15171 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15177 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
15182 for information on how this is done.
15185 \begin_layout Standard
15186 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard,
15191 dialog via the menu
15193 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15194 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
15200 \begin_layout Standard
15201 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
15204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15210 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
15212 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
15220 \begin_layout Section
15221 Fonts and Text Styles
15222 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15224 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
15231 \begin_layout Subsection
15233 \begin_inset Index idx
15238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15240 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15257 \begin_layout Standard
15258 There are two types of fonts:
15261 \begin_layout Description
15263 \begin_inset space ~
15267 \begin_inset Index idx
15272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15274 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15288 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
15289 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15293 characters) in the font.
15294 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are well suited for scaling to any requested size.
15295 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
15296 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
15297 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
15298 \begin_inset Newline newline
15301 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
15302 But to achieve a better quality,
15303 many fonts define several font sizes.
15304 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font sizes than at small ones.
15305 \begin_inset Newline newline
15321 \begin_inset space ~
15329 \begin_layout Description
15331 \begin_inset space ~
15335 \begin_inset Index idx
15340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15342 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15357 are defined by bitmap graphics from the start;
15358 so they will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
15360 they don't scale well,
15361 because in order to scale a glyph,
15362 each pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
15363 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an image manipulation program.
15364 In order to mitigate this effect,
15365 bitmap fonts are typically provided in several fixed sizes typically from around 8
15366 \begin_inset space ~
15369 pixels high up to 34
15370 \begin_inset space ~
15373 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
15374 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary to display each glyph;
15375 so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than scalable fonts.
15376 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have to be scaled by doubling pixels,
15378 \begin_inset Newline newline
15381 Bitmap fonts are named
15384 \begin_inset space ~
15389 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
15392 \begin_layout Standard
15393 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are designed for,
15394 while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
15395 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
15396 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs use scalable fonts.
15399 \begin_layout Standard
15400 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document,
15401 look at its document properties.
15404 \begin_layout Standard
15405 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards specifying
15406 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
15408 \change_inserted 5863208 1598184810
15411 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
15413 instead of changing to an italicized version of the current font,
15414 to emphasize text you use an
15415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15423 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
15425 In \SpecialChar LyX
15427 you do things based on contexts,
15428 rather than focusing on typesetting details.
15431 \begin_layout Subsection
15434 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15436 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15443 \begin_layout Standard
15446 used its own fonts.
15448 you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your operating system,
15449 but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
15451 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
15452 needs some extra information about the fonts,
15453 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
15454 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared to a word processor.
15455 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts are generally of very good quality,
15456 and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
15457 files are very portable across different machines.
15459 the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
15460 has increased a lot in the meantime;
15461 so you can find packages for many free and commercial fonts.
15463 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface (see section
15464 \begin_inset space ~
15468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15470 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
15476 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
15477 code in the document preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
15480 \begin_layout Standard
15481 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
15482 engines that are also able directly to access fonts that are installed for your operating system,
15483 namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
15484 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15486 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
15489 you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font that is installed on your system.
15490 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
15493 \begin_layout Standard
15494 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
15497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15504 some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
15506 or other font deficiencies;
15507 so you might have to experiment.
15515 \begin_layout Subsection
15516 Document Font and Font size
15517 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15519 name "subsec:Document-Font"
15524 \begin_inset Index idx
15529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15531 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15546 \begin_inset Index idx
15551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15553 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15570 \begin_layout Standard
15571 You can set the document fonts in the
15573 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15577 \begin_inset Index idx
15582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15584 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15603 section of the dialog,
15604 you can specify which font should be used for the three different font shapes —
15609 \begin_inset space ~
15619 and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors for (some) sans
15620 \begin_inset space ~
15623 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
15626 \begin_layout Standard
15632 you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
15633 This requires that you use
15646 as the output format,
15648 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15652 \begin_inset space \space{}
15655 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
15656 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15657 installed (see section
15658 \begin_inset space ~
15662 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15664 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15670 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
15672 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
15673 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
15675 \begin_inset space ~
15680 since \SpecialChar LyX
15681 cannot determine the family.
15682 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts,
15683 due to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15686 cannot determine this in advance,
15687 so you might need to experiment.
15690 \begin_layout Standard
15691 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
15692 fonts (which is the default),
15693 the possible options for the font include
15697 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
15704 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
15706 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
15708 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
15713 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
15715 depending on the document language,
15719 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
15720 either the standard \SpecialChar TeX
15722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15728 \begin_inset space ~
15734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15744 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
15745 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
15747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15753 \begin_inset space ~
15759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15767 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
15772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15789 European Computer Modern
15792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15801 some classes set different default fonts.
15804 \begin_layout Standard
15810 it looks pixelated in PDF output,
15811 especially when you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
15815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15816 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
15819 \begin_inset space ~
15824 version 6 or later,
15825 because this program includes a special bitmap font renderer.
15830 To get rid of pixelated fonts,
15831 you have to use a vector font.
15832 Depending on how your document should look,
15836 \begin_layout Itemize
15840 \begin_inset space ~
15846 which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
15858 \begin_inset space ~
15863 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15864 community in order to replace
15868 as the default font.
15869 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
15870 Except for some details,
15871 where the appearance was improved,
15875 \begin_inset space ~
15888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15889 One difference is improved kerning.
15897 \begin_layout Itemize
15898 If you do not like the look of
15907 you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided,
15909 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15913 \begin_inset space ~
15919 \begin_inset space ~
15929 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
15930 \begin_inset space ~
15933 serif and typewriter fonts,
15937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15938 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
15939 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15946 \begin_inset space ~
15955 for sans serif text),
15956 or different shapes of the same font,
15958 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15962 \begin_inset space \space{}
15970 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15974 \begin_inset space \space{}
15980 \begin_inset space ~
15988 \begin_inset space ~
15998 but you can also select your own.
15999 \begin_inset Newline newline
16002 The differences between roman,
16006 \begin_inset space ~
16015 fonts are explained in section
16016 \begin_inset space ~
16020 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16022 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16028 \begin_inset Newline newline
16034 \begin_inset space ~
16039 was originally designed for newspapers.
16040 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit into the small newspaper columns.
16044 \begin_inset space ~
16049 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
16052 \begin_layout Standard
16053 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
16069 Some classes provide additional sizes.
16074 depends on the class you are using.
16075 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
16078 \begin_layout Standard
16079 Note that the font size is the
16084 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
16085 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used in footnotes,
16087 and subscripts) by this value.
16088 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
16091 \begin_inset space ~
16097 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
16098 \begin_inset space ~
16102 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16104 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16112 \begin_layout Standard
16116 \begin_inset space ~
16121 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should be roman,
16123 \begin_inset space ~
16126 serif or typewriter.
16131 selection uses what is preset by the class,
16132 the other selections override this.
16143 but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
16146 \begin_layout Standard
16151 LaTeX font encoding
16153 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16159 \begin_inset Index idx
16164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16167 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
16170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16182 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
16184 \begin_inset space ~
16188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16190 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
16199 you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
16200 Unless you have specific reasons,
16202 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
16206 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
16214 \begin_layout Standard
16218 Use Old Style Figures
16222 Use True Small Caps
16225 These are extra features some fonts provide.
16228 Use Old Style Figures
16231 old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures) are used.
16232 Old style figures are the numerals (0
16233 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16237 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16240 9) with ascenders and descenders,
16241 which makes them fit nicely with lowercase letters.
16244 Use True Small Caps
16246 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made of scaled capitals.
16247 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets;
16248 they generally look better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
16249 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
16253 \begin_layout Standard
16255 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
16258 you can add additional (comma-separated) options provided by the font package (or the
16263 if you use non-TeX fonts),
16269 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
16275 \begin_layout Standard
16280 allows users of the languages Chinese,
16282 Korean (CJK) to specify a font to display the script characters.
16286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16287 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16293 \begin_inset Index idx
16298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16301 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
16304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16315 So this has no effect for the document language
16331 \begin_layout Standard
16334 Enable micro-typographic extensions
16336 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16342 \begin_inset Index idx
16347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16350 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
16353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16368 \begin_layout Standard
16371 Disallow line breaks after dashes
16373 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
16377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16378 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
16380 if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16386 instead of ligatures (--,
16388 \begin_inset space ~
16392 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16394 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
16405 \begin_layout Standard
16406 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
16410 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
16413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16419 When you choose a new font or font size,
16425 change the screen font!
16426 You will only see a difference in the printed output;
16427 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
16429 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
16431 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
16436 \begin_inset space ~
16440 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16442 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
16455 \begin_layout Subsection
16459 \begin_layout Standard
16460 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
16461 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document font.
16462 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
16463 fonts for your document,
16464 you can explicitly choose a math font in the dialog
16466 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16470 \begin_inset Index idx
16475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16477 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
16480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16492 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
16493 automatically selects a math font.
16494 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
16495 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
16496 's default font family
16497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16503 \begin_inset space ~
16509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16514 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the document font is available.
16517 \begin_layout Standard
16518 Note that the math font will not be used for
16522 (which is inserted with the shortcut
16528 or by the insertion of the command
16535 Also note that some math fonts are sans
16536 \begin_inset space ~
16540 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs while the math characters do not.
16542 \begin_inset space ~
16545 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
16548 \begin_inset space ~
16556 \begin_inset space ~
16561 in the document font settings.
16564 \begin_layout Standard
16565 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
16566 fonts for the document,
16567 you can only choose for math to use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
16568 font (in most cases
16569 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16575 \begin_inset space ~
16581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16584 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
16585 variant of the document's class default font (in most cases
16586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16592 \begin_inset space ~
16598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16604 \begin_layout Subsection
16606 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
16608 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
16612 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
16614 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16616 name "subsec:charstyles"
16623 \begin_inset Index idx
16628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16635 \begin_inset Index idx
16640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16649 \begin_layout Standard
16650 As we've already seen,
16652 automatically changes the
16653 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
16656 style for certain paragraph environments.
16658 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
16660 we will explain how the style of selected text passages can by changed.
16661 This is where we meet the concept of
16667 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
16669 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
16673 \begin_layout Standard
16675 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
16681 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
16683 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
16697 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
16704 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16708 available with all document classes.
16710 some document classes and modules provide
16714 for specific purposes.
16715 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
16718 \begin_layout Standard
16720 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
16723 allow us just a few words of what we mean by
16732 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
16737 if you wanted to emphasize a word,
16738 you selected it and chose e.
16739 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16760 encourage the use of
16772 instead (although formal markup is still possible;
16774 \begin_inset space ~
16778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16780 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16786 Rather than fiddling with
16791 they encourage the use of
16796 who are defined with regard to their function (e.
16797 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16802 \begin_inset Quotes els
16806 \begin_inset Quotes ers
16811 \begin_inset Quotes els
16815 \begin_inset Quotes ers
16819 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
16821 using functional categories keeps you thinking about why you are actually marking up,
16822 if your markup is consistent and systematic,
16823 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
16824 On a more practical level,
16825 it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
16826 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names in
16831 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
16832 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16838 you would have to change any single occurrence.
16839 With a semantic markup (such as
16845 you'd just need to change the definition of
16850 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16853 semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions of a document,
16854 using different markup semantics.
16857 \begin_layout Standard
16859 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
16861 we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided by \SpecialChar LyX
16867 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16869 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
16870 Builtin Text Styles
16871 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16873 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
16880 \begin_layout Standard
16882 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
16883 The two builtin text styles can be
16884 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
16888 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
16892 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
16893 both of these styles
16896 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
16900 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006132
16902 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006135
16904 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
16911 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
16919 \begin_layout Standard
16925 do one of the following:
16928 \begin_layout Itemize
16929 click on the toolbar button
16938 \begin_layout Itemize
16939 use the key binding
16946 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
16950 \begin_layout Itemize
16952 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
16956 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006154
16958 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006157
16960 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
16968 arg "dialog-show character"
16972 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
16976 arg "dialog-show character"
16980 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006237
16981 as described in section
16982 \begin_inset space ~
16986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16988 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16994 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006263
17004 \begin_layout Standard
17006 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006284
17008 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006284
17012 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006286
17016 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006290
17018 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006291
17022 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006296
17031 style is already active,
17032 they deactivate it.
17035 \begin_layout Standard
17036 One typically uses the
17040 style for proper names.
17043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17050 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
17052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17056 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
17060 \begin_layout Standard
17062 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
17068 is producing text in
17073 but the definition can be changed.
17078 \begin_layout Standard
17080 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
17082 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
17090 You can activate (or deactivate —
17091 it's also a toggle) the
17098 \begin_layout Itemize
17099 clicking on the toolbar button
17108 \begin_layout Itemize
17109 using the keybindings
17116 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
17120 \begin_layout Itemize
17122 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
17126 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006353
17128 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006356
17130 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
17138 arg "dialog-show character"
17142 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
17146 arg "dialog-show character"
17150 \change_deleted 630872221 1621007331
17151 as described in section
17152 \begin_inset space ~
17156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17158 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
17164 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006374
17174 \begin_layout Standard
17179 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
17181 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
17183 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
17186 packages use a different font
17187 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
17189 and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17195 \begin_layout Standard
17196 We've been using the
17200 style all over the place in this document.
17201 Here's one more example:
17204 \begin_layout Quotation
17208 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
17210 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
17216 \begin_layout Standard
17217 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
17218 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
17219 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other,
17220 we should also avoid the common tendency to overuse
17221 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
17223 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
17228 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186598
17230 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
17234 \begin_layout Standard
17236 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
17237 In contrast to the custom text styles,
17238 the builtin styles are represented only as font changes and integrated in the
17246 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
17249 always reset to the default font using the key binding
17256 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
17258 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
17262 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
17265 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
17267 \begin_inset space ~
17270 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
17272 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
17282 arg "dialog-show character"
17288 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
17290 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
17296 arg "dialog-show character"
17300 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
17304 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17306 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
17308 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17310 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
17317 \begin_layout Standard
17319 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
17320 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class,
17321 a module (see section
17322 \begin_inset space ~
17326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17328 reference "subsec:Modules"
17337 or local layout settings (see section
17338 \begin_inset space ~
17342 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17344 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
17350 As the two builtin styles,
17355 markup for specific functions.
17362 module that provides,
17363 among other things,
17364 some custom text styles to markup linguistic levels:
17376 \begin_inset Quotes els
17380 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17386 \begin_layout Standard
17388 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
17389 These styles can be found,
17393 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
17395 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006495
17397 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
17403 \begin_layout Standard
17405 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
17406 For the purpose of demonstration,
17407 we have loaded in this document the optional module
17411 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
17412 By example of the emphasized style,
17413 we can see the differences in look and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same):
17418 appears as normal font change,
17419 the custom text style
17420 \begin_inset Flex Emph
17423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17425 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
17433 appears as an inset,
17434 with a label below that identifies its semantics.
17435 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
17437 the three others from the module we have loaded are:
17439 \begin_inset Flex Code
17442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17444 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
17454 \begin_inset Flex Strong
17457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17459 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
17469 \begin_inset Flex Noun
17472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17474 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
17483 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate on screen their formal appearance.
17488 \begin_layout Subsection
17490 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
17492 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
17496 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
17502 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
17504 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
17510 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
17512 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
17516 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17518 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
17523 \begin_inset Index idx
17528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17537 \begin_layout Standard
17538 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
17539 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
17543 so \SpecialChar LyX
17545 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
17547 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
17551 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
17552 the properties of text passages
17553 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
17558 an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
17560 writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts from ordinary dialog.
17561 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
17565 \begin_layout Standard
17567 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
17568 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module for this purpose (which is,
17570 generally the better way of handling such issues),
17571 you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak the properties of the respective text passages.
17576 comes in as a last resort.
17581 \begin_layout Standard
17582 Before we document how to
17583 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
17584 use custom character style
17585 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
17586 tweak the text properties
17589 we want to issue a warning yet again:
17591 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
17593 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
17598 \begin_inset Newline newline
17601 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
17604 \begin_layout Standard
17606 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
17607 use custom character styles
17608 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
17609 tweak text properties
17613 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
17616 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
17618 \begin_inset space ~
17621 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
17629 arg "dialog-show character"
17632 dialog or press the toolbar button
17635 arg "dialog-show character"
17640 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
17643 boxes in this dialog,
17644 each corresponding to a different
17645 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
17647 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
17650 property that you can choose.
17651 You can choose an option for one of these properties,
17655 \begin_inset space ~
17661 which keeps the current state of that property.
17663 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
17667 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
17669 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
17674 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
17675 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph environments all at once.
17678 \begin_layout Standard
17680 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
17682 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006625
17686 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006625
17688 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
17692 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006629
17694 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006628
17700 and their options (in addition to
17703 \begin_inset space ~
17709 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
17713 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
17721 \begin_layout Labeling
17722 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17736 The possible options are:
17740 \begin_layout Labeling
17741 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17746 This is the Roman font family.
17747 Normally a serif font.
17748 It's also the default family.
17758 \begin_layout Labeling
17759 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17763 \begin_inset space ~
17770 This is the Sans Serif font family.
17782 \begin_layout Labeling
17783 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17790 This is the Typewriter font family.
17796 arg "font-typewriter"
17802 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
17806 \begin_layout Standard
17808 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
17809 The general differences of these families are:
17812 \begin_layout Itemize
17814 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
17819 fonts use characters with serifs.
17820 These are the small
17821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17828 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
17829 The following example shows the difference:
17830 \begin_inset Newline newline
17834 \begin_inset Newline newline
17839 text without serifs
17842 \begin_inset Newline newline
17845 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
17846 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
17853 \begin_layout Itemize
17855 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
17860 is not recommended for use as a base type.
17861 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
17862 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
17865 \begin_layout Itemize
17867 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
17873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17881 which means every character has the same width;
17883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17900 \begin_inset Newline newline
17904 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
17907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17909 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
17922 \begin_inset Note Note
17925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17927 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
17928 For more on phantoms see section
17929 \begin_inset space ~
17933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17935 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
17946 \begin_inset Newline newline
17955 \begin_layout Labeling
17956 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17961 This corresponds to the print weight.
17966 \begin_layout Labeling
17967 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17972 This is the Medium font series.
17973 It's also the default series.
17976 \begin_layout Labeling
17977 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17984 This is the Bold font series.
17997 \begin_layout Labeling
17998 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18003 As the name implies.
18008 \begin_layout Labeling
18009 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18014 This is the Upright font shape.
18015 It's also the default shape.
18018 \begin_layout Labeling
18019 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18029 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
18034 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
18039 s the Italic font shape
18045 \begin_layout Labeling
18046 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18053 This is the Slanted font shape
18055 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
18057 this is different from italic).
18060 \begin_layout Labeling
18061 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18065 \begin_inset space ~
18072 This is the Small caps font shape
18079 \begin_layout Labeling
18080 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18082 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
18087 Alters the text color.
18088 Note that not all DVI
18089 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
18091 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
18092 viewers are able to display colors.
18096 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
18098 \begin_inset space ~
18102 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
18106 which means that the document default color set in
18108 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18109 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18115 \begin_inset space ~
18122 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
18124 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
18126 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
18128 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
18223 \begin_inset Index idx
18228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18230 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
18233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18245 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186626
18251 \begin_layout Labeling
18252 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18254 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006878
18259 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from the language of the document.
18260 Text marked in this way will be underlined in the \SpecialChar LyX
18261 workarea in blue to indicate the change
18262 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
18263 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
18265 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006878
18267 \begin_inset Newline newline
18270 If you have for example,
18271 an extract of German text in a non-German document,
18273 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
18274 When using the spell checking (see section
18275 \begin_inset space ~
18279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18281 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
18286 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
18287 \begin_inset Newline newline
18290 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked,
18293 Exclude from Spellchecking
18296 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
18297 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
18301 \begin_layout Labeling
18302 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18307 Alters the size of the font.
18309 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
18311 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
18315 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
18318 numerical values here;
18319 all possible sizes are actually proportional to the document font size.
18321 you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
18323 but a general description of what you want to do.
18328 \begin_layout Labeling
18329 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18350 arg "font-size tiny"
18356 \begin_layout Labeling
18357 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18378 arg "font-size scriptsize"
18384 \begin_layout Labeling
18385 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18406 arg "font-size footnotesize"
18412 \begin_layout Labeling
18413 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18434 arg "font-size small"
18440 \begin_layout Labeling
18441 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18455 It's also the default size.
18459 arg "font-size normal"
18465 \begin_layout Labeling
18466 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18487 arg "font-size large"
18493 \begin_layout Labeling
18494 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18515 arg "font-size larger"
18521 \begin_layout Labeling
18522 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18543 arg "font-size largest"
18549 \begin_layout Labeling
18550 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18571 arg "font-size huge"
18577 \begin_layout Labeling
18578 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18599 arg "font-size giant"
18605 \begin_layout Labeling
18606 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18611 This increases the size by one step (for instance,
18613 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18617 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18632 arg "font-size increase"
18638 \begin_layout Labeling
18639 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18644 This decreases the size by one step (for instance,
18646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18665 arg "font-size decrease"
18671 \begin_layout Standard
18677 don't go crazy with this feature.
18678 You should almost never need to change the font size.
18680 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments —
18682 This is here for fine-tuning only!
18683 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006744
18688 \begin_layout Standard
18690 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006776
18691 Another combo box allows to tweak
18698 \begin_layout Labeling
18699 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18701 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006733
18706 Alters the text color.
18707 Note that not all DVI viewers are able to display colors.
18713 which means that the document default color set in
18715 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18716 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18722 \begin_inset space ~
18822 \begin_inset Index idx
18827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18829 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006733
18833 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
18836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18838 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006733
18856 \begin_layout Labeling
18857 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18859 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
18863 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
18869 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
18870 change a few other things at the character level
18871 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
18872 have text passages being underlined
18876 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
18877 Avoid using underlining if you can!
18878 It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
18879 when you could not change fonts.
18880 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
18881 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
18882 because some people
18886 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
18893 \begin_layout Labeling
18894 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18896 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
18903 This is text with emphasize on
18906 This might seem like the same as
18911 but it is actually a bit different.
18917 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized text.
18918 Normally this font is equal to italic.
18919 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
18923 \begin_layout Labeling
18924 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18926 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
18931 Don't use underlining.
18936 \begin_layout Labeling
18937 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18939 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
18943 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
18951 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
18953 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
18962 arg "font-underline"
18968 \begin_inset Newline newline
18972 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
18975 Avoid using underbar if you can!
18976 It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
18977 when you could not change fonts.
18978 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
18979 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
18980 because some people
18984 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
18989 \begin_layout Labeling
18990 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18994 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
18996 \begin_inset space ~
19005 This is text with Double under
19006 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
19008 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
19017 arg "font-underunderline"
19021 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
19023 \begin_inset Newline newline
19026 As we just warned you against using underbar,
19027 you can imagine what we think about double underbar
19032 \begin_layout Labeling
19033 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19037 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
19039 \begin_inset space ~
19048 This is text with Wavy under
19049 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
19051 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
19060 arg "font-underwave"
19064 \begin_inset Newline newline
19067 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
19068 Keep antinausea pills handy.
19069 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
19074 \begin_layout Labeling
19075 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19077 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
19082 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
19088 \begin_layout Labeling
19089 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19091 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
19096 Don't use strikethrough.
19099 \begin_layout Labeling
19100 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19104 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
19106 \begin_inset space ~
19110 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
19118 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
19120 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
19121 Single strikethrough
19129 arg "font-strikeout"
19133 \begin_inset Newline newline
19136 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been changed in the meantime.
19139 \begin_layout Labeling
19140 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19142 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
19146 \begin_inset space ~
19150 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
19152 \begin_inset space ~
19156 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
19164 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
19166 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
19172 \begin_inset Newline newline
19175 This is used to make text hardly readable.
19179 \begin_layout Standard
19181 \change_inserted 630872221 1621007597
19182 A drop-down menu allows to change the parameters for the
19185 \begin_layout Labeling
19186 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19188 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006898
19193 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from the language of the document.
19194 Text marked in this way will be underlined in the \SpecialChar LyX
19195 workarea in blue to indicate the change.
19196 \begin_inset Newline newline
19199 If you have for example,
19200 an extract of German text in a non-German document,
19202 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
19203 When using the spell checking (see section
19204 \begin_inset space ~
19208 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19210 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
19215 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
19216 \begin_inset Newline newline
19219 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked,
19222 Exclude from Spellchecking
19225 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
19228 \begin_layout Standard
19230 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
19231 In addition to all the formal markup described above,
19232 the dialog also provides you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
19233 \begin_inset space ~
19237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19239 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
19245 \change_inserted 630872221 1621181776
19249 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
19255 \begin_layout Itemize
19257 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
19265 This is text with emphasize on
19270 \begin_layout Itemize
19274 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
19282 This is text with Noun on.
19284 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
19292 this is a logical attribute.
19293 Normally it's equivalent to
19296 \begin_inset space ~
19306 \begin_layout Standard
19307 So you have a huge number of combinations to
19308 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
19310 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
19315 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
19316 chosen a new character style
19317 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
19318 applied a text property
19321 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
19324 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
19326 \begin_inset space ~
19329 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
19337 arg "dialog-show character"
19343 arg "dialog-show character"
19348 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
19352 You can activate the
19353 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
19355 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
19356 last applied properties
19358 by using the toolbar button
19361 arg "textstyle-apply"
19365 The button lets you apply
19366 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
19367 your custom character style
19368 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
19371 even when the dialog isn't visible.
19373 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
19374 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again,
19375 a press on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
19376 20) most recently applied settings,
19377 from which you can select one.
19382 \begin_layout Standard
19383 To completely reset the
19384 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
19386 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
19387 text properties of a selection
19391 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
19393 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
19403 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
19408 from the menu of the toolbar button
19411 arg "textstyle-apply"
19418 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
19419 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose you just set the shape to
19420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19439 \begin_inset space ~
19453 \begin_layout Standard
19455 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
19456 You should also know something about the differences between the three main font types
19464 \begin_inset space ~
19477 \begin_layout Itemize
19479 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
19485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19493 which means every character has the same width;
19495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19512 \begin_inset Newline newline
19516 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
19519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19530 \begin_inset Note Note
19533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19534 For more on phantoms see section
19535 \begin_inset space ~
19539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19541 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
19552 \begin_inset Newline newline
19558 \begin_layout Itemize
19560 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
19565 fonts use characters with serifs.
19566 These are the small
19567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19574 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
19575 The following example shows the difference:
19576 \begin_inset Newline newline
19580 \begin_inset Newline newline
19585 text without serifs
19588 \begin_inset Newline newline
19591 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
19592 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
19599 \begin_layout Itemize
19601 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
19606 is not recommended for use as a base type.
19607 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
19608 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
19613 \begin_layout Standard
19615 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
19616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19623 refers to applying or removing font properties.
19624 When a property is marked for toggling in the
19627 \begin_inset space ~
19633 applying the style to text that already has the property will cause the property to be removed.
19636 apply a style with properties A,
19637 B and C to text that currently has font properties B,
19640 and if B is set to toggle and C is set not to toggle,
19641 the text ends up with properties A,
19645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19660 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
19661 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
19662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19670 toggling behavior is up to you.
19674 \begin_inset space ~
19680 all of the left side properties are toggled;
19685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19708 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19714 \begin_inset space ~
19720 then apply the style to bold face text,
19721 the text will revert to the default series (
19722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19730 no matter how many times you apply the style.
19735 \begin_layout Standard
19737 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
19740 with the same warning once again:
19741 Do not overuse the fonts!
19743 more often than not,
19744 a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
19747 \begin_layout Section
19748 Printing and Previewing
19751 \begin_layout Subsection
19755 \begin_layout Standard
19756 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation using \SpecialChar LyX
19758 you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
19759 Before we tell you that,
19760 we want to give you a quick explanation of what goes on behind-the-scenes.
19761 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
19763 Additional Features
19768 \begin_layout Standard
19770 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
19773 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
19774 typesetting system,
19775 but to prevent confusion,
19776 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19779 is what you use to do your actual writing.
19782 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19783 to turn your writing into printable output.
19784 This happens in two stages:
19787 \begin_layout Enumerate
19790 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
19792 generating a file with the extension,
19794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19808 \begin_layout Enumerate
19811 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19812 to use the commands in the
19816 file to produce printable output.
19819 \begin_layout Subsection
19820 Output file formats
19821 \begin_inset Index idx
19826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19833 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19835 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19842 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19844 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337594
19846 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337596
19850 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337574
19854 \begin_inset Index idx
19859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19861 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
19864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19866 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337607
19868 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337612
19884 \begin_layout Standard
19885 This file type has the extension
19886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19898 It contains your document as plain text
19899 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337643
19901 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337647
19902 following the rules of the
19903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19906 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
19907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19915 \begin_layout Standard
19916 You can export your document to
19917 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337684
19919 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337686
19924 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19925 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
19927 \begin_inset space ~
19934 this will not export any externally generated material such as a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
19935 bibliography (section
19936 \begin_inset space ~
19940 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19942 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
19948 If your document includes such material,
19951 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19952 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
19954 \begin_inset space ~
19958 \begin_inset space ~
19962 \begin_inset space ~
19970 \begin_inset space ~
19974 \begin_inset space ~
19980 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to
19981 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337720
19983 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337722
19989 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19992 \begin_inset Index idx
19997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19999 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20017 \begin_layout Standard
20018 This file type has the extension
20019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20030 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20031 program to process your document.
20032 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
20034 you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
20035 -Errors or to process it manually with console commands.
20036 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
20037 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
20038 's temporary directory whenever you view or export your document.
20041 \begin_layout Standard
20042 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20043 -file using the menu
20045 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20046 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20050 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
20051 export variants are explained in section
20052 \begin_inset space ~
20056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20058 reference "subsec:Export"
20066 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20068 \begin_inset Index idx
20073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20075 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20092 \begin_layout Standard
20093 This file type has the extension
20094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20115 because it is completely portable;
20116 you can move them from one machine to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
20117 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
20121 \begin_layout Standard
20122 DVI files do not contain images,
20123 they only link to them.
20124 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
20125 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make them visible when you scroll the DVI,
20126 this can slow down your computer when you view the DVI.
20127 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
20130 \begin_layout Standard
20131 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
20133 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20134 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20139 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20140 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20142 \begin_inset space ~
20148 The latter option uses the program
20150 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20156 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20159 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
20160 \begin_inset space ~
20164 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20166 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
20172 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20173 is still a work in progress,
20174 but it might develop into the next standard \SpecialChar TeX
20178 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20180 \begin_inset Index idx
20185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20187 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20204 \begin_layout Standard
20205 This file type has the extension
20206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20218 PostScript was developed by the company
20222 as a printer language.
20223 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the file.
20224 PostScript can be seen as a
20225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20228 programming language
20229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20233 you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
20237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20238 If you are interested in learning more about this,
20239 have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20245 \begin_inset Index idx
20250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20253 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20272 As a result of this,
20273 the files are often bigger than PDFs.
20276 \begin_layout Standard
20277 PostScript can only contain images in the format
20278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20281 Encapsulated PostScript
20282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20299 As \SpecialChar LyX
20300 allows you to use any known image format in your document,
20301 it has to convert them in the background to EPS.
20305 \begin_inset space ~
20308 images in your document,
20311 \begin_inset space ~
20314 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
20315 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
20317 So if you plan to use PostScript,
20318 you can insert your images directly as EPS to avoid this problem.
20321 \begin_layout Standard
20322 You can export to PostScript using the menu
20324 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20325 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20331 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20333 \begin_inset Index idx
20338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20340 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20355 \begin_inset Index idx
20360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20369 \begin_layout Standard
20370 This file type has the extension
20371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20387 Portable Document Format
20388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20395 was derived from PostScript.
20396 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
20398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20406 it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output looks exactly the same.
20409 \begin_layout Standard
20410 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
20411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20414 Joint Photographic Experts Group
20415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20447 Portable Network Graphics
20448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20465 You can also use any other image format,
20466 because \SpecialChar LyX
20467 converts them in the background to one of these formats.
20468 But as described in the section about PostScript,
20469 the image conversion will slow down your workflow.
20470 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
20473 \begin_layout Standard
20474 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
20476 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20482 \begin_layout Description
20484 \begin_inset space ~
20487 (pdflatex) This uses the program
20491 which converts your file directly to PDF.
20494 \begin_layout Description
20496 \begin_inset space ~
20503 ) This uses the program
20505 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20508 which converts your file directly to PDF.
20511 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20520 that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
20521 \begin_inset space ~
20525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20527 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
20533 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20534 is still a work in progress,
20535 but it might develop into the next standard \SpecialChar TeX
20539 \begin_layout Description
20541 \begin_inset space ~
20548 ) This uses the program
20553 that converts your file directly to PDF.
20559 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
20560 \begin_inset space ~
20564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20566 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
20572 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts,
20574 vertically written Japanese.
20577 \begin_layout Description
20579 \begin_inset space ~
20582 (cropped) This is the same as
20585 \begin_inset space ~
20590 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
20591 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
20592 to generate good-looking formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
20595 \begin_layout Description
20597 \begin_inset space ~
20600 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
20604 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to PDF.
20607 \begin_layout Description
20609 \begin_inset space ~
20612 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
20616 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
20617 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
20621 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
20622 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
20625 \begin_layout Standard
20629 \begin_inset space ~
20638 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions,
20641 and works without problems.
20642 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
20643 or specific OpenType fonts,
20644 you might want to try out
20647 \begin_inset space ~
20655 \begin_inset space ~
20661 bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature as
20668 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20670 \begin_inset Index idx
20675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20677 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20692 \begin_inset Index idx
20697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20706 \begin_layout Standard
20707 This file type has the extension
20708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20720 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
20721 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
20722 When \SpecialChar LyX
20724 it also generates corresponding images in formats suitable for the purpose.
20725 For the math output you can choose in the menu
20727 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20728 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
20731 between different formats,
20732 which are described in section
20734 Math Output in XHTML
20739 \begin_inset space ~
20747 \begin_layout Standard
20748 XHTML output remains
20749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20757 and not all \SpecialChar LyX
20758 features are supported yet.
20762 and the World Wide Web
20767 Additional Features
20770 for more information.
20773 \begin_layout Standard
20774 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
20776 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20777 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20783 \begin_layout Subsection
20785 \begin_inset Index idx
20790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20792 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20809 \begin_layout Standard
20810 To get a look at the final version of your document,
20811 with all of the page breaks in place,
20812 the footnotes correctly numbered,
20822 or use the toolbar button
20829 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default output format,
20830 which is globally set in the preferences (see section
20831 \begin_inset space ~
20835 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20837 reference "sec:File-Formats"
20842 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings (see section
20843 \begin_inset space ~
20847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20849 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
20855 Further output formats can be selected via
20857 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20858 View (Other Formats)
20860 or the toolbar button
20869 \begin_layout Standard
20870 If you have changed your document,
20871 you can refresh the output in the same viewer window using the menu
20873 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20878 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20879 Update (Other Formats)
20885 \begin_layout Standard
20886 When you preview a file,
20887 the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
20888 's temporary directory.
20889 To have a real output,
20890 export your document.
20893 \begin_layout Section
20894 A few Words about Typography
20895 \begin_inset Index idx
20900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20909 \begin_layout Subsection
20911 Dashes and Minus Signs
20912 \begin_inset Index idx
20917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20924 \begin_inset Index idx
20929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20938 \begin_layout Standard
20939 In \SpecialChar LyX
20942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20950 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20953 symbol comes in four variants:
20974 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
20980 \begin_layout Standard
20981 \begin_inset Box Frameless
20991 height_special "totalheight"
20996 backgroundcolor "none"
20999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21000 \begin_inset Tabular
21001 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
21002 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21003 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21004 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
21005 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
21006 <row interlinespace="3mm">
21007 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21035 <row interlinespace="3mm">
21036 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21058 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21075 <row interlinespace="3mm">
21076 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21098 system key combination
21102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21104 the en dash is entered with
21107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21116 and the em dash with
21119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21132 is the Mac label for the right
21142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21155 <row interlinespace="3mm">
21156 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21179 system key combination or
21180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21194 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21207 \begin_inset Formula $-$
21215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21246 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
21252 \begin_layout Standard
21253 Dashes can also be inserted with
21255 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21257 \begin_inset space ~
21260 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
21268 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash and 2014 for the en dash).
21271 \begin_layout Standard
21272 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign,
21273 which appears in math mode and has a length of its own.
21274 Here are some examples:
21277 \begin_layout Enumerate
21278 line- and page-breaks
21279 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21289 \begin_layout Enumerate
21292 \begin_inset space ~
21296 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21306 \begin_layout Enumerate
21307 The em dash is used without spaces:
21310 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21320 \begin_layout Enumerate
21321 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
21325 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21335 \begin_layout Standard
21337 \begin_inset CommandInset href
21339 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
21340 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
21348 \begin_layout Subsection
21349 Dashes and Line Breaks
21350 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21352 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
21359 \begin_layout Standard
21360 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use case and locale,
21362 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21368 \begin_layout Itemize
21370 line breaks are generally allowed after the dash,
21371 but no line break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
21374 \begin_layout Itemize
21376 dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start a new line.
21379 \begin_layout Itemize
21380 In French and Spanish,
21381 dashes around parenthetical statements are treated similar to brackets:
21382 line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
21385 \begin_layout Standard
21387 dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
21388 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
21390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21399 allows line breaks after hyphens
21400 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
21403 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
21406 en-dashes and em-dashes.
21409 \begin_layout Enumerate
21410 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
21411 \begin_inset space ~
21414 – common in British English and generally recommended by
21416 The Elements of Typographic Style
21419 \begin_inset space ~
21422 – can be prevented using
21423 \change_deleted 177693 1654619779
21425 \change_inserted 177693 1654619781
21431 \begin_layout Enumerate
21432 Unwanted line breaks
21437 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
21439 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
21442 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
21446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21449 Prevent Hyphenation
21454 \begin_inset space ~
21470 in \SpecialChar TeX
21472 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
21475 \change_deleted 177693 1654619787
21477 \change_inserted 177693 1654619789
21479 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
21480 space does not suffice
21484 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
21489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21491 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
21492 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not in the document language.
21493 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French and Spanish.
21506 \begin_layout Itemize
21508 \begin_inset space ~
21512 \begin_inset Box Frameless
21522 height_special "totalheight"
21527 backgroundcolor "none"
21530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21539 \begin_layout Itemize
21541 \begin_inset Box Frameless
21551 height_special "totalheight"
21556 backgroundcolor "none"
21559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21561 \begin_inset space ~
21569 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
21570 \begin_inset space ~
21573 – sont très utiles.
21576 \begin_layout Itemize
21581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21591 un inciso con rayas—
21596 \begin_layout Standard
21597 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
21598 \begin_inset space ~
21601 – in contrast to an overfull line
21602 \begin_inset space ~
21605 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21609 \begin_layout Standard
21610 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes,
21611 you can select the option
21613 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21614 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
21615 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
21616 Disallow line breaks after dashes
21621 \begin_layout Enumerate
21622 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
21623 They can be prevented using
21624 \change_deleted 177693 1654619794
21626 \change_inserted 177693 1654619796
21629 spaces (without need for a makebox or \SpecialChar TeX
21635 \begin_layout Itemize
21637 \begin_inset space ~
21640 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
21641 \begin_inset space ~
21644 – sont très utiles.
21648 \begin_layout Enumerate
21649 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
21650 \begin_inset Newline newline
21655 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21656 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21658 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913043
21660 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913043
21662 \begin_inset space ~
21668 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913068
21670 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913068
21672 \begin_inset space ~
21683 \begin_layout Itemize
21684 Em-dashes without spaces—
21685 \SpecialChar allowbreak
21686 common in American English—
21687 \SpecialChar allowbreak
21688 should be followed by a line break opportunity.
21691 \begin_layout Standard
21692 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
21693 \begin_inset space ~
21697 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21699 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
21711 \begin_layout Enumerate
21714 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em or en dashes (see section
21715 \begin_inset space ~
21719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21721 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
21732 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21733 Changes and Backwards Compatibility
21736 \begin_layout Standard
21737 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
21739 \begin_inset space ~
21743 consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
21745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21752 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
21760 \begin_layout Standard
21761 Since \SpecialChar LyX
21763 \begin_inset space ~
21767 consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
21768 in a way that prevents ligation to dashes.
21770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21777 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters (except in
21782 typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately after the input (unless the current text font is
21790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21791 The behavior was changed since
21792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21810 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output as non-breakable dashes.
21811 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
21819 \begin_layout Standard
21822 \begin_inset space ~
21830 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
21832 \begin_inset space ~
21835 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
21838 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21839 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
21840 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
21841 Disallow line breaks after dashes
21843 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
21848 If you used both literal and
21849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21856 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
21858 \begin_inset space ~
21862 you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
21865 \begin_layout Subsection
21867 \begin_inset Index idx
21872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21879 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21881 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
21888 \begin_layout Standard
21889 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
21890 but automatically in the output.
21891 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21897 \begin_inset Index idx
21902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21905 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
21908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21919 following the rules of the document language.
21921 does not hyphenate text in the
21925 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
21928 \begin_layout Standard
21930 hyphenates almost perfectly;
21931 it only has problems with text in the
21935 font and with unusual constructs,
21937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21945 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
21946 cannot break a word correctly,
21947 you can set hyphenation points manually.
21948 This is done with the menu
21950 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21951 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21953 \begin_inset space ~
21959 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
21961 If no hyphenation is necessary,
21966 \begin_layout Standard
21967 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
21968 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document in the form
21969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21978 would then see the hyphen
21979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21986 as a line break possibility.
21987 A line break at this point would look ugly.
21988 To prevent the shortcut from being broken,
21990 \change_deleted 177693 1654619800
21992 \change_inserted 177693 1654619804
21997 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21998 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
22000 \change_deleted 177693 1654619809
22002 \change_inserted 177693 1654619812
22007 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
22009 Prevent Hyphenation
22014 \begin_inset space ~
22022 \begin_layout Subsection
22024 \begin_inset Index idx
22029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22038 \begin_layout Subsubsection
22039 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
22040 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22042 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
22049 \begin_layout Standard
22050 When \SpecialChar LyX
22051 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
22052 to generate the final version of your document,
22054 automatically distinguishes between words,
22059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22062 appropriate amount of space.
22063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22066 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and the next word.
22067 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word gets after another word.
22070 \begin_layout Standard
22072 the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does not work in all cases.
22074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22085 is at the end of a lowercase letter,
22086 it's the end of a sentence;
22087 if it's at the end of a capitalized letter,
22088 it's an abbreviation.
22091 \begin_layout Standard
22092 Here are some examples of
22096 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
22099 \begin_layout Itemize
22104 \begin_layout Itemize
22109 \begin_layout Standard
22110 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
22113 \begin_layout Itemize
22115 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22119 this is too much space!
22122 \begin_layout Itemize
22127 \begin_layout Standard
22128 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
22131 \begin_layout Standard
22132 To fix this problem,
22133 use one of the following:
22136 \begin_layout Enumerate
22140 \begin_inset space ~
22145 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
22146 \begin_inset space ~
22150 \change_inserted 177693 1654667914
22152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22154 reference "subsec:Normal-Space"
22160 \change_deleted 177693 1654667914
22162 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22164 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
22172 \begin_inset Index idx
22177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22179 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22196 \begin_layout Enumerate
22200 \begin_inset space ~
22205 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
22206 \begin_inset space ~
22210 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22212 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
22218 \begin_inset Index idx
22223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22225 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22242 \begin_layout Enumerate
22246 \begin_inset space ~
22250 \begin_inset space ~
22254 \begin_inset space ~
22261 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22263 \begin_inset space ~
22268 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
22269 This function is also bound to
22272 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
22278 \begin_layout Standard
22279 With the corrections,
22280 our earlier examples look like this:
22283 \begin_layout Itemize
22285 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22289 \begin_inset space \space{}
22292 this is too much space!
22295 \begin_layout Itemize
22296 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
22300 \begin_layout Standard
22301 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
22302 If your language is such a language,
22303 you don't need to worry,
22304 because \SpecialChar LaTeX
22305 will take care of this.
22308 \begin_layout Standard
22309 For those that do need to bother,
22310 there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
22314 \begin_inset space ~
22320 feature described in the section
22322 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
22327 Additional Features
22332 \begin_layout Subsubsection
22334 \begin_inset Index idx
22339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22341 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22356 \begin_inset Index idx
22361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22363 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
22366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22380 \begin_layout Standard
22382 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
22384 it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted text,
22385 and use a closing mark at the end.
22388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22396 The keyboard character,
22402 generates this automatically.
22405 \begin_layout Standard
22406 You can specify what character the
22410 key produces by using the submenu
22416 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
22420 \begin_inset Index idx
22425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22427 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22441 dialog and switching the
22445 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
22446 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
22448 \change_deleted -712698321 1606924196
22450 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924196
22454 \begin_inset space ~
22460 \begin_layout Labeling
22461 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22473 \begin_inset space ~
22477 \begin_inset space ~
22481 \begin_inset Quotes els
22485 \begin_inset Quotes ers
22491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22499 \begin_inset Quotes els
22503 \begin_inset Quotes ers
22506 quotation marks (as common,
22508 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22515 \begin_layout Labeling
22516 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22519 \begin_inset Quotes sld
22523 \begin_inset Quotes sld
22527 \begin_inset space ~
22531 \begin_inset space ~
22535 \begin_inset Quotes sls
22539 \begin_inset Quotes srs
22545 \begin_inset Quotes sld
22549 \begin_inset Quotes sld
22553 \begin_inset Quotes sls
22557 \begin_inset Quotes srs
22560 quotation marks (as common,
22562 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22569 \begin_layout Labeling
22570 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22573 \begin_inset Quotes gld
22577 \begin_inset Quotes grd
22581 \begin_inset space ~
22585 \begin_inset space ~
22589 \begin_inset Quotes gls
22593 \begin_inset Quotes grs
22599 \begin_inset Quotes gld
22603 \begin_inset Quotes grd
22607 \begin_inset Quotes gls
22611 \begin_inset Quotes grs
22614 quotation marks (as common,
22616 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22623 \begin_layout Labeling
22624 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22627 \begin_inset Quotes pld
22631 \begin_inset Quotes prd
22635 \begin_inset space ~
22639 \begin_inset space ~
22643 \begin_inset Quotes pls
22647 \begin_inset Quotes prs
22653 \begin_inset Quotes pld
22657 \begin_inset Quotes prd
22661 \begin_inset Quotes pls
22665 \begin_inset Quotes prs
22668 quotation marks (as common,
22670 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22677 \begin_layout Labeling
22678 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22681 \begin_inset Quotes cld
22685 \begin_inset Quotes crd
22689 \begin_inset space ~
22693 \begin_inset space ~
22697 \begin_inset Quotes cls
22701 \begin_inset Quotes crs
22707 \begin_inset Quotes cld
22711 \begin_inset Quotes crd
22715 \begin_inset Quotes cls
22719 \begin_inset Quotes crs
22722 quotation marks (as common,
22724 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22731 \begin_layout Labeling
22732 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22735 \begin_inset Quotes ald
22739 \begin_inset Quotes ard
22743 \begin_inset space ~
22747 \begin_inset space ~
22751 \begin_inset Quotes als
22755 \begin_inset Quotes ars
22761 \begin_inset Quotes ald
22765 \begin_inset Quotes ard
22769 \begin_inset Quotes als
22773 \begin_inset Quotes ars
22776 quotation marks (as common,
22778 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22785 \begin_layout Labeling
22786 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22789 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
22793 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
22797 \begin_inset space ~
22801 \begin_inset space ~
22805 \begin_inset Quotes qls
22809 \begin_inset Quotes qls
22815 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
22819 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
22823 \begin_inset Quotes qls
22827 \begin_inset Quotes qls
22830 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
22833 \begin_layout Labeling
22834 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22837 \begin_inset Quotes bld
22841 \begin_inset Quotes brd
22845 \begin_inset space ~
22849 \begin_inset space ~
22853 \begin_inset Quotes bls
22857 \begin_inset Quotes brs
22863 \begin_inset Quotes bld
22867 \begin_inset Quotes brd
22871 \begin_inset Quotes bls
22875 \begin_inset Quotes brs
22878 quotation marks (as common,
22880 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22887 \begin_layout Labeling
22888 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22891 \begin_inset Quotes fld
22895 \begin_inset Quotes frd
22899 \begin_inset space ~
22903 \begin_inset space ~
22907 \begin_inset Quotes fls
22911 \begin_inset Quotes frs
22917 \begin_inset Quotes fld
22921 \begin_inset Quotes frd
22925 \begin_inset Quotes fls
22929 \begin_inset Quotes frs
22932 quotation marks (as common,
22934 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22941 \begin_layout Labeling
22942 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22945 \begin_inset Quotes ild
22949 \begin_inset Quotes ird
22953 \begin_inset space ~
22957 \begin_inset space ~
22961 \begin_inset Quotes ils
22965 \begin_inset Quotes irs
22971 \begin_inset Quotes ild
22975 \begin_inset Quotes ird
22979 \begin_inset Quotes ils
22983 \begin_inset Quotes irs
22986 quotation marks (another style common in France)
22990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22991 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
22992 since these look identical to the inner marks.
22993 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where the inner marks differ).
23001 \begin_layout Labeling
23002 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23005 \begin_inset Quotes rld
23009 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
23013 \begin_inset space ~
23017 \begin_inset space ~
23021 \begin_inset Quotes rls
23025 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
23031 \begin_inset Quotes rld
23035 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
23039 \begin_inset Quotes rls
23043 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
23046 quotation marks (as common,
23048 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23055 \begin_layout Labeling
23056 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23059 \begin_inset Quotes wld
23063 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
23067 \begin_inset space ~
23071 \begin_inset space ~
23075 \begin_inset Quotes wls
23079 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
23085 \begin_inset Quotes wld
23089 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
23093 \begin_inset Quotes wls
23097 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
23100 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
23101 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924211
23105 \begin_layout Labeling
23106 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23108 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924279
23111 \begin_inset Quotes pld
23115 \begin_inset Quotes prd
23119 \begin_inset space ~
23123 \begin_inset space ~
23127 \begin_inset Quotes ald
23131 \begin_inset Quotes ard
23139 \begin_inset Quotes pld
23147 \begin_inset Quotes prd
23155 \begin_inset Quotes ald
23163 \begin_inset Quotes ard
23168 quotation marks (as common in Hungary)
23173 \begin_layout Labeling
23174 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23175 \begin_inset Quotes jld
23183 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
23189 \begin_inset space ~
23193 \begin_inset space ~
23199 \begin_inset Quotes jls
23207 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
23211 \begin_inset Quotes jld
23215 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
23219 \begin_inset Quotes jls
23223 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
23226 quotation marks (as common,
23228 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23238 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338376
23239 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23241 name "fn:cjk-quotes"
23247 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
23255 \begin_layout Labeling
23256 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23257 \begin_inset Quotes kld
23265 \begin_inset Quotes krd
23271 \begin_inset space ~
23275 \begin_inset space ~
23281 \begin_inset Quotes kls
23289 \begin_inset Quotes krs
23293 \begin_inset Quotes kld
23297 \begin_inset Quotes krd
23301 \begin_inset Quotes kls
23305 \begin_inset Quotes krs
23308 quotation marks (as common,
23310 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23314 in North Korea and China)
23315 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
23317 \begin_inset script superscript
23319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23321 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
23322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23324 reference "fn:cjk-quotes"
23340 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338417
23345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23346 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
23356 \begin_layout Standard
23357 Inner quotation marks
23361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23362 In many writing cultures,
23363 these are single quotation marks.
23364 But as the British and French styles show,
23365 this is not necessarily the case (and specifically the British style shows that
23366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23373 does not necessarily mean
23374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23382 This is why we call them
23383 \begin_inset Quotes els
23387 \begin_inset Quotes ers
23391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23403 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages,
23405 \begin_inset Quotes els
23409 \begin_inset Quotes ers
23412 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
23415 arg "quote-insert inner"
23420 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23426 \begin_layout Standard
23428 the quotation mark styles are persistent.
23430 a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when it was inserted,
23431 even if the document-wide style changes.
23432 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
23433 If you check the setting
23435 Use dynamic quotation marks
23439 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
23440 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
23445 special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
23446 they appear in a special color).
23447 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
23448 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in one step (e.
23449 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23453 if your publisher requests a different style).
23456 \begin_layout Standard
23457 Individual quotation marks (i.
23458 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23462 their level [inner,
23466 and style) can be easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a mark.
23469 \begin_layout Subsection
23471 \begin_inset Index idx
23476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23478 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
23481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23493 \begin_inset Index idx
23498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23500 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
23503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23515 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23517 name "subsec:Ligatures"
23524 \begin_layout Standard
23525 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and print them as single characters.
23526 These groups are known as
23531 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
23532 knows about ligatures,
23533 your documents will contain them too in the output.
23534 Here are the standard ligatures:
23537 \begin_layout Itemize
23541 \begin_layout Itemize
23545 \begin_layout Itemize
23549 \begin_layout Itemize
23553 \begin_layout Itemize
23557 \begin_layout Standard
23558 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
23561 \begin_layout Standard
23563 you don't want a ligature in a word.
23564 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
23566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23573 it looks really weird in compound words,
23575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23590 To break a ligature,
23593 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23594 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
23596 \begin_inset space ~
23603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23614 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
23616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23631 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
23633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23639 \begin_layout Subsection
23641 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
23643 \begin_inset Index idx
23648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23651 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
23654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23668 \begin_layout Standard
23671 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23672 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
23677 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
23680 \begin_layout Description
23682 The name of the game.
23685 \begin_layout Description
23687 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
23691 \begin_layout Description
23693 The \SpecialChar TeX
23694 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
23698 \begin_layout Description
23699 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
23700 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
23704 \begin_layout Standard
23705 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23711 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
23715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23719 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
23720 world to give programs geek version numbers.
23721 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
23722 converges to the number
23723 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
23727 The actual version is
23728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23737 the previous one was
23738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23749 \begin_layout Subsection
23751 \begin_inset Index idx
23756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23758 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
23761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23775 \begin_layout Standard
23776 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal space between two words.
23777 As you can see in the example below,
23778 it looks better when the space is smaller.
23780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23787 for units use the menu
23789 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23790 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
23792 \begin_inset space ~
23800 arg "space-insert thin"
23806 \begin_layout Standard
23807 Here is an example to show the differences:
23810 \begin_layout Standard
23811 \begin_inset Tabular
23812 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
23813 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23814 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
23815 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
23817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
23820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23822 \begin_inset space ~
23826 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
23834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
23837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23838 space between number and unit
23845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
23848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23850 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23854 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
23862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
23865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23866 half space between number and unit
23879 \begin_layout Subsection
23881 \begin_inset Index idx
23886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23888 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
23891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23905 \begin_layout Standard
23906 In the early days of word processors,
23907 page breaks went wherever the page happened to end.
23908 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
23909 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom of the page,
23910 the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom of a page,
23911 or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
23912 These bits of text became known as
23923 \begin_layout Standard
23926 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
23927 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
23928 But what about widows and orphans,
23929 where the page breaks leave one line of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page?
23930 There are rules built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
23931 governing page breaks,
23932 and some of those rules are there specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
23933 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them,
23934 you can add the commands
23935 \begin_inset Newline newline
23943 \begin_inset Newline newline
23951 \begin_inset Newline newline
23954 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23955 preamble of your document to avoid them.
23956 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
23958 \begin_inset space ~
23962 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
23964 key "latexcompanion"
23970 \begin_inset space ~
23974 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
23981 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
23982 's page break mechanism.
23985 \begin_layout Chapter
23989 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23991 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
23998 \begin_layout Standard
23999 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
24002 \begin_inset space ~
24008 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
24011 \begin_layout Section
24013 \begin_inset Index idx
24018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24025 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24034 \begin_layout Standard
24036 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
24039 \begin_layout Description
24042 \begin_inset space ~
24045 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
24046 \begin_inset Newline newline
24050 \begin_inset Note Note
24053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24054 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
24062 \begin_layout Description
24063 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
24064 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
24067 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
24068 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
24070 \begin_inset space ~
24076 \begin_inset Newline newline
24080 \begin_inset Note Comment
24083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24084 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
24093 \begin_layout Description
24095 \begin_inset space ~
24098 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can set in the document settings under
24100 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
24102 \begin_inset space ~
24108 \begin_inset Newline newline
24112 \begin_inset Newline newline
24116 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
24119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24125 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
24126 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
24131 of a comment that appears in the output.
24137 \begin_inset Newline newline
24141 \begin_inset Newline newline
24144 As you can see in the example,
24145 greyed out notes can have footnotes.
24148 \begin_layout Standard
24149 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
24157 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24161 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
24164 \begin_layout Section
24166 \begin_inset Index idx
24171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24178 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24180 name "sec:Footnotes"
24187 \begin_layout Standard
24189 uses boxes to display footnotes:
24190 When you insert a footnote using the menu
24192 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24195 or the toolbar button
24198 arg "footnote-insert"
24212 \begin_inset Graphics
24213 filename clipart/footnote.png
24222 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
24223 's representation of your footnote.
24233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24257 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
24258 Clicking on the box label again will close
24271 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote,
24272 simply highlight it and click on the footnote
24287 \begin_layout Standard
24288 Here is an example footnote:
24296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24297 To close a footnote,
24298 click on the footnote box label.
24306 \begin_layout Standard
24307 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text position where the footnote box is placed.
24308 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
24309 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
24310 according to the document class.
24312 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme,
24313 but you can get other schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
24319 ey are described in the
24322 \begin_inset space ~
24330 \begin_layout Section
24332 \begin_inset Index idx
24337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24344 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24346 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
24353 \begin_layout Standard
24354 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
24356 When you insert a margin note via the menu
24358 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24360 \begin_inset space ~
24365 or the toolbar button
24368 arg "marginalnote-insert"
24388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24395 appearing within your text.
24396 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
24397 's representation of your margin
24406 \begin_layout Standard
24407 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
24411 \begin_inset Marginal
24414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24416 This is a marginal note.
24424 \begin_layout Standard
24425 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
24426 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even pages,
24427 right on odd pages.
24430 \begin_layout Standard
24431 For further information about marginal notes see the section
24434 \begin_inset space ~
24442 \begin_inset space ~
24450 \begin_layout Section
24451 Graphics and Images
24452 \begin_inset Index idx
24457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24464 \begin_inset Index idx
24469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24476 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24478 name "sec:Graphics"
24485 \begin_layout Standard
24486 To insert an image in your document,
24487 place the cursor at the text position you want and click on the toolbar icon
24490 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
24495 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24499 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
24502 \begin_layout Standard
24503 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
24508 tab allows you to choose your image file.
24509 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling factor.
24510 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
24511 \begin_inset space ~
24515 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24517 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
24525 \begin_layout Standard
24530 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width of the image in the output.
24531 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
24534 \begin_inset space ~
24538 \begin_inset space ~
24547 \begin_inset space ~
24551 \begin_inset space ~
24555 \begin_inset space ~
24560 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
24561 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore the tab
24568 \begin_layout Standard
24572 \begin_inset space ~
24576 \begin_inset space ~
24581 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
24582 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
24584 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
24589 \begin_inset space ~
24594 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output,
24595 only a frame with the image size is printed.
24598 \begin_layout Standard
24599 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
24600 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are in the text.
24601 This is an example image within a separate,
24602 horizontally centered paragraph:
24605 \begin_layout Standard
24607 \begin_inset Graphics
24608 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
24616 \begin_layout Standard
24617 If you need image captions or want to reference images,
24618 you have to put the image into a float,
24620 \begin_inset space ~
24624 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24626 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
24634 \begin_layout Subsection
24636 \begin_inset Index idx
24641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24643 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
24646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24658 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24660 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
24667 \begin_layout Standard
24668 You can insert images in any known file format.
24669 But as we explained in section
24670 \begin_inset space ~
24674 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24676 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
24682 every output document format allows only a few image formats.
24684 therefore uses the program
24688 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
24689 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
24690 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
24691 \begin_inset space ~
24695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24697 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
24705 \begin_layout Standard
24706 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
24709 \begin_layout Description
24711 \begin_inset space ~
24714 images consist of pixel values,
24715 often in a compressed form.
24716 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
24717 Well-known bitmap image formats are
24718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24721 Graphics Interchange Format
24722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24739 \begin_inset Index idx
24744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24746 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
24749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24765 Portable Network Graphics
24766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24783 \begin_inset Index idx
24788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24790 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
24793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24809 Joint Photographic Experts Group
24810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24839 \begin_inset Index idx
24844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24846 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
24849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24863 \begin_layout Description
24865 \begin_inset space ~
24868 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without data loss.
24869 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations,
24870 because presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
24871 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
24872 \begin_inset Newline newline
24875 Scalable image formats can be
24876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24879 Scalable Vector Graphics
24880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24897 \begin_inset Index idx
24902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24904 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
24907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24920 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24923 Encapsulated PostScript
24924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24941 \begin_inset Index idx
24946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24948 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
24951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24967 Portable Document Format
24968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24981 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24985 \begin_inset Index idx
24990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25006 because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the result will not be scalable.
25007 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original image.
25011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25012 In the case of PDF,
25013 the original image is additionally compressed.
25021 \begin_layout Standard
25022 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one,
25030 \begin_layout Subsection
25031 Grouping of Image Settings
25032 \begin_inset Index idx
25037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25039 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
25042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25056 \begin_layout Standard
25057 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing group.
25058 Images within such a group share their settings,
25059 so adjusting one image of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in the same way.
25060 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the need to manually change each of them.
25063 \begin_layout Standard
25064 A new group can be set by pressing the button
25067 \begin_inset space ~
25071 \begin_inset space ~
25083 \begin_inset space ~
25087 \begin_inset space ~
25093 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image and checking the name of the desired group.
25096 \begin_layout Section
25098 \begin_inset Index idx
25103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25110 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25119 \begin_layout Standard
25120 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
25123 arg "tabular-insert"
25128 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25132 A dialog will appear,
25133 asking you for the number of rows and columns
25134 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
25136 and you can select a specific (border) style
25139 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated from the rest of the table.
25140 This separation appears due to a double line:
25141 The cells of the first row have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above them.
25142 Here is an example table:
25145 \begin_layout Standard
25147 \begin_inset Tabular
25148 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
25149 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25150 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25151 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25152 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
25153 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25347 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
25351 \begin_layout Standard
25353 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
25354 This corresponds to the
25355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25362 table style listed in the style selection.
25365 \begin_layout Standard
25367 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
25368 Other available styles include:
25371 \begin_layout Itemize
25373 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
25375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25382 which looks line the above table,
25383 but without the first row being separated via double line,
25386 \begin_layout Itemize
25388 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
25389 a border-less table with no lines at all,
25392 \begin_layout Itemize
25394 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
25396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25403 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and bold top/bottom lines (see
25414 \change_inserted 630872221 1621434190
25415 It is also possible to have an horizontal (thin) Footline above the last line.
25420 \begin_layout Standard
25422 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
25423 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar button can be changed in
25425 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25426 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
25430 So if the default style above is not the one you need,
25431 you should alter this setting.
25434 \begin_layout Subsection
25438 \begin_layout Standard
25439 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and then choosing
25441 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
25445 This brings up the table dialog.
25446 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell,
25447 row and/or column where the cursor is placed currently.
25448 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
25449 This means that if you select more cells,
25450 columns or rows the action is done on all of your selection.
25453 \begin_layout Standard
25454 In addition to the table dialog,
25458 \begin_inset space ~
25463 helps you in setting table properties.
25464 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
25467 \begin_layout Standard
25471 \begin_inset space ~
25476 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
25477 If you add a row or column,
25478 it will be inserted right beside or below the current cell respectively.
25479 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width is given.
25480 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs of text,
25482 \begin_inset space ~
25486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25488 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
25496 \begin_layout Standard
25497 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell using the check box
25506 This will merge the cells to
25511 spread over more than one column/row.
25512 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows,
25513 so that the alignment,
25515 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
25516 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one in the last row without the upper border:
25519 \begin_layout Standard
25521 \begin_inset Tabular
25522 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
25523 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
25524 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25525 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
25526 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
25527 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25538 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25547 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25623 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25658 \begin_layout Standard
25659 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
25660 -arguments for the table.
25661 They are necessary for special table formatting,
25662 such as the multirow cells,
25663 explained in the chapter
25670 \begin_inset space ~
25676 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
25677 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
25678 but are visible in the output.
25681 \begin_layout Standard
25682 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25691 Most DVI-viewers are
25695 able to display rotations.
25703 \begin_layout Standard
25708 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
25713 adds lines for all cell borders.
25716 \begin_layout Subsection
25718 \begin_inset Index idx
25723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25725 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
25728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25740 \begin_inset Index idx
25745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25754 \begin_layout Standard
25755 If the table is too long to fit on one page,
25756 you can use the option
25759 \begin_inset space ~
25763 \begin_inset space ~
25771 \begin_inset space ~
25776 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
25777 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
25780 \begin_layout Description
25786 The current row and all rows above,
25787 that don't have any special options defined,
25788 are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
25789 Except for the first page,
25793 \begin_inset space ~
25801 \begin_layout Description
25805 \begin_inset space ~
25811 The current row and all rows above,
25812 that don't have any special options defined,
25813 are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
25816 \begin_layout Description
25822 The current row and all rows below,
25823 that don't have any special options defined,
25824 are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
25825 except for the last page,
25829 \begin_inset space ~
25837 \begin_layout Description
25841 \begin_inset space ~
25847 The current row and all rows below,
25848 that don't have any special options defined,
25849 are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
25852 \begin_layout Description
25854 The first row is reset as a single column.
25855 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
25857 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25861 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
25864 \begin_inset space ~
25872 \begin_layout Standard
25873 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
25874 If you set more than one option in the same table row,
25875 you should be aware that then only the first option is used;
25876 the others will be defined as
25882 first means first in this order:
25887 \begin_inset space ~
25901 \begin_inset space ~
25907 see the following longtable to see how it works:
25910 \begin_layout Standard
25912 \begin_inset Tabular
25913 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
25914 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
25915 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
25916 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25917 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25918 <row endfirsthead="true">
25919 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25925 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
25930 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25939 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25949 <row endfirsthead="true">
25950 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25961 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25970 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25982 <row endhead="true">
25983 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25994 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26003 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26013 <row endhead="true">
26014 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26025 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26034 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26046 <row endfoot="true">
26047 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26058 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26067 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26098 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27040 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27049 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
27052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27058 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27069 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27100 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27131 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27162 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27193 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27224 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27255 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27286 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27317 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27348 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27379 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27410 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27441 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27472 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27503 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27534 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27565 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27596 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27627 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27658 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27689 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27720 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27752 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27783 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27814 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27845 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27876 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27907 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27938 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27969 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28000 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28030 <row endlastfoot="true">
28031 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28042 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
28045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28051 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28068 \begin_layout Subsection
28070 \begin_inset Index idx
28075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28077 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28092 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28094 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
28101 \begin_layout Standard
28102 A table cell can contain text,
28106 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
28107 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
28108 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
28114 nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
28117 \begin_layout Standard
28118 To have multi-line entries in table cells,
28119 you have to declare a fixed width for the column in the table dialog.
28120 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
28124 \begin_layout Standard
28126 \begin_inset Tabular
28127 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
28128 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28129 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28130 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
28131 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28151 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28220 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
28225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28276 This is longer now.
28281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28332 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
28333 This is longer now.
28338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28364 \begin_layout Standard
28365 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
28366 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
28370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28371 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
28376 Selection with the mouse or with
28380 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
28381 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting the selection from outside the table.
28384 \begin_layout Section
28386 \begin_inset Index idx
28391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28398 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28407 \begin_layout Subsection
28411 \begin_layout Standard
28412 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label,
28413 which doesn't have a fixed location.
28415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28422 forward or backward a page or two,
28423 to wherever it fits best.
28431 \begin_inset space ~
28437 because they can float to the next page when there are too many notes on the current page.
28440 \begin_layout Standard
28441 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
28442 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace and pages without text.
28443 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and the image/table,
28444 every float can be referenced in the text.
28445 Floats are therefore numbered.
28446 Referencing is described in section
28447 \begin_inset space ~
28451 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28453 reference "sec:Cross-References"
28461 \begin_layout Standard
28465 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28469 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
28470 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in the output.
28471 After the label you can insert the caption text.
28472 \begin_inset Index idx
28477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28479 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28493 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate paragraph within the float.
28494 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
28495 -document readable,
28496 you can open and close the float box by left-clicking on the box label.
28497 A closed float box looks like this:
28499 \begin_inset Graphics
28500 filename clipart/float.png
28505 – a gray button with a red label.
28508 \begin_layout Standard
28509 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
28510 -errors that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
28513 \begin_layout Subsection
28515 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28517 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
28522 \begin_inset Index idx
28527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28529 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28546 \begin_layout Standard
28548 \begin_inset space ~
28552 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28554 reference "fig:A-star-in"
28559 was created using the menu
28561 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28562 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
28568 arg "float-insert figure"
28572 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and using the menu
28574 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28580 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
28584 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor to the left or right of the image and using the menu
28586 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28588 \begin_inset space ~
28596 arg "layout-paragraph"
28602 \begin_layout Standard
28603 \begin_inset Float figure
28610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28612 \begin_inset Graphics
28613 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
28622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28623 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28626 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28628 name "fig:A-star-in"
28645 \begin_layout Standard
28646 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference to it:
28647 Insert a label into the caption using the menu
28649 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28658 ) and refer to it using the menu
28660 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28666 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28670 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using vague references like
28671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28680 as \SpecialChar LaTeX
28681 will reposition the floats in the final document,
28683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28691 For more about cross-references,
28693 \begin_inset space ~
28697 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28699 reference "sec:Cross-References"
28707 \begin_layout Standard
28708 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float,
28709 but sometimes you might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
28710 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
28711 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures as described in section
28712 \begin_inset space ~
28716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28718 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
28725 \begin_inset space ~
28729 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28731 reference "fig:Two-images"
28736 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
28737 You can also set the images one below the other.
28739 \begin_inset space ~
28743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28745 reference "fig:Undefinable"
28751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28753 reference "fig:Star"
28758 are the subfigures.
28761 \begin_layout Standard
28762 \begin_inset Float figure
28769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28770 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
28774 \begin_inset Float figure
28781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28782 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28785 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28787 name "fig:Undefinable"
28799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28800 \begin_inset Graphics
28801 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
28813 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
28817 \begin_inset Float figure
28824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28825 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28828 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28843 \begin_inset Graphics
28844 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
28856 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
28862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28863 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28866 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28868 name "fig:Two-images"
28885 \begin_layout Subsection
28887 \begin_inset Index idx
28892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28894 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28911 \begin_layout Standard
28912 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
28914 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28915 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
28918 or the toolbar button
28921 arg "float-insert table"
28925 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures and that the label begins with “tab:”.
28927 \begin_inset space ~
28931 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28933 reference "tab:Table-float"
28941 \begin_layout Standard
28942 \begin_inset Float table
28949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28950 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28953 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28955 name "tab:Table-float"
28967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28969 \begin_inset Tabular
28970 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
28971 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28972 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28973 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28974 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29101 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
29109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29122 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
29125 \end{array}\right]$
29133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29146 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
29167 \begin_layout Subsection
29169 \begin_inset Index idx
29174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29176 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29193 \begin_layout Standard
29195 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
29196 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme,
29197 to control the float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float caption.
29198 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
29205 \begin_inset space ~
29213 \begin_layout Section
29215 \begin_inset Index idx
29220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29229 \begin_layout Standard
29231 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
29234 all the usual rules of indentation,
29237 \begin_inset space \space{}
29243 \begin_layout Standard
29244 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
29245 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
29247 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29251 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage and its alignment within the page.
29254 \begin_layout Standard
29256 \begin_inset Box Frameless
29266 height_special "totalheight"
29271 backgroundcolor "none"
29274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29277 This is a minipage.
29278 The text is set in an italic style.
29281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29284 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs another formatting.
29292 \begin_layout Standard
29293 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
29296 If you place two minipages side-by-side,
29301 as described in section
29302 \begin_inset space ~
29306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29308 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
29314 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
29320 \begin_layout Standard
29321 \begin_inset Box Frameless
29331 height_special "totalheight"
29336 backgroundcolor "none"
29339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29340 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
29341 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
29347 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
29351 \begin_inset Box Frameless
29361 height_special "totalheight"
29366 backgroundcolor "none"
29369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29370 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
29371 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
29379 \begin_layout Standard
29380 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29386 \begin_layout Standard
29387 When you right-click on a minipage box,
29388 you can transform the box to another box type.
29389 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
29396 \begin_inset space ~
29404 \begin_layout Chapter
29405 Mathematical Formulas
29406 \begin_inset Index idx
29411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29418 \begin_inset Index idx
29423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29425 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
29428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29440 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29442 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
29449 \begin_layout Standard
29450 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
29455 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
29458 \begin_layout Section
29460 \begin_inset Index idx
29465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29467 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29484 \begin_layout Standard
29485 To create a math formula,
29486 you can just click on the toolbar icon
29499 That will create a little blue rectangle,
29500 with purple markers around its corners.
29501 That blue rectangle is the formula itself;
29502 the purple markers indicate what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
29503 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
29505 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29511 \begin_layout Standard
29512 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done with the
29515 \begin_inset space ~
29521 that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
29524 \begin_layout Standard
29525 There are two main types of formulas,
29526 inline formulas and display formulas.
29527 Inline formulas appear within a text line,
29531 \begin_layout Standard
29532 This is a line with an inline formula
29533 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
29539 \begin_layout Standard
29540 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate paragraph,
29542 \begin_inset Formula
29549 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
29552 \begin_layout Standard
29554 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
29558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29572 followed by a space,
29573 in a formula will create the Greek letter
29574 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
29578 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
29581 \begin_inset space ~
29589 \begin_layout Subsection
29590 Navigating in Formulas
29591 \begin_inset Index idx
29596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29598 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29615 \begin_layout Standard
29616 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is achieved with the arrow keys.
29618 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
29619 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
29624 will leave a formula construct (a square root
29625 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
29630 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
29635 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
29638 \end{array}\right]$
29646 will leave the formula,
29647 placing the cursor after the formula.
29652 can be used to move horizontally in a formula;
29654 through the cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
29657 \begin_layout Standard
29663 printed in this document as
29664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29668 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29676 seems to do nothing in a formula,
29677 since it does not add a space between characters,
29678 but it does exit a nested structure.
29680 you have to be careful about using
29687 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
29696 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29706 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29710 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29716 since in the latter case only the
29719 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
29724 will be under the square root sign:
29726 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
29732 \begin_layout Standard
29733 You can leave many parts of a formula,
29735 partially filled in,
29737 \begin_inset Formula
29739 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
29748 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in,
29749 or a subscript with nothing in it,
29750 the results will be unpredictable,
29751 but most constructs don't mind.
29754 \begin_layout Subsection
29758 \begin_layout Standard
29759 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
29760 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want,
29765 and a cursor movement key to select text.
29766 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
29768 you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
29769 That text can then be cut or copied,
29770 and then pasted within any formula,
29771 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
29775 \begin_layout Subsection
29776 Exponents and Subscripts
29777 \begin_inset Index idx
29782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29784 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29799 \begin_inset Index idx
29804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29806 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29823 \begin_layout Standard
29824 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
29827 arg "math-superscript"
29833 arg "math-subscript"
29837 but it is often much easier to use a command.
29839 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
29846 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29856 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
29863 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
29868 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
29875 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29881 If you use characters in the superscript,
29882 that could be accented with the circumflex
29883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29891 you have to use an extra
29895 to separate the circumflex and the character.
29898 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
29905 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29911 Subscripts are similar:
29913 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
29920 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29928 \begin_layout Subsection
29930 \begin_inset Index idx
29935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29937 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29954 \begin_layout Standard
29955 Create a fraction either with the command
29961 or by using the icon
29964 arg "math-insert \\frac"
29970 \begin_inset space ~
29976 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
29977 The cursor is above the fraction line.
29978 To move it to the bottom,
29990 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction,
29991 as this example shows:
29992 \begin_inset Formula
29994 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
29997 \end{array}\right)}\right]
30005 \begin_layout Subsection
30007 \begin_inset Index idx
30012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30014 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30031 \begin_layout Standard
30032 Roots can be created using the
30035 \begin_inset space ~
30043 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
30049 arg "math-insert \\root"
30071 you can produce roots of higher orders,
30079 always produces a square root.
30082 \begin_layout Subsection
30083 Operators with Limits
30084 \begin_inset Index idx
30089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30091 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30106 \begin_inset Index idx
30111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30113 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30128 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30130 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
30137 \begin_layout Standard
30139 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
30143 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
30146 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
30147 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
30148 by entering them as you would enter a super- or subscript,
30149 directly after the symbol.
30150 The sum operator will automatically place its
30151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30158 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas,
30159 and to the side in inline formulas,
30161 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
30166 \begin_inset Formula
30168 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
30175 will place the limits to the side in both formula types.
30178 \begin_layout Standard
30179 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in display mode.
30180 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly behind the operator and using the menu
30182 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30183 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
30185 \begin_inset space ~
30189 \begin_inset space ~
30203 \begin_layout Standard
30204 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
30205 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30209 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30214 \begin_inset Index idx
30219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30221 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30236 \begin_inset Formula
30238 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
30243 which will place the
30244 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
30248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30256 In inline formulas it looks like this:
30258 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
30264 \begin_layout Standard
30265 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
30272 Have a look at section
30273 \begin_inset space ~
30277 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30279 reference "subsec:Functions"
30284 for an explanation of function macros.
30287 \begin_layout Subsection
30289 \begin_inset Index idx
30294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30296 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30313 \begin_layout Standard
30314 Most math symbols can be found in the
30317 \begin_inset space ~
30322 under one of several categories;
30343 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS).
30346 \begin_layout Standard
30347 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30348 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
30349 you don't have to use the
30352 \begin_inset space ~
30358 you can type the command directly into the formula.
30360 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
30363 \begin_layout Subsection
30365 \begin_inset Index idx
30370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30372 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30389 \begin_layout Standard
30390 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that \SpecialChar LaTeX
30396 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
30402 \begin_inset space ~
30410 arg "math-insert \\space"
30414 This generates a small space,
30415 and shows a small marker on the screen.
30423 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
30426 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
30428 \begin_inset Graphics
30429 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
30434 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind the space marker and enter space again several times.
30435 With every space enter the size will be changed.
30436 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
30438 because they are negative spaces.
30439 Here are two examples:
30442 \begin_layout Standard
30453 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
30459 \begin_layout Standard
30470 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
30476 \begin_layout Subsection
30478 \begin_inset Index idx
30483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30485 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30500 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30502 name "subsec:Functions"
30509 \begin_layout Standard
30513 \begin_inset space ~
30518 contains under the button
30521 arg "math-insert \\functions"
30524 a number of function macros,
30526 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
30531 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
30540 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
30547 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to avoid confusions,
30549 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
30553 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
30559 \begin_layout Standard
30560 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
30562 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
30566 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
30572 \begin_layout Standard
30573 For some mathematical objects,
30575 the macro changes where subscripts are placed,
30576 as described in section
30577 \begin_inset space ~
30581 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30583 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
30591 \begin_layout Subsection
30593 \begin_inset Index idx
30598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30600 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30617 \begin_layout Standard
30618 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text mode.
30619 This may depend on your keyboard,
30620 or the bindings file you use.
30621 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
30625 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
30628 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
30629 Our example is entered by typing
30634 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
30641 \begin_inset space ~
30645 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30647 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
30652 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
30655 \begin_layout Standard
30656 \begin_inset Float table
30663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30664 \begin_inset Caption Standard
30666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30667 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30669 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
30673 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
30681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30683 \begin_inset Tabular
30684 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
30685 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
30686 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
30687 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
30688 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
30690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30772 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
30782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30826 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
30836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30880 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
30890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30934 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
30944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30988 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
30998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31042 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
31052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31096 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
31106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31150 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
31160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31204 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
31214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31249 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
31270 \begin_layout Standard
31271 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
31274 \begin_inset space ~
31282 arg "math-insert \\hat"
31286 this will apply to any selection you have made within a formula too.
31289 \begin_layout Section
31290 Brackets and Delimiters
31291 \begin_inset Index idx
31296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31298 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31313 \begin_inset Index idx
31318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31320 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31335 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31337 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
31344 \begin_layout Standard
31345 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
31348 using just the keys
31353 But if you want to surround a large structure,
31354 like a matrix or a fraction,
31355 or if you have several layers of brackets,
31356 it is better to use the math toolbar delimiter icon
31359 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
31364 if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
31365 \begin_inset Formula
31367 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
31375 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
31377 the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
31380 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
31383 and the expression on the right was entered using the
31389 \begin_inset Formula
31391 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
31399 \begin_layout Standard
31400 If you use the delimiter icon,
31402 and other brackets from that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is inside.
31405 \begin_layout Standard
31406 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the left side and right side.
31407 If you use the option
31410 \begin_inset space ~
31416 the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
31417 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
31419 If you want one side not to have a bracket,
31425 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
31426 with a dotted line,
31427 but nothing will be printed.
31430 \begin_layout Standard
31431 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures,
31432 like a square root,
31433 you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that is to go inside the brackets.
31434 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
31439 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses,
31442 on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
31444 to insert a pair of parentheses,
31445 select the structure and enter
31448 arg "math-delim ( )"
31454 \begin_layout Section
31455 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
31456 \begin_inset Index idx
31461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31463 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31478 \begin_inset Index idx
31483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31485 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31500 \begin_inset Index idx
31505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31507 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31511 Multi-line Equations
31524 \begin_layout Standard
31525 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
31529 \begin_inset space ~
31537 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
31541 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
31542 Here is an example:
31543 \begin_inset Formula
31545 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
31554 The parentheses aren't automatic,
31555 but you can add them as described in section
31556 \begin_inset space ~
31560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31562 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
31568 When you construct the matrix,
31569 you can decide whether the column entries will be left-,
31571 or center-justified.
31572 This alignment is set in the box
31577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31628 for every column as default.
31631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31642 means that the first column will be left-justified,
31643 the second will be centered,
31644 and the third column will be right-justified,
31645 because each letter corresponds to the relevant column.
31646 The result will look like this:
31647 \begin_inset Formula
31650 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
31651 column & has & has\,right\\
31652 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
31661 \begin_layout Standard
31662 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
31665 arg "newline-insert newline"
31668 while the cursor is in the matrix.
31669 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
31671 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31674 or the math toolbar.
31677 \begin_layout Standard
31678 There are other arrays used in formulas,
31679 such as distinctions of cases.
31680 It can be created with the menu
31682 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31683 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
31685 \begin_inset space ~
31697 Here is an example:
31699 \begin_inset Formula
31713 \begin_layout Standard
31714 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31717 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
31720 arg "newline-insert newline"
31724 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear,
31725 one for each column.
31729 arg "newline-insert newline"
31732 in a non-empty formula,
31733 the part before the relation sign (equal sign
31734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31741 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column,
31742 the relation sign is in the second column,
31743 and the rest in the third column.
31744 A new row is created by every further entry of
31747 arg "newline-insert newline"
31751 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
31752 Here is an example:
31753 \begin_inset Formula
31755 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
31756 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
31761 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
31762 \begin_inset Formula
31764 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
31772 \begin_layout Standard
31773 The multi-line formula type described here is called
31780 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
31781 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
31782 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31784 reference "eq:asquared"
31790 The other types are described in section
31791 \begin_inset space ~
31795 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31797 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
31805 \begin_layout Section
31806 Formula Numbering and Referencing
31807 \begin_inset Index idx
31812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31814 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31829 \begin_inset Index idx
31834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31836 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31840 Referencing formulas
31851 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31853 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
31860 \begin_layout Standard
31861 To number a formula,
31862 set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
31864 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31865 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
31867 \begin_inset space ~
31871 \begin_inset space ~
31879 arg "math-number-toggle"
31883 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
31884 within parentheses.
31885 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
31886 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on the document class.
31887 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
31888 separated by a dot:
31889 \begin_inset Formula
31899 arg "math-number-toggle"
31902 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
31903 You can only number displayed formulas.
31906 \begin_layout Standard
31907 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line:
31910 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31911 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
31913 \begin_inset space ~
31917 \begin_inset space ~
31925 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
31928 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
31929 \begin_inset Formula
31932 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
31938 To number all lines use the shortcut
31941 arg "math-number-toggle"
31947 \begin_layout Standard
31948 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31951 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
31952 A label is inserted with the menu
31954 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31963 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
31964 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
31965 It is recommended that you use the suggested
31966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31977 as the first part of the label,
31978 because this helps later to identify the label type when you have many labels in your document.
31979 We inserted in the following example the label
31980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31987 in the second line:
31988 \begin_inset Formula
31990 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
31991 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
31996 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
31997 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
31998 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
32000 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32002 \begin_inset space ~
32010 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
32014 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
32015 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
32016 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output as the formula number:
32019 \begin_layout Standard
32020 This is a cross-reference to equation (
32021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32023 reference "eq:tanhExp"
32031 \begin_layout Standard
32032 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
32033 's cross-reference box are described in section
32034 \begin_inset space ~
32038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32040 reference "sec:Cross-References"
32047 set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and press
32054 \begin_layout Section
32055 User defined math macros
32056 \begin_inset Index idx
32061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32063 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32080 \begin_layout Standard
32082 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you have equations of the same form in a document several times.
32083 Math macros are explained in section
32086 \begin_inset space ~
32098 \begin_layout Section
32102 \begin_layout Subsection
32104 \begin_inset Index idx
32109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32111 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32128 \begin_layout Standard
32129 The standard font for text is italic,
32130 for numbers the standard is roman.
32131 To set a font in a formula,
32135 \begin_inset space ~
32143 arg "math-insert \\font"
32147 or enter its command,
32149 \begin_inset space ~
32153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32155 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
32164 \begin_layout Standard
32165 \begin_inset Float table
32172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32173 \begin_inset Caption Standard
32175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32176 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32178 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
32182 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
32190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32192 \begin_inset Tabular
32193 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="2">
32194 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
32195 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
32196 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
32198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32228 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
32236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32255 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
32263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32282 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
32290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32315 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
32323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32342 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
32350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32364 <row change="inserted 5863344 1592055455">
32365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32370 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
32371 \begin_inset Formula $\mathds{DOUBLESTROKE}$
32379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32384 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
32396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32400 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
32408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32434 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
32442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32456 <row change="inserted -131811572 1591595416">
32457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32462 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
32470 \begin_inset Formula $\mathscr{SCRIPT}$
32478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32483 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
32495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32499 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
32507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32533 \begin_layout Standard
32534 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32543 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
32546 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055666
32549 \change_deleted -131811572 1591595671
32553 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595667
32573 \begin_layout Standard
32574 When you use a typeface,
32575 a blue box is inserted in the formula.
32576 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
32581 within the box will set the cursor outside,
32582 so that you have to use a
32583 \change_deleted 177693 1654619816
32585 \change_inserted 177693 1654619818
32588 space when you need a space in the box.
32589 Here is an example where
32590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32601 denotes the set of numbers:
32602 \begin_inset Formula
32604 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
32612 \begin_layout Standard
32613 The typefaces are nestable,
32614 which can cause confusion.
32627 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
32631 \begin_inset Newline newline
32634 So it is better not to use this feature.
32637 \begin_layout Standard
32638 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
32640 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
32644 \begin_inset Newline newline
32647 You can only print them emboldened using the command
32654 which works like the other typeface commands:
32656 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
32662 \begin_layout Standard
32669 works for all symbols,
32674 \begin_layout Standard
32675 A number of other font options are available as well,
32678 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32679 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
32681 \begin_inset space ~
32689 \begin_layout Subsection
32691 \begin_inset Index idx
32696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32698 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32715 \begin_layout Standard
32716 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font,
32718 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text,
32719 which is obtained using the entry
32722 \begin_inset space ~
32726 \begin_inset space ~
32734 \begin_inset space ~
32742 arg "math-insert \\font"
32746 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
32747 in black instead of blue.
32748 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
32749 Here is an example:
32750 \begin_inset Formula
32753 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
32754 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
32763 \begin_layout Subsection
32765 \begin_inset Index idx
32770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32772 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32789 \begin_layout Standard
32790 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode,
32791 which are automatically chosen in most situations.
32812 For most characters,
32821 are actually the same size,
32823 superscripts and subscripts,
32824 and certain other structures,
32830 Except for some operators,
32831 which resize themselves to accommodate various situations,
32832 all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
32833 thinks are appropriate.
32834 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
32837 arg "math-insert \\style"
32841 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
32844 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
32848 which is normally in
32859 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
32863 The four styles are used in the following example:
32866 \begin_layout Standard
32867 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
32872 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
32877 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
32882 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
32888 \begin_layout Standard
32889 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset is set in a particular size with the menu
32891 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32893 \begin_inset space ~
32899 all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
32901 if the base font size of the document is changed,
32902 all fonts will be adjusted to correspond.
32903 As an example here is a formula in the font size
32904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32914 \begin_layout Standard
32918 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
32924 \begin_layout Section
32925 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
32927 \begin_inset Index idx
32932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32939 \begin_inset Index idx
32944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32946 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32963 \begin_layout Standard
32965 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS) that are in common use.
32968 \begin_layout Subsection
32969 Enabling AMS-Support
32972 \begin_layout Standard
32973 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in the document by
32974 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338725
32990 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338685
32991 selecting the checkbox
32994 \begin_inset space ~
32998 \begin_inset space ~
33002 \begin_inset space ~
33011 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33015 \begin_inset Index idx
33020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33022 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33039 \begin_inset space ~
33045 AMS is needed for many math-constructs;
33046 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
33047 -errors in formulas,
33048 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
33051 \begin_layout Subsection
33053 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33055 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
33060 \begin_inset Index idx
33065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33067 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33071 Multi-line Equations
33084 \begin_layout Standard
33085 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
33086 provides a selection of different formula types.
33088 allows you to choose between
33113 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
33115 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33123 for an explanation of these formula types.
33126 \begin_layout Chapter
33130 \begin_layout Section
33132 \begin_inset Index idx
33137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33144 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33146 name "sec:Cross-References"
33153 \begin_layout Standard
33154 One of \SpecialChar LyX
33155 's strengths is cross-references.
33156 You can reference every section,
33160 and list in the document.
33161 To reference a document part,
33162 you have to insert a label into it.
33163 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
33164 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
33167 \begin_layout Enumerate
33171 \begin_layout Enumerate
33172 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33174 name "enu:Second-item"
33181 \begin_layout Enumerate
33185 \begin_layout Standard
33186 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
33188 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33191 or by pressing the toolbar button
33198 A gray label box like this:
33200 \begin_inset Graphics
33201 filename clipart/label.png
33205 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
33207 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix,
33208 in our case the text
33209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33242 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted;
33244 if you insert a label into a section heading,
33245 the suggested prefix will be
33246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33260 \begin_layout Standard
33261 To reference the item,
33262 we refer to its label using the menu
33264 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33267 or the toolbar button
33270 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
33274 A gray cross-reference box like this:
33276 \begin_inset Graphics
33277 filename clipart/reference.png
33281 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels in the document.
33282 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
33283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33295 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear in the output.
33298 \begin_layout Standard
33299 As an alternative to
33301 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33305 you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
33310 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted to the actual cursor position via the menu
33312 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
33324 \begin_layout Standard
33325 Here is our cross-reference:
33327 \begin_inset space ~
33331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33333 reference "enu:Second-item"
33341 \begin_layout Standard
33342 It is recommended to use a
33343 \change_deleted 177693 1654619823
33345 \change_inserted 177693 1654619826
33352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33353 described in section
33354 \begin_inset space ~
33358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33360 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
33370 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly line breaks between them.
33373 \begin_layout Standard
33374 There are eight formats of cross-references:
33377 \begin_layout Description
33380 this is the default:
33382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33384 reference "fig:Two-images"
33392 \begin_layout Description
33394 prints the number within two parentheses,
33395 this is the style normally used to reference formulas,
33396 especially when the reference name
33397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33408 reference "eq:tanhExp"
33416 \begin_layout Description
33418 prints the page number:
33420 \begin_inset space ~
33424 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33425 LatexCommand pageref
33426 reference "fig:Two-images"
33434 \begin_layout Description
33436 \begin_inset space ~
33440 \begin_inset space ~
33444 prints the text “on page” and the page number:
33446 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33447 LatexCommand vpageref
33448 reference "fig:Two-images"
33454 \begin_inset Newline newline
33457 If the label is on the same page,
33458 it prints “on this page”;
33459 if the label is on a facing page in a two-sided document,
33460 it prints “on the facing page”;
33461 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page,
33462 it prints “on the previous page”;
33463 if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
33464 it prints “on the next page”.
33465 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
33468 \begin_layout Description
33470 \begin_inset space ~
33474 \begin_inset space ~
33478 \begin_inset space ~
33483 the text “on page” and the page number:
33485 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33487 reference "fig:Two-images"
33493 \begin_inset Newline newline
33496 If the label is on the same page,
33497 this format behaves like
33504 otherwise it behaves like
33508 \begin_inset space ~
33512 \begin_inset space ~
33521 \begin_layout Description
33523 \begin_inset space ~
33527 prints a self defined cross-reference format.
33528 \begin_inset Newline newline
33532 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33541 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33551 \begin_inset Index idx
33556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33559 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33574 \begin_inset Index idx
33579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33582 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33602 \begin_inset Newline newline
33605 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
33606 -package should be used for this feature by setting the option
33608 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
33612 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33613 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33621 is the default and preferred because
33625 supports only English documents.
33626 The format is specified by using the command
33630 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
33639 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33640 preamble of the document.
33641 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label shortcut
33642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33658 \begin_inset Newline newline
33665 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
33670 \begin_inset Newline newline
33681 predefines reference formats for all available types.
33682 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem' environments.
33683 So if you want to make formatted references to,
33686 then you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
33692 you might do so as follows:
33693 \begin_inset Newline newline
33700 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
33701 format{prop}{Proposition
33706 \begin_inset Newline newline
33709 For more information about defining formatted references,
33710 have a look at the package documentation
33711 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33713 key "prettyref,refstyle"
33719 \begin_inset Newline newline
33730 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
33737 \begin_layout Description
33739 \begin_inset space ~
33743 prints the caption or the name of the reference:
33745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33746 LatexCommand nameref
33747 reference "fig:Two-images"
33755 \begin_layout Description
33757 \begin_inset space ~
33761 prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33762 label for the reference:
33764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33765 LatexCommand labelonly
33766 reference "fig:Two-images"
33772 \begin_inset Newline newline
33775 This allows for customization,
33776 using \SpecialChar TeX
33778 if you want to issue a command that \SpecialChar LyX
33785 then you may want to use the
33788 \begin_inset space ~
33794 which will output only the part of the reference following the
33795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33803 This is the form needed for e.
33804 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33808 \begin_inset space \space{}
33815 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
33817 The varieties are adjusted in the field
33821 of the cross-reference window,
33822 that appears when you click on the cross-reference.
33825 \begin_layout Standard
33826 You can only use the style
33830 to reference numbered document parts,
33831 while the reference style
33835 is always possible.
33838 \begin_layout Standard
33839 If you want to reference a section,
33840 put the label in the section heading;
33841 for floats put the label in the caption;
33842 for footnotes put the label in it.
33843 Referencing formulas is explained in section
33844 \begin_inset space ~
33848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33850 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
33858 \begin_layout Standard
33859 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
33863 \begin_inset space ~
33867 \begin_inset space ~
33872 sets the cursor before the referenced label
33873 \change_deleted 5863208 1686632729
33876 \change_inserted 5863208 1686632729
33878 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757593
33879 (Ctrl-clicking on a cross-reference will also take you to its corresponding label
33880 \change_deleted 5863208 1686632734
33882 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757593
33884 \change_inserted 5863208 1686632735
33888 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
33891 \begin_inset space ~
33896 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
33897 You can also go back with the toolbar button
33900 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
33904 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757706
33909 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
33910 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
33918 \begin_layout Standard
33919 You can change labels at any time.
33920 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you do not need to
33921 \change_deleted -584632292 1599757720
33923 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757724
33924 change them all manually
33929 \begin_layout Standard
33930 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label,
33931 you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
33932 “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead of the reference.
33935 \begin_layout Standard
33936 References are described in detail in the section
33947 \begin_layout Section
33948 Table of Contents and other Listings
33949 \begin_inset Index idx
33954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33961 \begin_inset Index idx
33966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33968 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33983 \begin_inset Index idx
33988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33995 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34004 \begin_layout Subsection
34006 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34008 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
34015 \begin_layout Standard
34016 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
34018 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34019 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
34021 \begin_inset space ~
34025 \begin_inset space ~
34031 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
34033 If you click on it,
34039 showing you the TOC entries as outline,
34040 which allows you to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
34041 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
34043 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
34045 \begin_inset space ~
34050 that is described in section
34051 \begin_inset space ~
34055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34057 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
34065 \begin_layout Standard
34066 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
34067 If you have declared a short title for a section heading,
34068 as described in section
34069 \begin_inset space ~
34073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34075 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
34081 it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
34083 \begin_inset space ~
34087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34089 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
34094 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are listed in the TOC.
34095 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
34098 \begin_layout Subsection
34101 Listings and Algorithms
34102 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34104 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
34111 \begin_layout Standard
34114 listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table of contents.
34115 You can insert them via the
34117 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34118 List/Contents/References
34121 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
34124 \begin_layout Section
34125 URLs and Hyperlinks
34126 \begin_inset Index idx
34131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34138 \begin_inset Index idx
34143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34152 \begin_layout Subsection
34154 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34163 \begin_layout Standard
34164 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
34166 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34172 \begin_layout Standard
34173 Here is an example URL:
34177 \begin_inset Flex URL
34180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34182 https://www.lyx.org
34190 \begin_layout Standard
34192 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535921
34193 You cannot change the style of the link text
34194 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535924
34198 the URL text will always be in the style
34204 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535967
34205 You can globally change the formatting by putting to
34207 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34208 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34214 \begin_layout LyX-Code
34216 \change_inserted -712698321 1676536088
34222 \begin_layout Standard
34224 \change_inserted -712698321 1676536347
34248 (use whatever the current text font is).
34249 To have italicized URLs,
34253 \begin_layout LyX-Code
34255 \change_inserted -712698321 1676536274
34267 \begin_layout Standard
34269 \change_deleted -712698321 1676536203
34270 To be able to format the URL text,
34271 use hyperlinks as explained in the next subsection.
34273 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535961
34277 \begin_layout Standard
34279 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34281 \change_deleted -712698321 1676534694
34283 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34285 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535379
34286 between lines at certain characters,
34290 \begin_layout LyX-Code
34292 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535384
34303 \begin_layout Standard
34305 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535411
34306 It does not break at a hyphen (
34311 but you can change that by adding
34316 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535339
34318 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535862
34321 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34322 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34323 Document Class\SpecialChar menuseparator
34324 Class Options\SpecialChar menuseparator
34328 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535861
34331 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34333 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535863
34335 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535864
34337 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34339 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535842
34340 this still does not break URLs suitably to you,
34341 a last resort is to put
34344 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34348 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535846
34352 \change_inserted -712698321 1676536760
34355 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34356 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34361 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535894
34362 in the preamble then the
34363 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535897
34365 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34367 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535899
34369 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34371 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535445
34373 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535903
34375 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34376 be broken at every character.
34378 \change_deleted -712698321 1676536383
34384 \begin_layout Standard
34385 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34394 URLs must not end with a backslash,
34395 otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
34404 \begin_layout Subsection
34406 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34408 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
34415 \begin_layout Standard
34416 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
34418 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34421 or with the toolbar button
34428 The appearing dialog has two fields:
34438 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
34439 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
34441 \begin_inset CommandInset href
34443 name "LyX's homepage"
34444 target "https://www.lyx.org"
34450 an Email address like this:
34452 \begin_inset CommandInset href
34454 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
34455 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
34463 \change_deleted -712698321 1672058176
34467 \change_inserted -712698321 1672058271
34468 or any other valid URI (such as
34479 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
34487 \begin_layout Standard
34488 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by adding the prefix
34489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34501 \change_inserted -712698321 1672058343
34503 but note that most PDF viewers disable such links for security reasons
34508 \begin_layout Standard
34509 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
34510 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
34511 To set the format of the link text,
34512 highlight the hyperlink inset and use the text style dialog.
34513 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
34518 \begin_inset CommandInset href
34520 name "LyX's homepage"
34521 target "https://www.lyx.org"
34529 \begin_layout Standard
34530 The link text color can be changed,
34535 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
34537 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34538 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34542 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the option
34543 \begin_inset Newline newline
34551 \begin_inset Newline newline
34558 in the PDF Properties dialog.
34559 \change_inserted 5863208 1686630948
34563 \begin_layout Standard
34565 \change_inserted 5863208 1686631630
34566 To open the link while editing in \SpecialChar LyX
34567 you can use context menu (or
34568 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813434
34570 \change_inserted 5863208 1686631630
34574 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813424
34578 \change_inserted 5863208 1686631630
34580 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303457
34584 \begin_layout Section
34586 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303474
34588 \begin_inset Index idx
34593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34600 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34602 name "sec:Counters"
34609 \begin_layout Standard
34611 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
34612 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34613 is its ability to manage counters.
34615 this is handled automatically,
34616 but there are times one wants to modify counters directly.
34617 This can be done in
34618 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500277
34620 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500277
34623 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
34624 using the counter inset,
34625 which is accessible from the Edit menu.
34626 This allows one to set a counter's value;
34627 to reset it (to zero);
34631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34633 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541231
34634 Note that the section counter,
34636 starts with its value at zero and then is incremented to one when the first section is created.
34638 if you want the next section to be section five,
34640 then you need to set the section counter to four.
34647 to add to the value (or subtract from it,
34648 since the value added can be negative);
34650 to restore the saved value;
34651 and to print the value.
34652 These effects can also be limited to
34653 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500332
34655 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500332
34658 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
34660 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output,
34662 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500350
34664 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500350
34667 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
34671 \begin_layout Standard
34673 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529162
34674 There are five commands you can use:
34677 \begin_layout Enumerate
34679 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529167
34685 Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
34688 \begin_layout Enumerate
34690 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529177
34696 Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or to subtract,
34697 if you choose a negative number)
34700 \begin_layout Enumerate
34702 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529180
34708 Sets the value of the counter to 0.
34711 \begin_layout Enumerate
34713 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529184
34716 Save value of counter:
34719 Saves the value of the counter so that it can later be restored.
34722 \begin_layout Enumerate
34724 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529187
34727 Restore value of counter:
34730 Restores the previously saved value.
34733 \begin_layout Standard
34735 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374230
34736 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all those that are available in the current document class.
34741 \begin_layout Section
34743 \begin_inset Index idx
34748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34755 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34757 name "sec:Appendices"
34764 \begin_layout Standard
34765 Appendices are created with the menu
34767 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34769 \begin_inset space ~
34773 \begin_inset space ~
34779 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end as the appendix part of the book.
34780 This part is marked with a red borderline.
34783 \begin_layout Standard
34784 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
34785 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
34786 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot and the subsection number.
34787 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
34791 \begin_layout Standard
34793 \begin_inset space ~
34797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34799 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
34809 \begin_inset space ~
34813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34815 reference "subsec:Export"
34823 \begin_layout Section
34825 \begin_inset Index idx
34830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34837 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34839 name "sec:Bibliography"
34846 \begin_layout Standard
34847 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
34849 You can include a bibliography database,
34850 which is explained in sec.
34851 \begin_inset space ~
34855 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34857 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
34866 or you can insert the bibliography manually,
34867 using the paragraph environment
34872 which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
34873 \begin_inset space ~
34877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34879 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
34885 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in this document,
34886 such as author-year citations,
34887 and if you have more than a handful of references,
34888 then you should seriously consider
34892 using a bibliography database.
34895 \begin_layout Standard
34896 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches,
34897 we use two bibliographies in this document,
34902 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
34904 the bibliography that is created from a database lists only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
34906 the database approach relieves you,
34907 amongst other things,
34908 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
34911 \begin_layout Subsection
34912 The Bibliography Environment
34913 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34915 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
34922 \begin_layout Standard
34928 every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled with a number.
34929 If you click on it,
34930 you will get a dialog in which you can set a
34939 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography entry.
34940 Each entry needs to be given a unique key,
34941 which is one word consisting of ASCII characters only.
34945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34947 \begin_inset CommandInset href
34950 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
34956 \begin_inset Newline newline
34960 \begin_inset Flex URL
34963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34965 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
34976 our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
34978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34986 a short form of its title,
34988 \begin_inset Newline newline
34996 references to it will appear with this label instead of the number of the entry.
35001 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
35009 \begin_layout Standard
35010 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
35012 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35015 or the toolbar button
35018 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
35022 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear containing the available citations.
35023 Select one or more keys from the list and
35033 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
35034 If you click on the box,
35035 the citation window will appear and you can change the reference.
35038 \begin_layout Standard
35039 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
35040 Here are two examples;
35041 the first without a label,
35042 the second with the label
35043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35053 \begin_layout Standard
35057 Companion Second Edition
35061 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35063 key "latexcompanion"
35071 \begin_layout Standard
35072 The \SpecialChar LyX
35073 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
35075 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35085 \begin_layout Standard
35086 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations,
35087 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35093 \begin_inset Index idx
35098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35101 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35118 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
35119 the label needs to be given the form
35120 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35124 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35131 Author A and Author B(Year)
35132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35139 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits the year.
35146 \begin_inset space ~
35151 in the document settings
35152 \begin_inset Index idx
35157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35159 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35175 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
35177 \begin_inset space ~
35183 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35185 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
35194 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
35196 Once you have done that,
35200 \change_inserted 630872221 1621589258
35202 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
35205 dialog has three input fields instead of the
35224 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation reference,
35225 the second the year (without parentheses).
35226 These two are madatory.
35227 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full list (
35233 ) and in abrreviated form (
35241 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
35242 add the abbreviated form to
35246 and the full list to the optional
35254 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
35255 If specified like this,
35258 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
35259 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
35262 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35279 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between full and abbreviated list
35283 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
35284 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for the citation references.
35285 In the bibliography entry,
35286 author and year must be added manually.
35291 \begin_layout Standard
35292 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest label via the menu
35294 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
35296 \begin_inset space ~
35304 arg "layout-paragraph"
35308 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
35311 \begin_layout Subsection
35312 Bibliography databases
35313 \begin_inset Index idx
35318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35320 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35335 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35337 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
35344 \begin_layout Standard
35345 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different documents.
35349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35350 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning them.
35351 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations and reviews along with bibliographical information.
35356 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography entries.
35357 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of your working field in a database.
35358 This database can be used for different documents,
35359 and by default only the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography list for that document.
35360 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books you have cited.
35363 \begin_layout Standard
35364 The database is a text file with the file extension
35365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35377 containing the bibliography in a special format.
35378 The format is explained in
35379 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35386 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35388 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35390 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
35396 The file can be created using any text editor,
35397 but normally one uses a special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
35398 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
35400 \begin_inset Flex URL
35403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35405 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
35413 \begin_layout Standard
35415 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
35416 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35417 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases for a long time.
35418 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing styles available.
35419 But it has its drawbacks,
35420 especially when it comes to more complex bibliographic needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
35421 Those are addressed by
35426 \begin_inset Index idx
35431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35434 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35449 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35450 (although it has been significantly extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35461 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35463 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35464 might conversely fail to correctly handle databases that use specific
35474 but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references from it.
35477 \begin_layout Standard
35478 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35484 set in the document settings (menu
35486 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35490 \begin_inset Index idx
35495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35497 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35518 \begin_inset space ~
35523 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35531 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35532 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35534 \begin_inset Index idx
35539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35541 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35545 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35559 \begin_layout Standard
35560 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35564 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35565 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
35567 \begin_inset space ~
35573 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35581 Add bibliography to TOC
35583 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
35588 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database in the document or just the cited references.
35590 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
35595 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s),
35596 should this differ from the encoding of the document.
35601 \begin_layout Standard
35602 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35603 style file is a text file with the file extension
35604 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35612 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35615 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
35616 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35617 distribution should provide several of these,
35618 and many publishers provide their own style files,
35619 so that you don't have to take care of the layout.
35620 It is of course possible to write your own style file,
35621 but this is something for experts.
35625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35626 For information on how this is done,
35628 \begin_inset Newline newline
35632 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35634 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
35644 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35650 which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards Institute (DIN).
35653 \begin_layout Standard
35654 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
35657 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35659 \begin_inset Index idx
35664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35666 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35681 \begin_inset Index idx
35686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35689 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35706 \begin_layout Standard
35707 Accessing a database via
35711 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35714 \change_deleted 630872221 1621599883
35716 \change_inserted 630872221 1621599883
35721 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35722 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
35724 \begin_inset space ~
35730 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35731 you cannot select a
35736 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
35740 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35743 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
35745 note the following.
35750 \begin_layout Standard
35755 has two different style files:
35756 a bibliography style file (text file with the file extension
35757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35768 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style file (text file with the file extension
35769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35780 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
35781 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching styles.
35782 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography style.
35785 \begin_layout Standard
35790 styles are not set in the
35793 \begin_inset space ~
35799 but in the document settings.
35800 \begin_inset Index idx
35805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35807 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35822 in the dialog in the
35827 which is only visible if you use
35832 you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for example how its heading will appear).
35833 These options are described in detail in the
35839 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35849 \begin_layout Standard
35850 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
35851 \begin_inset space ~
35855 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35857 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
35868 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35869 Bibliography Processors
35872 \begin_layout Standard
35873 To generate the bibliography from a database,
35875 uses a bibliography processor,
35876 that is an external program that reads the database,
35877 sorts the citations and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
35878 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35880 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread,
35881 but the disadvantage that it has severe limitations,
35885 \begin_layout Standard
35887 some alternatives have been developed that address some of these limitations.
35888 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
35889 You can do this on a general level in
35891 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35892 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35893 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
35896 or for individual documents in
35898 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35899 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35903 The following variants are available by default:
35906 \begin_layout Description
35909 \begin_inset Index idx
35914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35917 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35931 developed exclusively for
35935 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35941 provides full Unicode support,
35942 unlimited memory and many specific features
35952 it is strongly recommended to use
35959 \begin_layout Description
35960 bibtex the standard;
35961 does not allow special characters in bibliography entries that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding,
35963 works with all bibliography packages,
35964 although it will probably fail with
35968 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
35971 \begin_layout Description
35972 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding (but no Unicode support),
35978 works with all bibliography packages,
35979 although more complex
35983 bibliographies will exceed its limits,
35988 features are supported.
35991 \begin_layout Standard
35992 By default (with the
35998 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35999 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36012 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36013 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36014 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
36019 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography approach (
36032 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36033 -based bibliography styles).
36034 This should suit most needs.
36037 \begin_layout Standard
36038 In Japanese documents,
36039 a specific processor is used.
36040 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
36041 (in \SpecialChar LyX
36047 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36048 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
36049 You can adjust it in
36051 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36052 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36053 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
36059 \begin_layout Standard
36060 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you can add below the selection.
36061 Before adding options,
36062 it is strongly recommended that you read the manual of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36069 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36079 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36083 \begin_layout Standard
36085 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple bibliographies.
36086 These are explained in detail in section
36088 Customizing Bibliographies
36092 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36097 Additional Features
36100 \change_deleted 630872221 1621599958
36104 \begin_layout Subsection
36106 \begin_inset Index idx
36111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36113 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36128 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36130 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
36137 \begin_layout Standard
36138 Many different citation formats are common,
36140 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36144 \begin_inset space \space{}
36147 numerical citation (as
36148 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36155 like in this document),
36156 alpha-numerical citations (as
36157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36161 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36164 ) or author-year citations (as
36165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36174 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style files.
36177 \begin_layout Standard
36178 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
36181 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36182 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36186 \begin_inset Index idx
36191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36193 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36207 you have a range of other options,
36208 depending on your preferred bibliography approach.
36213 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography labels,
36217 \begin_inset space ~
36228 \begin_inset space ~
36233 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
36234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36236 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
36244 \begin_layout Standard
36245 With a bibliography database (see
36246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36248 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
36256 ) one has in contrary to the
36260 environment full access to the formatting styles.
36261 These style formats are available:
36264 \begin_layout Description
36266 \begin_inset space ~
36269 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36270 -based approached without any additional packages (simple numeric citations).
36273 \begin_layout Description
36274 Biblatex loads the package
36279 \begin_inset Index idx
36284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36287 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36301 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
36303 Biblatex citation style
36307 Biblatex bibliography style
36310 Options to the package
36314 can be entered in the
36321 \begin_layout Description
36323 \begin_inset space ~
36327 \begin_inset space ~
36330 mode) loads the package
36334 with the natbib compatibility mode.
36335 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that uses
36346 behavior very closely.
36351 this option has some additional styles.
36356 styles are also supported by this variant.
36359 \begin_layout Description
36361 \begin_inset space ~
36364 (BibTeX) loads the package
36369 \begin_inset Index idx
36374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36377 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36391 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
36394 \begin_layout Description
36396 \begin_inset space ~
36399 (BibTeX) loads the package
36404 \begin_inset Index idx
36409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36412 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36426 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
36429 \begin_layout Standard
36438 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical citation styles.
36439 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
36449 this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
36451 Whether the output uses numerical,
36452 author-year or another format such as alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
36454 Biblatex citation style
36458 when switching between Author-year and Author-number,
36459 a suitable style is proposed.
36466 the dialog selection will ultimately determine the style.
36469 \begin_layout Standard
36470 For any author-year and author-numerical selection,
36471 multiple style variants are available in the
36476 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase a name prefix such as
36477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36492 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
36493 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36497 \begin_inset space \space{}
36501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36512 \begin_layout Standard
36513 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation reference,
36515 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36519 \begin_inset space \space{}
36523 which will then be formatted according to the style's needs (e.
36524 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36528 \begin_inset space \space{}
36532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36544 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
36548 \begin_inset space ~
36556 \begin_inset space ~
36562 Here is a simple example where the text
36563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36567 \begin_inset space ~
36571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36574 appears after the reference:
36577 \begin_layout Quote
36579 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36582 key "latexcompanion"
36590 \begin_layout Standard
36591 All styles except for
36595 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such as
36596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36604 This text is then also included in the parentheses,
36605 if the style requires this.
36608 \begin_layout Standard
36609 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
36610 So if you refer to multiple references at once,
36611 the prenote will precede the first citation in the list,
36612 the postnote will follow the last.
36617 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a multi-citation (so-called
36618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36621 qualified citation lists
36622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36628 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple items the
36632 dialog will display three columns in the field
36640 \begin_inset space ~
36649 \begin_inset space ~
36657 \begin_inset space ~
36663 If you double-click on an item's
36666 \begin_inset space ~
36674 \begin_inset space ~
36680 you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
36683 General text before
36689 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
36692 \begin_layout Subsection
36694 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509964
36695 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36697 name "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
36701 Opening cited documents from within \SpecialChar LyX
36705 \begin_layout Standard
36707 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509000
36709 supports opening documents selected citations point to via the
36712 \begin_inset space ~
36716 \begin_inset space ~
36720 \begin_inset space ~
36724 \begin_inset space ~
36727 Content\SpecialChar ldots
36730 context menu if specific conditions are met:
36733 \begin_layout Itemize
36735 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526971
36736 If citation entries include any of the fields
36737 \begin_inset Flex Code
36740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36742 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
36751 \begin_inset Flex Code
36754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36756 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
36764 for BibTeX and BibLaTeX,
36766 \begin_inset Flex Code
36769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36771 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
36779 for BibLaTeX (covering arXiv,
36784 \begin_inset Flex Code
36787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36789 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
36798 the action will launch a web browser with the appropriate link.
36801 \begin_layout Itemize
36803 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509157
36804 If citation entries include any of the fields
36805 \begin_inset Flex Code
36808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36810 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
36818 (filled by JabRef) or
36819 \begin_inset Flex Code
36822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36824 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
36832 (filled by KBibTeX) containing an URL that points to a file on your local drive,
36833 the action will launch an appropriate file viewer.
36834 At the moment only absolute paths are accepted.
36837 \begin_layout Standard
36839 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
36840 In addition to that,
36843 \change_inserted 5863208 1676821714
36848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36850 \change_inserted 5863208 1676822207
36851 By default we provide python script
36852 \begin_inset Flex Code
36855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36857 \change_inserted 5863208 1676822064
36866 but you can use any modified script by setting
36867 \begin_inset Flex Code
36870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36872 \change_inserted 5863208 1676822135
36875 citation_search_view
36883 \change_deleted -712698321 1676971997
36885 \change_inserted -712698321 1676971998
36887 \change_inserted 5863208 1676822207
36889 \change_inserted -712698321 1676972080
36894 in your local configuration directory (please refer to the respective section at
36896 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
36900 \change_inserted 5863208 1676822207
36903 \change_inserted -712698321 1676972139
36904 The default setting is to be found in the file
36908 in the same directory and can be copied and modified for this purpose.
36916 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
36917 your disk for matching files if you enable
36919 Search drive for cited files
36923 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36924 Preferences\SpecialChar ldots
36925 \SpecialChar menuseparator
36926 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
36930 It uses the tokens supplied at
36934 in the same preferences section (by default:
36936 \change_inserted 5863208 1676968851
36941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36943 \change_inserted 5863208 1676969379
36945 \change_inserted -712698321 1676972365
36947 \change_deleted -712698321 1676972365
36949 \change_inserted 5863208 1676969379
36951 \begin_inset Flex Code
36954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36956 \change_inserted 5863208 1676968931
36957 %year% %abbrvciteauthor%
36966 \change_deleted -712698321 1676972344
36968 \change_inserted -712698321 1676972349
36970 \change_inserted 5863208 1676969379
36972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36989 \change_inserted -712698321 1676972338
36992 \change_inserted 5863208 1676969379
36993 are automatically stripped from the result.
36994 \change_deleted -712698321 1676972332
36996 \change_inserted 5863208 1676969379
37005 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
37007 Any of the tokens in the pattern must occur in the
37008 \change_deleted 630872221 1621608311
37010 \change_inserted 630872221 1621608312
37012 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
37013 of the file (at arbitrary position).
37015 opens the first matching file it finds.
37016 This might or might not be the file you are looking for;
37017 the more systematic your file naming is,
37018 and the less ambiguous keywords you use,
37019 the greater the chance this works for you.
37024 \begin_layout Standard
37026 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
37027 The pattern syntax uses specific keywords.
37028 These are basically Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37030 \begin_inset Flex Code
37033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37035 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
37044 \begin_inset Flex Code
37047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37049 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509565
37058 but there are also special keys,
37059 which are documented in the
37061 Customization manual
37067 Cite format description
37074 \begin_layout Section
37076 \begin_inset Index idx
37081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37088 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37097 \begin_layout Standard
37098 An index entry is created if you use the menu
37100 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37102 \begin_inset space ~
37107 or the toolbar button
37114 \change_inserted -712698321 1667668430
37116 \begin_inset space ~
37120 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37122 reference "subsec:Convenience-Functions-Index"
37127 for some advanced methods)
37131 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37135 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110543
37137 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37141 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37146 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110903
37148 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37150 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110872
37153 the text that appears in the index
37154 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37155 (if you read this in \SpecialChar LyX
37158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37165 index inset in the heading above for example)
37168 The word where the cursor is in
37169 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37173 or the currently highlighted text
37174 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37178 is proposed by \SpecialChar LyX
37180 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110629
37184 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37186 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37190 copied into the inset)
37195 \begin_layout Standard
37197 \change_inserted -712698321 1667110737
37198 (which prints out the index in your document)
37201 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110760
37202 in the document with
37203 \change_inserted -712698321 1667110759
37208 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37209 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
37211 \begin_inset space ~
37217 A light blue box labeled
37218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37229 will show the place where the index
37230 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110783
37232 \change_inserted -712698321 1667110784
37236 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110788
37241 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111027
37244 \change_deleted -712698321 1667111030
37246 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111030
37249 he index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
37251 \change_deleted -712698321 1667111053
37253 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111233
37255 as there are no settings to make.
37256 This changes if you select
37257 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37260 Use multiple indexes
37261 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37265 \begin_inset space ~
37269 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37271 reference "subsec:Multiple-Indexes"
37281 the box turns gray and can be clicked (as there are now settings that can be made).
37282 \change_deleted -712698321 1667111066
37288 \begin_layout Standard
37290 \change_inserted -712698321 1667193296
37292 an index entry is simply a word or phrase in the (alphabetically ordered) index list with a reference to the page or pages where the index entry has been inserted in the document.
37294 you can customize index entries to look different.
37295 You can group index entries hierarchically,
37296 let the index list refer to a range of pages rather than a single page,
37297 let it refer to another entry in the index list rather than,
37298 or additionally to,
37300 you can format the page reference (e.
37301 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37305 make it bold for specific pages),
37306 and you can determine the order of an entry in the list.
37307 These features are available in \SpecialChar LyX
37309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37318 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37321 that appears if the cursor is in an index entry or via the index settings dialog which can be opened via right mouse click on the index inset.
37326 \begin_layout Standard
37328 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112045
37329 give a short overview of
37330 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112047
37334 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112014
37335 these features in turn
37336 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112017
37339 in the next subsections.
37340 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
37341 's index mechanism,
37342 have a look at one of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37344 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37346 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
37354 \begin_layout Subsection
37356 \change_inserted -712698321 1667115499
37357 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37359 name "subsec:Grouping-Index-Entries"
37365 Grouping Index Entries
37366 \begin_inset Index idx
37371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37373 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37390 \begin_layout Standard
37391 Index entries are often
37392 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112078
37395 grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the index
37396 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112212
37397 and to hold categories together (e.g.,
37403 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37410 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37420 \change_inserted -712698321 1667194528
37421 This can be done in \SpecialChar LyX
37424 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37425 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
37435 Both methods insert a subinset in which you can enter the subentry.
37436 Maximally two such subentry insets,
37438 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37442 three levels of grouping in total,
37443 are allowed per index entry.
37444 Note that it does not matter where you insert these subentry insets in the index inset,
37445 but the order of them matters and determines the grouping hierarchy.
37446 In the \SpecialChar LyX
37448 the index entry in the header above shows an example for a two-level grouped entry (and you can see the result in the index of this document at the entry
37453 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37462 \begin_layout Standard
37464 \change_inserted -712698321 1667195700
37466 each subentry is on a new line and indented a bit more.
37467 Note that the higher levels only get their own page references if they have also a separate entry (without subentry)
37468 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
37469 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated lists under the entry
37470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37478 First we create the entry
37479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37487 \begin_inset space ~
37491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37493 reference "subsec:Lists"
37499 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
37500 \begin_inset space ~
37504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37506 reference "sec:Itemize"
37512 we insert the command
37515 \begin_layout Standard
37517 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
37523 \begin_layout Standard
37525 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
37529 \begin_layout Standard
37531 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
37537 \begin_layout Standard
37539 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
37540 for the enumerated list in section
37541 \begin_inset space ~
37545 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37547 reference "sec:Enumerate"
37557 \begin_layout Standard
37559 \change_inserted -712698321 1667195765
37560 Note also that in \SpecialChar LaTeX
37562 subentries are indicated by a preceding
37563 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112752
37567 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112757
37571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37579 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112802
37581 This also works in \SpecialChar LyX
37583 although you have to take care that the character is not
37586 \change_inserted -712698321 1667122587
37589 a real exclamation mark has to be inserted to an index entry in a specific way.
37591 \begin_inset space ~
37595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37597 reference "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
37603 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112764
37604 marks the grouping levels.
37608 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112659
37609 You can have three levels;
37610 every index level is indented a bit more.
37611 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
37612 If we don't have an index entry for
37613 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37617 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37621 it will be printed anyway,
37622 but without a page number.
37627 \begin_layout Subsection
37629 \begin_inset Index idx
37634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37636 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37653 \begin_layout Standard
37655 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112869
37657 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112870
37661 \change_inserted -712698321 1667113289
37662 refers to single pages where the index entries have been inserted
37663 \change_deleted -712698321 1667113293
37664 will appear with the page number of the indexed section
37668 \change_deleted -712698321 1667113300
37670 \change_inserted -712698321 1667113300
37674 \change_deleted -712698321 1667113313
37675 index more pages under the same entry
37676 \change_inserted -712698321 1667114974
37677 refer to a page range instead,
37678 you can do this by inserting two index entries:
37679 one that marks the beginning of the range,
37680 the other that marks its end
37684 \change_inserted -712698321 1667195873
37685 Both need to contain the same index entry (and possibly subentries) text.
37686 To mark start and end,
37687 select the respective
37691 option in the index inset settings dialog.
37692 Range starts and ends are indicated in the index inset label via
37693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37711 \begin_layout Standard
37713 \change_inserted -712698321 1667126475
37714 Note that you have to take care that range markers are complete.
37715 If a range start without a respective end (or vice versa) is found,
37716 the index processor might terminate and not produce an index without informing you about the reason.
37719 \begin_layout Standard
37721 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
37723 if we want to index the paragraph environments,
37724 we create an index entry in section
37725 \begin_inset space ~
37729 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37731 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
37739 \begin_layout Standard
37741 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
37744 Paragraph environments|(
37747 \begin_layout Standard
37749 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
37750 and another entry at the end of section
37751 \begin_inset space ~
37755 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37757 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
37765 \begin_layout Standard
37767 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
37770 Paragraph environments|)
37773 \begin_layout Standard
37775 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
37777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37785 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37800 respectively start and end the index range.
37801 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
37802 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of the pages of the indexed document parts.
37803 An example is the index entry
37804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37817 \begin_layout Subsection
37819 \begin_inset Index idx
37824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37826 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37843 \begin_layout Standard
37844 It is also possible to refer to another index entry
37845 \change_inserted -712698321 1667115277
37852 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116351
37853 This might be useful if you anticipate that your readers might look for an entry at different places,
37855 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37867 (which could be resolved by a cross reference
37868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37880 ) or also if you use hierarchical grouping (section
37881 \begin_inset space ~
37885 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37887 reference "subsec:Grouping-Index-Entries"
37894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37909 \begin_layout Standard
37911 \change_inserted -712698321 1667115626
37912 This is possible in \SpecialChar LyX
37915 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37916 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
37922 \begin_layout Standard
37924 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116218
37925 If you want a cross-reference and page references,
37928 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37929 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
37934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37938 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37941 instead and makes more sense if you also add entries that are referred to by page number as in
37942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37962 \begin_layout Standard
37964 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115542
37965 We referred for example in the index entry
37966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37974 \begin_inset space ~
37978 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37980 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
37985 ) to the index entry
37986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37993 in the same section using the entry
37996 \begin_layout Standard
37998 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115542
38001 GIF|see{Image formats}
38004 \begin_layout Standard
38006 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115542
38007 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
38009 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
38010 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
38015 \begin_layout Subsection
38017 \change_inserted -712698321 1667121174
38018 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38020 name "subsec:Index-Entry-Order"
38027 \begin_inset Index idx
38032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38034 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38051 \begin_layout Standard
38053 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116657
38054 Sometimes the automatic ordering of index entries is not the one you want.
38055 This might be the case with some index processors (such as
38060 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116658
38063 f you use accented characters in the index entry
38064 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116670
38065 the entries might not follow the rules for the index order
38066 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116709
38067 or if you use macros
38070 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127198
38074 \begin_layout Standard
38076 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116836
38077 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
38082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38083 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program,
38085 \begin_inset space ~
38089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38091 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
38101 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
38102 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
38103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38125 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38129 \begin_inset Index idx
38134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38136 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38151 \begin_inset Index idx
38156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38158 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38173 \begin_inset Index idx
38178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38185 They will be sorted in the order maïs,
38187 maison but we want the order maïs,
38194 \begin_layout Standard
38196 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
38199 previous entry@current entry
38202 \begin_layout Standard
38204 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
38205 In our case we want to have
38206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38210 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38221 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
38224 \begin_layout Standard
38226 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
38232 \begin_layout Standard
38234 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
38235 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
38236 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
38238 See the next subsection for an example.
38239 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116836
38243 \begin_layout Standard
38245 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127344
38246 To accommodate for that,
38249 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38250 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
38254 The sortkey you enter here is not output in the index,
38255 it is just used for sorting (instead of the actual entry).
38257 you can pass the sort key
38258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38269 should your index processor be incapable to sort Slovenian postmodern philosophers correctly.
38272 \begin_layout Standard
38274 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127399
38275 Note that in \SpecialChar LaTeX
38277 sortkeys are separated from the actual entry by the character
38278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38286 This also works in \SpecialChar LyX
38288 although you have to take care that the character is not formatted.
38290 a real @ character has to be inserted to an index entry in a specific way.
38292 \begin_inset space ~
38296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38298 reference "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
38308 \begin_layout Subsection
38310 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127427
38312 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127428
38316 \begin_inset Index idx
38321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38323 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38340 \begin_layout Standard
38342 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127459
38344 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127459
38347 he appearance of index entries
38348 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127470
38349 can be formatted as usual
38351 via the text style dialog
38352 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127566
38354 the toolbar or shortcuts.
38355 Entries will appear in the index list in the way they are formatted in the index entry
38358 \begin_inset Index idx
38363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38365 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38371 This is an italic dummy entry
38382 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127631
38383 Note that this also means that two differently formatted otherwise identical entries,
38385 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38398 will be listed separately.
38400 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127514
38402 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127638
38406 \begin_layout Standard
38408 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127611
38412 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127514
38414 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127611
38418 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127611
38424 option in the index entry settings dialog.
38426 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127514
38427 number using the character
38428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38435 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
38436 -command without a backslash.
38437 We can write for example
38438 \change_inserted -712698321 1667196148
38439 You can either select one of the proposed formatting options (
38459 you are supposed to enter a valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
38466 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38470 a self-defined command
38471 \begin_inset Flex Code
38474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38476 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118710
38484 or an existing macro such as
38485 \begin_inset Flex Code
38488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38490 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127771
38503 \begin_layout Standard
38505 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118734
38508 italic page number:|textit
38511 \begin_layout Standard
38513 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118734
38514 to get the page number in italic.
38515 \begin_inset Index idx
38520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38522 italic page number:|textit
38527 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
38528 -commands begin with a backslash,
38529 but in this special case
38530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38546 \begin_inset space ~
38552 Have a look at section
38553 \begin_inset space ~
38557 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38559 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
38564 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38570 \begin_layout Standard
38572 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118832
38573 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38582 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
38586 to generate the index,
38588 \begin_inset space ~
38592 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38594 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
38605 this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
38610 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used,
38612 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38615 key "latexcompanion"
38630 \begin_layout Standard
38632 we encourage you to
38633 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118871
38634 not format page numbers directly as shown above
38635 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118875
38636 use self-defined commands
38640 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127835
38641 This makes it easier to change the formatting,
38642 should you or your publisher decide to do that later.
38644 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118961
38646 you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
38647 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to
38648 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118968
38651 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118970
38655 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119029
38656 formatting macro for index entries that refer to the page(s) where the indexed term is defined
38657 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119044
38658 definition of the indexed term,
38659 so that users can easily find definitions.
38661 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119044
38665 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119047
38668 the following in the preamble
38671 \begin_layout Standard
38677 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119052
38679 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127880
38685 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127881
38693 \begin_layout Standard
38695 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119063
38697 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127914
38698 add the custom formatting
38699 \begin_inset Flex Code
38702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38704 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127914
38712 to the respective entry settings dialog.
38717 \begin_layout Standard
38719 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119123
38725 \begin_layout Standard
38727 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119123
38728 in the index entry.
38729 \begin_inset Index idx
38734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38741 The advantage is that,
38743 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127963
38744 This will cause all page references that use this custom format to be printed in italics.
38747 f you change your mind later or if your publisher insists that definitions must not be italic but bold,
38748 you just need to change the macro in the preamble,
38749 not every single index entry.
38750 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118842
38754 \begin_layout Standard
38756 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118842
38757 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38762 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119415
38768 If you use the index processor
38774 makeindex or xindex
38777 \begin_inset space ~
38781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38783 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
38789 such custom macros do not work out of the box.
38794 requires you to define semantic elements in the xindy
38795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38802 (style file) you use before they can be used.
38804 this would require to add the following line in the module file:
38807 \begin_layout Verbatim
38809 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119381
38811 (markup-locref :open "
38813 IndexDef{" :close "}" :attr "IndexDef")
38816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38818 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119392
38820 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38823 key "latexcompanion"
38838 \begin_layout Standard
38839 You can also change the layout
38840 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128294
38842 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128294
38848 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128049
38850 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128050
38854 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128052
38858 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128093
38862 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128098
38865 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128100
38868 get a bold font for all index entries.
38870 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128129
38873 it is better (and required for
38874 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128131
38877 more advanced tasks
38878 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128135
38882 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128139
38885 to set up a so-called
38888 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128153
38912 ) to determine the formatting;
38913 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119655
38918 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119672
38920 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119674
38926 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119661
38933 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119662
38941 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119665
38949 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119667
38954 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119778
38956 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38958 key "makeindex,xindex,xindy"
38964 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119778
38966 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38968 key "makeindex,xindy"
38977 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128459
38978 There are also some \SpecialChar LaTeX
38979 packages available that ease such formatting,
38981 \begin_inset Flex URL
38984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38986 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128460
38988 https://ctan.org/topic/index
38998 \begin_layout Subsection
39000 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119819
39001 Special Characters in Index Entries
39002 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39004 name "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
39011 \begin_layout Standard
39013 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128522
39014 As already mentioned above,
39015 some characters have a special meaning in index entries,
39018 \begin_inset Flex Code
39021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39023 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120139
39033 \begin_inset Flex Code
39036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39038 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120150
39048 \begin_inset Flex Code
39051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39053 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120158
39054 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39066 \begin_inset Flex Code
39069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39071 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120173
39080 If you use them literally,
39081 you might get surprising results or even a non-working index.
39083 you will not get the character itself.
39086 \begin_layout Standard
39088 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120574
39089 In order to use these characters in inset entries,
39091 \begin_inset Quotes els
39095 \begin_inset Quotes ers
39099 that is prepended by a character that tells the index processor to treat this character without its special meaning.
39101 the escape character is
39102 \begin_inset Flex Code
39105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39107 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120286
39108 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39118 (but this can be changed).
39120 \begin_inset Flex Code
39123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39125 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120326
39126 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39138 \begin_inset Flex Code
39141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39143 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120329
39144 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39156 \begin_inset Flex Code
39159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39161 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120332
39162 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39166 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
39178 \begin_inset Flex Code
39181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39183 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120335
39184 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39194 to get the special character you want.
39195 Note that the escape character,
39197 \begin_inset Flex Code
39200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39202 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120426
39203 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39218 be inserted in a TeX code box (see section
39219 \begin_inset space ~
39223 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39225 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
39235 \begin_layout Subsection
39237 \change_inserted -712698321 1667669398
39238 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39240 name "subsec:Convenience-Functions-Index"
39244 Convenience Functions for Index Handling
39247 \begin_layout Standard
39249 \change_inserted -712698321 1667669552
39250 Indexing a document can be a tedious task,
39251 since you often have to insert the same index entry multiple times in order to refer to passages at different pages.
39252 This is not only time-consuming,
39253 but also error-prone;
39255 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39259 you have to remember how exactly an inset entry has been inserted to avoid redundant entries.
39261 provides some functions to ease the task.
39264 \begin_layout Standard
39266 \change_inserted -712698321 1667669398
39268 if you want to add an entry which you already used before,
39269 you can open the outliner via
39271 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
39275 \begin_inset space ~
39279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39281 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
39291 section (it is convenient to have this open while indexing anyway),
39292 scroll to the entry in question (if you check
39297 it will be more easier),
39302 -click on the entry and select
39304 Insert Copy at Cursor Position
39306 from the context menu.
39307 This will do just what it says:
39308 it will insert a copy of that index inset at the position where the cursor is.
39311 \begin_layout Standard
39313 \change_inserted -712698321 1667669772
39316 also provides a semi-automated solution to index a word.
39317 If you right-click on an index entry inset,
39318 you can select from the context menu
39320 Index All Occurrences of this Word
39323 This will search the whole document (only single documents,
39324 not master and child documents) and insert a copy of this index inset after each occurrence of the word that precedes the inset.
39325 Note that casing of the word does not matter,
39326 but only full words in the same grammatical form are considered (so if
39330 is the word before the index entry,
39335 will be considered as well,
39341 Please take care to not overuse this function and to carefully check the result afterwards.
39343 a good index does not simply list all occurrences of a given word in a specific document (that is a concordance rather),
39344 but only relevant occurrences!
39345 So as convenient as this function might seem,
39346 it is suitable especially for particular cases.
39348 you will have more work with removing again falsely inserted entries than you would have with manually inserting them at the right place.
39351 \begin_layout Subsection
39353 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120869
39355 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120870
39359 \begin_inset Index idx
39364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39366 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
39369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39381 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39383 name "subsec:Index-Program"
39390 \begin_layout Standard
39392 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120909
39394 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120910
39401 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120657
39410 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120769
39418 for index generation;
39419 otherwise the program
39424 the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
39427 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120846
39432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39434 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120841
39440 no longer under development and has many pitfalls,
39441 notably that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
39442 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
39443 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
39445 if you are writing in another than the English language,
39460 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120851
39461 As a further option,
39462 you can select the rather new
39469 \begin_layout Itemize
39471 \change_inserted -712698321 1667121183
39477 no longer under development and has many pitfalls,
39478 notably that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
39479 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly (we have shown above,
39481 \begin_inset space ~
39485 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39487 reference "subsec:Index-Entry-Order"
39493 how to manually fix this sorting,
39494 but this is very tedious work).
39497 \begin_layout Itemize
39499 \change_inserted -712698321 1667121483
39500 The alternative program,
39506 is a newer and much more mighty alternative.
39507 It can sort most languages correctly,
39508 and it is also much more customizable in the output.
39514 is no longer actively maintained,
39515 and it has bugs that are most likely not being addressed anytime soon.
39521 is not always available out of the box and quite a challenge to install on some systems (particularly Windows).
39522 But if you have it available,
39523 it is almost always a better option than
39530 \begin_layout Itemize
39532 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128720
39539 is a quite new and actively developed index processor.
39540 It is included in modern \SpecialChar TeX
39541 distributions such as \SpecialChar TeX
39542 Live and Mik\SpecialChar TeX
39544 is pretty much customizable and supports many languages.
39545 The program is still in development,
39546 so not everything might work equally well than in the older processors.
39547 But the program is definitely worth a try,
39552 does not work or not satisfy your needs.
39557 \begin_layout Standard
39559 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120703
39561 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120703
39565 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128738
39567 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128739
39570 can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
39571 's preferences dialog,
39573 \begin_inset space ~
39577 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39579 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
39585 The available options are listed and explained in
39586 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128757
39588 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39590 key "makeindex-man,xindex,xindy"
39596 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128757
39598 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39600 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
39610 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120810
39612 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120810
39616 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120813
39618 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120828
39621 alternative program
39622 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120828
39625 to generate the index.
39628 \begin_layout Standard
39629 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a given document,
39630 you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
39633 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39634 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39638 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
39641 \begin_layout Subsection
39643 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111129
39644 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39646 name "subsec:Multiple-Indexes"
39655 \begin_layout Standard
39656 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
39658 you might need to set up a separate
39659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39666 next to the standard index.
39668 does not provide this possibility out of the box,
39669 but there are packages that add this feature.
39676 \begin_inset Index idx
39681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39684 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
39687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39698 package to generate multiple indexes.
39699 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
39704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39705 If yours does not ship it,
39706 consult the \SpecialChar TeX
39709 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39717 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
39719 but it also includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
39720 Please consult the package's manual for details.
39728 \begin_layout Standard
39729 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
39730 for the use of multiple indexes,
39733 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39734 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39737 and select the option
39739 Use multiple Indexes
39746 already contains the standard index
39747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39755 To add further indexes,
39756 add the name of the index (in the form that should also appear as a heading) to the
39760 input field and press the
39765 The new index now also appears in the list.
39767 you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
39768 label color to the new index.
39771 \begin_layout Standard
39772 Once the document changes have been applied,
39773 you can find the new index list in
39775 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39776 List/Contents/References
39782 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
39783 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index,
39784 but there are additional features:
39787 \begin_layout Itemize
39788 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry,
39789 right-clicking on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
39792 \begin_layout Itemize
39793 By right-clicking on an index,
39794 you can change its type.
39796 you can specify an index to be a
39802 the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
39804 if you use a book class,
39805 where the standard index heading is defined as a chapter,
39806 subindexes will be defined as sections and can thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
39809 \begin_layout Itemize
39814 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
39815 code in the name of the index.
39818 \begin_layout Section
39819 Nomenclature/Glossary
39820 \begin_inset Index idx
39825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39832 \begin_inset Index idx
39837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39839 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
39842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39854 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39856 name "sec:Nomenclature"
39863 \begin_layout Standard
39864 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so called nomenclature or glossary.
39867 \begin_layout Standard
39868 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries,
39869 you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39875 \begin_inset Index idx
39880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39883 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
39886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39898 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
39901 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39908 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39912 \begin_layout Standard
39913 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry and then use the menu
39915 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39921 \begin_inset space ~
39926 or the toolbar button
39929 arg "nomencl-insert"
39934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39945 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
39948 \begin_layout Standard
39949 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
39950 The first is the term or
39954 that you wish to define.
39959 of the term or symbol.
39962 \begin_layout Standard
39963 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39972 To use \SpecialChar TeX
39973 code for nomenclature entries the option
39977 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
39985 \begin_layout Subsection
39986 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
39987 \begin_inset Index idx
39992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39994 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
39997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40011 \begin_layout Standard
40012 If you have symbols in formulas,
40013 you have to define them in the
40017 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
40020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40024 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40033 \begin_inset Newline newline
40041 \begin_inset Newline newline
40047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40054 character starts/ends the formula.
40055 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
40056 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with a backslash
40057 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40067 For capital Greek letters,
40068 start the command also with a capital letter,
40078 \begin_layout Standard
40079 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40080 syntax is given in section
40081 \begin_inset space ~
40085 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40087 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
40095 \begin_layout Standard
40099 \begin_inset space ~
40104 dialog to format the description text;
40105 you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
40107 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
40108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40112 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40119 in this document is:
40120 \begin_inset Newline newline
40125 dummy entry for the character
40130 \begin_inset Newline newline
40142 \begin_inset space ~
40152 font use the command
40183 \begin_layout Standard
40184 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
40185 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40189 \begin_inset space \space{}
40193 \begin_inset Newline newline
40209 \begin_inset Newline newline
40212 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
40213 This command will make the font of all symbols
40220 \begin_inset space ~
40228 \begin_layout Standard
40229 If the characters |
40230 \begin_inset space \space{}
40234 \begin_inset space \space{}
40238 \begin_inset space \space{}
40243 \begin_inset space \space{}
40247 \begin_inset space \space{}
40250 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
40251 code they need to be escaped by adding a
40252 \change_deleted -712698321 1610611122
40254 \change_inserted -712698321 1610611123
40257 character in front of them.
40258 \change_inserted -712698321 1610611807
40260 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
40261 LatexCommand nomenclature
40262 symbol "%@, %|, %!, %\""
40263 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' %\"{}%\"{} '."
40269 \change_deleted -712698321 1610611114
40271 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
40272 LatexCommand nomenclature
40273 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
40274 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
40284 \begin_layout Subsection
40285 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
40286 \begin_inset Index idx
40291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40293 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40310 \begin_layout Standard
40311 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40312 -code of the symbol definition.
40313 This leads to undesired results when you,
40315 have symbols in formulas.
40316 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
40319 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
40320 LatexCommand nomenclature
40322 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
40330 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40334 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
40335 LatexCommand nomenclature
40338 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
40344 They will be sorted by
40345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40371 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40374 will be sorted before the
40378 since the character
40379 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40386 is considered in sorting.
40389 \begin_layout Standard
40390 To control the sort order,
40394 \begin_inset space ~
40399 field of the nomenclature dialog.
40400 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol definition.
40401 For the example given,
40406 in this field for the
40407 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40415 will be located before
40416 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40422 \begin_layout Standard
40423 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
40429 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40439 \begin_layout Subsection
40440 Nomenclature Options
40441 \begin_inset Index idx
40446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40448 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40463 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40465 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
40472 \begin_layout Standard
40477 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
40478 Here are some of its options;
40479 for more have a look at its documentation:
40482 \begin_layout Description
40483 refeq Appends the phrase
40484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40500 to every nomenclature entry,
40507 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
40510 \begin_layout Description
40511 refpage Appends the phrase
40512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40528 to every nomenclature entry,
40535 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
40538 \begin_layout Description
40539 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
40542 \begin_layout Standard
40543 To use one or more of the options,
40544 add them to the comma-separated document class options list in the
40546 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40550 In this document the options
40558 \begin_layout Standard
40559 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
40565 \begin_layout Standard
40566 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
40570 field in the nomenclature dialog:
40573 \begin_layout Description
40583 \begin_layout Description
40586 nomrefpage Like the
40593 \begin_layout Description
40596 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
40605 \begin_layout Description
40609 \begin_inset space ~
40615 \begin_inset space ~
40620 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
40623 \begin_layout Standard
40625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40632 are automatically translated for most document languages.
40634 add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
40638 \begin_layout Standard
40647 \begin_inset Newline newline
40653 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
40656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40657 \begin_inset space ~
40673 \begin_inset Newline newline
40680 pagedeclaration}[1]{
40681 \begin_inset Newline newline
40687 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
40690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40691 \begin_inset space ~
40709 \begin_layout Standard
40710 If the numbers should be hyperlinks,
40711 assure that you use
40714 \begin_inset space ~
40719 in the document settings under
40722 \begin_inset space ~
40730 \begin_layout Standard
40738 \begin_inset Newline newline
40742 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
40745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40746 \begin_inset space ~
40759 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
40761 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
40762 \begin_inset Newline newline
40769 pagedeclaration}[1]{
40770 \begin_inset Newline newline
40774 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
40777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40778 \begin_inset space ~
40791 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
40796 \begin_layout Subsection
40797 Printing the Nomenclature
40798 \begin_inset Index idx
40803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40805 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40822 \begin_layout Standard
40823 To print the nomenclature,
40826 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40827 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
40832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40843 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
40844 By right-clicking on it,
40845 the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
40846 You can choose between these settings:
40849 \begin_layout Description
40850 Default a space of 1
40851 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40857 \begin_layout Description
40859 \begin_inset space ~
40863 \begin_inset space ~
40866 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
40869 \begin_layout Description
40870 Custom custom space
40873 \begin_layout Standard
40874 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
40875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40883 If you are not happy with the name,
40884 you can change it by redefining the command
40892 in order to change the name to
40897 add the following line to the preamble:
40900 \begin_layout Standard
40913 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
40916 \begin_layout Standard
40917 When you are using another document language than English,
40919 \begin_inset Newline newline
40935 where *** is the name of the language used.
40938 \begin_layout Subsection
40939 Nomenclature Program
40940 \begin_inset Index idx
40945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40947 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40962 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40964 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
40971 \begin_layout Standard
40978 that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
40980 to generate the nomenclature.
40982 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
40988 \begin_inset space ~
40992 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40994 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
41000 The available options are listed and explained in
41001 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
41003 key "nomencl,makeindex"
41011 \begin_layout Section
41013 \begin_inset Index idx
41018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41025 \begin_inset Index idx
41030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41032 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
41035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41047 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41049 name "sec:Branches"
41056 \begin_layout Standard
41057 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
41058 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the pupils to see the answers,
41059 but having questions and answers in the same document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
41062 \begin_layout Standard
41063 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
41064 allows you to put text into branches.
41065 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
41066 To create a branch,
41067 either select the menu
41069 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41070 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
41073 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
41075 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41083 where you can specify and change the name of the branch,
41084 its activation state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
41085 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
41086 and whether the name of the branch should be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active (see below for an example).
41088 the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch to the name of the other) and to add
41089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41097 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41101 \begin_inset space ~
41104 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents,
41105 without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
41108 \begin_layout Standard
41109 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
41110 These boxes are inserted via the menu
41112 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41115 where you can choose a branch.
41116 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking on them.
41119 \begin_layout Standard
41120 Here is an example,
41121 where only the question text appears,
41122 the answer branch is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
41125 \begin_layout Standard
41126 \begin_inset Branch Question
41130 \begin_layout Standard
41136 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
41144 \begin_layout Standard
41145 \begin_inset Branch Answer
41149 \begin_layout Standard
41155 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
41163 \begin_layout Standard
41170 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41171 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41175 the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
41176 Consider for example a file
41177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41184 which has the above branches.
41186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41194 the PDF export file would be called
41195 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41199 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41218 branch were inactive,
41220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41257 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
41258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41261 if both branches were active.
41262 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
41263 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41269 \begin_layout Standard
41271 \change_inserted 5863208 1650147989
41272 It is also possible to
41273 \change_deleted 5863208 1650147965
41277 \change_deleted 5863208 1650147967
41279 \change_inserted 5863208 1650147977
41283 whose content is output just in case the branch is
41288 \change_inserted 244031559 1635284375
41289 (they are marked with ~ before the name)
41293 \change_deleted 244031559 1635284383
41295 \change_inserted 244031559 1635284385
41298 make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
41299 To control whether a particular inset is inverted,
41300 right-click on the inset button and choose
41303 \begin_inset space ~
41311 \begin_layout Standard
41312 \begin_inset Branch Answer
41316 \begin_layout Standard
41323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41330 branch is deactivated.
41336 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41342 \begin_layout Standard
41343 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
41344 like inside equations,
41345 you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
41346 definitions for each branch.
41347 For example you can define for the question branch
41351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41352 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41355 \begin_inset space ~
41359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41361 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
41374 \begin_layout Standard
41384 \begin_layout Standard
41394 \begin_layout Standard
41395 and for the answer branch
41398 \begin_layout Standard
41408 \begin_layout Standard
41418 \begin_layout Standard
41419 \begin_inset Branch Question
41423 \begin_layout Standard
41427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41455 \begin_layout Standard
41456 \begin_inset Branch Answer
41460 \begin_layout Standard
41464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41492 \begin_layout Standard
41493 Now it is possible to use the
41497 question{\SpecialChar ldots
41504 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
41507 commands to obtain conditional output.
41508 Here is an example formula where only the
41515 \begin_inset Formula
41517 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
41525 \begin_layout Standard
41527 the same effect can be achieved using math macros,
41535 \begin_layout Standard
41536 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout files (e.
41537 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41541 \begin_inset space \space{}
41544 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
41546 For this advanced usage,
41554 Flex insets and InsetLayout
41557 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148012
41561 \begin_layout Standard
41563 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41565 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813809
41567 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813809
41569 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41571 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813823
41573 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813823
41575 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41577 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813812
41579 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41581 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813845
41582 to keep all branches of a given name in
41583 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41585 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813847
41587 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41589 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813855
41591 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813873
41592 activation branch status with
41593 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41595 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813886
41598 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813893
41599 of all branch insets in the document we provide
41600 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813893
41603 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41607 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813903
41612 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813949
41613 that sets the open/close state to all branches of the same name from the branch currently at cursor.
41614 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813904
41617 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41619 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813911
41621 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813959
41623 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41625 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813962
41627 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41628 keyboard shortcut or add
41629 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813966
41631 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813966
41633 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41635 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813971
41637 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41638 user-defined context menu
41639 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813975
41641 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813976
41643 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41645 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813978
41647 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41653 \begin_layout Section
41655 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41657 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
41662 \begin_inset Index idx
41667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41676 \begin_layout Standard
41678 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655914
41683 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41684 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41688 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655917
41691 allows you to set up
41692 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651900
41694 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651929
41698 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651937
41700 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651944
41704 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655939
41708 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651948
41713 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651614
41715 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651616
41719 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651959
41721 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651961
41724 are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41726 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651813
41728 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651814
41736 \begin_inset Index idx
41741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41744 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
41747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41759 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653717
41760 which you need to enable by clicking
41762 Use Hyperref Support
41764 in order to set the PDF properties (if the package is already loaded by your document class or another package,
41765 the checkbox you need to click is labeled
41767 Customize Hyperref Options
41770 Among other things,
41772 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651887
41776 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653821
41778 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653851
41782 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653826
41786 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653859
41789 cross-references in the
41790 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653786
41794 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653751
41796 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653751
41800 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
41801 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653878
41805 table of contents entry or on a reference to
41806 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653918
41807 open a website or to
41809 move to the cross-referenced part of the document.
41811 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653971
41813 you can set PDF metadata (such as document author and title),
41814 or determine how the PDF is being opened by the reader program.
41819 \begin_layout Standard
41820 The header information in the dialog tab
41824 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
41825 Many programs are able to extract this information,
41828 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656745
41831 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
41832 This is very useful to sort,
41833 classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
41837 \begin_inset space ~
41841 \begin_inset space ~
41848 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654039
41851 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654041
41854 tries to extract the header information from your document title and author entries.
41858 \begin_inset space ~
41862 \begin_inset space ~
41866 \begin_inset space ~
41871 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode,
41872 which is useful for presentations.
41875 \begin_layout Standard
41877 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654066
41879 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654066
41887 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654103
41888 you can customize the
41889 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654105
41891 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654109
41895 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654087
41897 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654087
41901 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654147
41903 and you can specify
41906 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654275
41908 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654283
41909 will look and if links for
41911 bibliographical backreferences are created
41912 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654335
41918 are links inserted at the end of bibliographic entries pointing to either sections,
41919 pages or slides on which these entries are being cited
41925 \begin_inset space ~
41929 \begin_inset space ~
41933 \begin_inset space ~
41938 option allows long links to be split;
41942 \begin_inset space ~
41946 \begin_inset space ~
41950 \begin_inset space ~
41958 \begin_inset space ~
41963 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
41967 \begin_inset space ~
41972 colors the different links.
41973 The default colors are:
41976 \begin_layout Labeling
41977 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
41982 for hyperlinks and URLs
41985 \begin_layout Labeling
41986 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
41994 \begin_layout Labeling
41995 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
42003 \begin_layout Standard
42004 but you can change these in the
42005 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651692
42007 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651692
42013 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656056
42015 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656056
42022 in this document they were changed with the
42023 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651709
42027 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651730
42037 \begin_layout Quote
42046 \begin_layout Standard
42048 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654422
42054 the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different entries,
42056 depending on the option selected,
42057 the number of the section,
42058 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
42063 \begin_layout Standard
42068 you can specify if PDF
42069 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654456
42071 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654456
42075 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654511
42076 (shown as a collapsible outline in the PDF reader)
42078 should be created for every section of your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
42079 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections or not.
42081 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654607
42083 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654609
42087 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654594
42093 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654550
42095 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654551
42097 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654802
42100 you can instruct the PDF reader to uncollapse the outliner when opening the PDF.
42108 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654838
42109 determines up to which level this uncollapsing is done.
42110 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654687
42111 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks when opening the PDF.
42115 \begin_inset space ~
42118 2 will display all sections and subsections,
42120 \begin_inset space ~
42123 1 will only display the sections
42124 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654724
42125 (collapsing the rest)
42128 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656154
42132 \begin_layout Standard
42134 \change_inserted -712698321 1644657105
42139 dialog tab you can insert hyperref options which are not among the ones described above as a comma-separated list (please refer to the hyperref manual
42140 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
42147 for a full list and documentation of possible options).
42148 Note that these options will be passed to hyperref via
42149 \begin_inset Flex Code
42152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42154 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656321
42165 not via the package options.
42166 This will exclude some options that can only be specified via the latter.
42167 If you need to use one of those options,
42168 you can set them by adding
42171 \begin_layout Quote
42173 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656496
42176 PackageOptions hyperref option1,option
42177 \change_deleted 274215730 1652836969
42179 \change_inserted 274215730 1652836970
42185 \begin_layout Standard
42187 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656431
42190 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42191 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42194 (but only if hyperref is not loaded by your document class).
42199 \begin_layout Standard
42201 \change_inserted -712698321 1644744249
42206 input widget allows you to insert PDF properties that are independent of the hyperref package and rely on some (rather new) \SpecialChar LaTeX
42208 This requires \SpecialChar LaTeX
42209 version 06/2022 at least (with earlier versions,
42210 input is simply ignored).
42211 The widget expects a comma-separated list of key-value options (such as
42217 At the point of writing this,
42218 the list of options is still rather small and not very well documented (look for a file called
42220 documentmetadata-support.pdf
42223 but it is expected that in the future,
42224 rather fundamental PDF properties (such as structure tagging for accessibility reasons and different PDF standards such as PDF/A) can be set this way.
42227 \begin_layout Standard
42229 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656978
42230 PDF properties are also used in this document.
42231 When you look in its document settings,
42232 you can see that some additional
42237 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
42238 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
42250 \begin_layout Section
42252 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42254 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42256 name "sec:TeX-Code"
42263 \begin_layout Subsection
42266 \begin_inset Index idx
42271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42279 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42281 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
42288 \begin_layout Standard
42289 As \SpecialChar LyX
42290 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
42292 it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
42293 commands and constructs,
42296 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
42297 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
42298 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
42299 -package for every problem,
42300 though \SpecialChar LyX
42301 cannot support all packages and their commands.
42304 \begin_layout Standard
42306 you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
42307 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
42308 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
42311 Code box is created by the menu
42313 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42315 \begin_inset space ~
42320 or by the toolbar button
42333 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on it and selecting
42340 \begin_layout Standard
42341 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
42343 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
42346 if you want to draw a frame around a word
42350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42351 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
42356 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42364 you can write the command part
42370 in a \SpecialChar TeX
42371 Code box before the word and the closing brace
42375 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
42376 Code box behind the word.
42377 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
42378 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the following example:
42381 \begin_layout Standard
42382 \begin_inset Graphics
42383 filename clipart/ERT.png
42391 \begin_layout Standard
42395 \begin_layout Standard
42396 This is a line with a
42400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42423 \begin_layout Standard
42424 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42433 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
42434 -commands without parameters,
42435 you have to insert a space to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
42436 know that the command is finished.
42444 \begin_layout Subsection
42445 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42447 \begin_inset Argument 1
42450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42451 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
42458 \begin_inset Index idx
42463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42471 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42473 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
42480 \begin_layout Standard
42481 When you write larger documents or books,
42482 you will need to know something about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42483 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
42484 uses in the background.
42485 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
42486 is based on commands,
42488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42496 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at any time if you know the right commands.
42498 imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline is the end of the day.
42499 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have all caption labels bold.
42500 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels in your manual.
42501 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one day.
42504 \begin_layout Standard
42505 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
42507 As mentioned above,
42508 for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
42510 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42513 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
42523 \begin_layout Standard
42524 As result you find that the package
42529 \begin_inset Index idx
42534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42537 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
42540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42553 you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
42555 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42558 \SpecialChar menuseparator
42562 \begin_inset space ~
42570 \begin_layout Standard
42575 usepackage[options]{package name}
42578 \begin_layout Standard
42579 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
42580 commands begin with a backslash,
42581 the command argument is set within two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
42582 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
42585 \begin_layout Standard
42586 In your case the package name is
42591 After a look in the documentation of the package,
42592 you know that the option
42596 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
42597 So you add the command
42600 \begin_layout Standard
42605 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
42608 \begin_layout Standard
42609 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
42613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42614 For more commands provided by the
42619 have a look at its documentation,
42621 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
42636 \begin_layout Standard
42637 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems like your case.
42638 For example if you use a
42643 you don't need the package
42648 you can instead write
42651 \begin_layout Standard
42656 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
42661 \begin_layout Standard
42662 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
42663 So if you plan to write a large document,
42664 you should have a look at the documentation of the document class you want to use.
42671 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
42674 \begin_layout Standard
42675 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document,
42676 while commands in the text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command argument.
42677 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
42679 use the \SpecialChar TeX
42680 Code box as described in the previous section.
42683 \begin_layout Standard
42684 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
42686 have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42688 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
42690 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
42698 \begin_layout Standard
42699 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
42705 \begin_layout Standard
42709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42719 \begin_inset Note Note
42722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42723 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
42731 \begin_layout Left Header
42732 \begin_inset Argument 1
42735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42755 \begin_inset Note Note
42758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42759 defines the header line as described below
42767 \begin_layout Center Header
42768 \begin_inset Argument 1
42771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42780 \begin_layout Right Header
42781 \begin_inset Argument 1
42784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42805 \begin_layout Left Footer
42806 \begin_inset Argument 1
42809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42830 \begin_layout Center Footer
42831 \begin_inset Argument 1
42834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42846 \begin_inset Newline newline
42850 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
42856 \begin_layout Right Footer
42857 \begin_inset Argument 1
42860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42882 \begin_layout Section
42883 Customized Page Headers and Footers
42884 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42886 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
42891 \begin_inset Index idx
42896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42898 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
42901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42913 \begin_inset Index idx
42918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42927 \begin_layout Standard
42928 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document,
42929 you need to set the
42932 \begin_inset space ~
42943 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42949 \begin_inset space ~
42955 As a second step add in the menu
42957 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42958 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42967 Custom Header/Footerlines
42970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42974 This module offers the following 6
42975 \begin_inset space ~
42981 \begin_layout Description
42983 \begin_inset space ~
42987 \begin_inset space ~
42991 \begin_inset space ~
42995 \begin_inset space ~
42999 \begin_inset space ~
43005 \begin_layout Description
43007 \begin_inset space ~
43011 \begin_inset space ~
43015 \begin_inset space ~
43019 \begin_inset space ~
43023 \begin_inset space ~
43029 \begin_layout Standard
43030 for the different positions in the header/footer.
43031 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
43034 \begin_layout Standard
43036 headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
43037 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
43039 \begin_inset space ~
43043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43045 reference "fig:Page-layout"
43050 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
43053 \begin_layout Standard
43054 \begin_inset Float figure
43061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43064 \begin_inset Tabular
43065 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
43066 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
43067 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
43068 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
43069 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
43071 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
43083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43089 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43100 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43118 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43129 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
43132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43133 The normal text on the page goes here.
43134 The running header is above the text,
43135 and the footer is below (including footnotes).
43136 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number,
43137 title of the chapter,
43138 company logo but you can use almost anything,
43144 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43153 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43164 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43182 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43193 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
43205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43211 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43229 \begin_inset Caption Standard
43231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43232 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43234 name "fig:Page-layout"
43238 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
43251 \begin_layout Standard
43252 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43261 some document classes implement their own customized page headers and footers if
43264 \begin_inset space ~
43269 is set to “Default”.
43270 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers and footers.
43278 \begin_layout Subsection
43282 \begin_layout Standard
43283 To define your header line,
43284 add all three header environments.
43285 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages,
43286 the things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
43287 For single-sided documents,
43288 the optional arguments will not be used and can be omitted.
43289 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty,
43290 nothing appears in the output.
43291 Defining the footer line works similarly.
43294 \begin_layout Standard
43295 For the definition,
43296 you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
43297 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
43300 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43302 \begin_inset space ~
43310 \begin_layout Description
43313 thepage prints the current page number
43316 \begin_layout Description
43319 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
43322 \begin_layout Description
43325 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
43328 \begin_layout Description
43331 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
43332 If the document has chapters,
43333 it prints the current chapter number and title instead.
43335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43339 \begin_inset Quotes prd
43342 because it usually goes in a left header.
43345 \begin_layout Description
43348 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
43349 If the document has chapters,
43350 it prints the current section number and title instead.
43351 It is normally used in the right header.
43354 \begin_layout Subsection
43355 Default header/footer
43358 \begin_layout Standard
43359 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
43360 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center footer has the page number.
43361 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer,
43362 include the relevant header/footer style in your document,
43363 but leave it blank.
43365 if you do not want a page number in the footer,
43369 \begin_inset space ~
43377 \begin_layout Subsection
43381 \begin_layout Standard
43382 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
43383 Some pages are different.
43384 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own,
43385 and so does any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
43386 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers,
43387 but that is normal.
43388 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
43391 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43392 Header and footer decoration line
43395 \begin_layout Standard
43398 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43401 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
43402 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
43414 in the following way:
43417 \begin_layout Standard
43424 headrulewidth}{thickness}
43427 \begin_layout Standard
43428 where thickness is a size in standard units like
43441 If you don't want a line,
43442 set the thickness to 0
43443 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43449 \begin_layout Standard
43450 The lines can also be colored,
43451 but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
43453 If you really need this,
43454 have a look at the Internet or in section
43455 \begin_inset space ~
43459 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
43469 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43470 Several header/footer lines
43473 \begin_layout Standard
43474 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer,
43475 you can do this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
43477 the default height of the header/footer is only the height of one text line.
43478 To expand the height,
43479 redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43494 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43495 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43497 \begin_inset space ~
43505 \begin_layout Standard
43512 headheight}{height}
43515 \begin_layout Standard
43520 is a size in standard units (e.
43521 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43525 \begin_inset space \space{}
43533 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height,
43534 define your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
43535 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43536 logfile with the menu
43538 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43540 \begin_inset space ~
43548 \begin_inset space ~
43553 to see if you can find a warning about the package
43558 \begin_inset Index idx
43563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43566 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
43569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43581 If there is such a warning,
43582 it contains the space that you need at least for your header/footer.
43585 \begin_layout Subsection
43589 \begin_layout Standard
43590 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
43591 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
43592 This example consists of the following definition:
43595 \begin_layout Description
43597 \begin_inset space ~
43607 empty optional argument
43610 \begin_layout Description
43612 \begin_inset space ~
43616 empty optional argument
43619 \begin_layout Description
43621 \begin_inset space ~
43631 in the optional argument
43634 \begin_layout Description
43636 \begin_inset space ~
43646 in the optional argument
43649 \begin_layout Description
43651 \begin_inset space ~
43665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43669 \begin_inset Newline newline
43673 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
43677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43680 in the optional argument
43683 \begin_layout Description
43685 \begin_inset space ~
43695 empty optional argument
43698 \begin_layout Description
43701 headrulewidth set to 2
43702 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43708 \begin_layout Standard
43709 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers,
43711 For more specialized features,
43714 see the manual of the
43720 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
43730 \begin_layout Standard
43731 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
43737 \begin_layout Standard
43741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43745 pagestyle{headings}
43751 \begin_inset Note Note
43754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43755 switches back to page style with the default headings
43763 \begin_layout Section
43764 Previewing Snippets of your Document
43765 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43767 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43772 \begin_inset Index idx
43777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43784 \begin_inset Index idx
43789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43791 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
43794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43808 \begin_layout Standard
43810 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
43813 \begin_layout Subsection
43817 \begin_layout Standard
43818 To get previews working,
43819 you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43825 \begin_inset Index idx
43830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43833 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
43836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43847 (on some systems named simply
43852 If it is not already installed,
43853 you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
43856 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
43863 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43865 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
43874 for \SpecialChar LyX
43875 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43876 -package are automatically installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
43880 \begin_layout Subsection
43884 \begin_layout Standard
43885 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
43886 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
43888 activate the option
43891 \begin_inset space ~
43898 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43904 \begin_inset space ~
43908 \begin_inset space ~
43911 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
43918 \begin_inset space ~
43931 \begin_inset space ~
43936 is the multiplication factor for the size.
43939 \begin_layout Standard
43940 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
43945 \begin_inset space ~
43953 \begin_inset space ~
43961 \begin_layout Standard
43962 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
43963 and when you finish editing an inset.
43966 \begin_layout Standard
43967 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43976 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately generated by activating the option
43979 \begin_inset space ~
43985 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
43993 \begin_layout Subsection
43994 Selected document parts
43997 \begin_layout Standard
43998 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
43999 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
44000 cannot render like rotated parts or things that are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
44003 insert a preview inset via the menu
44005 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44009 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
44010 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
44011 If you click on the preview,
44012 you can edit the previewed stuff.
44015 \begin_layout Standard
44017 To create rotated boxes,
44018 you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44025 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
44030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44037 is explained in section
44039 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
44044 \begin_inset space ~
44054 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
44055 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
44056 the final rotated boxes,
44057 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
44058 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated boxes into it.
44059 Here is the result:
44062 \begin_layout Standard
44063 \begin_inset Preview
44065 \begin_layout Standard
44070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44074 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
44080 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
44090 height_special "totalheight"
44095 backgroundcolor "none"
44098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44123 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
44129 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
44136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44151 \begin_layout Standard
44152 Previewing works also for colors.
44153 In this example a special framed,
44154 colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44172 is explained in section
44179 \begin_inset space ~
44192 \begin_layout Standard
44193 \begin_inset Preview
44195 \begin_layout Standard
44199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44218 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
44223 This is text within a colored,
44228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44243 \begin_layout Standard
44244 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
44250 \begin_layout Standard
44251 If \SpecialChar LyX
44252 does not show a preview,
44253 make sure that you enabled previews as described above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
44254 Code in the preview inset is valid and that you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44255 packages in your document preamble that are required by the \SpecialChar TeX
44257 If \SpecialChar LyX
44258 cannot create a preview,
44259 you will in most cases also not be able to view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
44261 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
44262 Code and don't know if it is correct,
44263 the preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
44266 \begin_layout Subsection
44271 \begin_layout Standard
44272 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44273 source of the whole document or parts of it.
44276 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
44278 \begin_inset space ~
44283 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44285 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor currently sits.
44286 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
44288 then only this selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
44289 To view the whole document as source,
44290 enable the corresponding option in the source view window.
44296 you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
44298 but note that if you have several documents open,
44299 this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
44301 not just the one which is open at the time.
44304 \begin_layout Section
44305 Advanced Find and Replace
44306 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44308 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
44313 \begin_inset Index idx
44318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44325 \begin_inset Index idx
44330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44339 \begin_layout Subsection
44343 \begin_layout Standard
44344 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
44345 allows for searching of complex,
44346 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
44348 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
44349 The key-features are:
44352 \begin_layout Itemize
44353 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed,
44354 where the latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way;
44355 not only entire mathematical formulas are found,
44356 but also parts occurring within more complex formulas
44359 \begin_layout Itemize
44360 Search may be format-insensitive,
44361 so that the searched text is found in any context/style (standard text,
44364 and even mathematics),
44365 or it may be format-sensitive,
44368 a word entered with a section heading will only be found within section headings
44371 \begin_layout Itemize
44372 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only;
44373 this is useful for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text outside of mathematics environments
44376 \begin_layout Itemize
44377 Search may be widened to a specific
44383 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44387 \begin_inset space ~
44390 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
44391 all the open files,
44392 or all the manuals available from the
44399 \begin_layout Itemize
44400 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization,
44401 so that the replaced text capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
44402 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44406 \begin_inset space ~
44411 first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
44414 \begin_layout Subsection
44418 \begin_layout Standard
44419 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
44421 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44434 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
44437 ) or the toolbar button
44440 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
44446 Advanced Find and Replace
44451 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44455 \begin_layout Standard
44461 mini-editor a simple word,
44462 and search for occurrences of it by clicking on the
44465 \begin_inset space ~
44470 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
44473 arg "paragraph-break"
44477 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode,
44479 bold or normal face,
44480 and in both in section titles and in standard text.
44484 arg "paragraph-break"
44487 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
44491 searches backwards.
44494 \begin_layout Standard
44498 \begin_inset space ~
44503 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
44511 \begin_inset space ~
44516 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
44519 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44520 Searching for mathematics
44523 \begin_layout Standard
44524 Mathematical formulas,
44526 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
44529 or something more complex like
44530 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
44534 may be searched for by typing them in the
44539 When searching for a formula,
44540 it is found both when it is alone and when it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
44541 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
44542 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
44548 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44552 \begin_layout Standard
44553 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
44554 This is done by switching to the
44558 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
44571 \begin_layout Itemize
44572 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word occurring in emphasized or boldface.
44575 \begin_layout Itemize
44576 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective instances with the same face only,
44577 and within the same text style only.
44580 \begin_layout Itemize
44581 a normal word in a section heading,
44582 and searching for it,
44583 would find occurrences of it only within section headings.
44585 if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face,
44586 in addition to a section style,
44587 then it is found only when occurring with the same style.
44590 \begin_layout Itemize
44591 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
44594 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44598 \begin_layout Standard
44599 The entries made in the
44603 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
44606 \begin_inset space ~
44612 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it,
44617 button or alternatively press
44620 arg "paragraph-break"
44627 while the cursor is in the
44630 \begin_inset space ~
44638 \begin_layout Standard
44639 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
44641 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention two):
44644 \begin_layout Itemize
44645 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the same word,
44646 for example replacing occurrences of a name like
44647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44654 with its typewriter version
44655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44669 \begin_layout Itemize
44670 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols,
44671 for example replacing occurrences of
44672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44676 \begin_inset Formula $R$
44680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44688 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
44692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44695 (you may want to enable the
44698 \begin_inset space ~
44706 \begin_inset space ~
44711 options and disable the
44720 in order to avoid replacing all
44721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44728 letters occurring in normal text),
44730 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
44734 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
44739 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
44743 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
44749 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44753 \begin_layout Standard
44754 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
44758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44759 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
44761 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44763 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
44773 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into the
44778 This is done with the context menu
44780 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44781 Insert Regular Expression
44783 while the cursor is in the
44788 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular expression matching rules
44792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44793 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
44796 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44800 \begin_inset space ~
44803 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
44805 no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to match expressions.
44811 while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the same text in the document.
44812 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
44813 Examples of using such a feature may be:
44816 \begin_layout Enumerate
44817 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator:
44823 editor the fraction
44824 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
44828 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
44831 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all fractions with the given denominator.
44834 \begin_layout Enumerate
44835 Searching for all text with a given style:
44838 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651390777
44842 \change_deleted -712698321 1686814407
44846 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651390710
44847 Adhere to search string formatting of
44848 \change_deleted -712698321 1686814409
44850 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651390724
44856 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651390961
44858 \change_deleted -712698321 1686814412
44860 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651390961
44864 \change_deleted -712698321 1686814414
44868 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651390961
44870 \change_deleted -712698321 1686814534
44872 \change_inserted -712698321 1686814534
44876 \change_deleted -712698321 1686814548
44882 \change_inserted -712698321 1686814554
44883 in this section pressed
44889 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
44894 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face,
44895 finds all emphasized or bold face text respectively.
44898 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
44901 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
44902 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
44904 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651391772
44905 The meaning of the specific style options (if checked) is as follows:
44909 \begin_layout Description
44911 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651391862
44912 Language Allows searching for text in specific language
44913 \change_inserted -712698321 1686814961
44915 as with the other options,
44916 the setting of the search string)
44917 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651391862
44921 \begin_layout Description
44923 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392163
44925 \begin_inset space ~
44928 color colored text like cyan,
44933 \begin_layout Description
44935 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392038
44937 \begin_inset space ~
44945 \begin_layout Description
44947 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392204
44949 \begin_inset space ~
44956 \begin_layout Description
44958 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392249
44960 \begin_inset space ~
44969 \begin_layout Description
44971 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392299
44973 \begin_inset space ~
44982 \begin_layout Description
44984 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392343
44985 Emph/noun Semantic Markup:
44990 \begin_layout Description
44992 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392414
44999 \begin_layout Description
45001 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392503
45002 Strike-through Single,
45006 \begin_layout Description
45008 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392776
45009 Deletion searches also in deleted parts (in case of 'Track Changes' enabled)
45012 \begin_layout Description
45014 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392891
45016 \begin_inset space ~
45029 \begin_layout Standard
45031 references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
45032 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
45033 \begin_inset Formula $()$
45037 and referring back to them through
45038 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
45043 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
45049 try searching with the regexp
45050 \begin_inset Newline newline
45054 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651393222
45066 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651393089
45067 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
45072 \begin_inset Newline newline
45075 in order to find word repetitions,
45079 \begin_layout Standard
45080 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet)
45081 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651393403
45087 \begin_layout Standard
45088 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45097 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp,
45098 and when occurring in multiple different regexps,
45099 where the numbering of back-referenced sub-expressions is absolute.
45101 \begin_inset space ~
45105 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
45108 always refers to the first occurrence of
45109 \begin_inset Formula $()$
45112 in all entered regexps.
45120 \begin_layout Section
45122 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45124 name "sec:Spellchecking"
45129 \begin_inset Index idx
45134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45143 \begin_layout Standard
45145 has a built-in spell checker.
45148 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45156 key or the toolbar button
45159 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
45162 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the beginning of the currently selected text.
45163 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found,
45164 allowing you to edit and replace it in a second line.
45165 Whenever an unknown word is found,
45166 the word is highlighted and the text scrolled so that it is visible.
45167 In the spellchecker sidebar,
45168 there is a box showing suggestions for a correction,
45169 if any could be found.
45170 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
45175 double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
45176 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
45179 \begin_layout Standard
45181 the dictionary file used is determined by the document language that is set in the
45183 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45187 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing a different one at the top of the dialog.
45189 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
45190 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
45193 \begin_inset space ~
45201 arg "dialog-show character"
45204 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
45206 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
45209 \begin_layout Standard
45210 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
45211 can be downloaded from here:
45212 \begin_inset Newline newline
45216 \begin_inset Flex URL
45219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45221 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069762
45223 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
45224 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069762
45225 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/dicts/
45233 \begin_inset Newline newline
45237 \change_deleted 244031559 1606070170
45239 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070176
45240 You should download
45243 \begin_inset space ~
45246 files for each language
45247 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070127
45252 link at the end of the opened webpage)
45255 To install a dictionary on Windows,
45257 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069925
45261 \begin_inset space ~
45264 files into \SpecialChar LyX
45265 's installation subfolder
45273 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
45275 \begin_inset Newline newline
45278 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
45279 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
45280 but in most cases these are
45300 is the language code.
45303 \begin_layout Subsection
45307 \begin_layout Standard
45310 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45311 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45313 \begin_inset space ~
45316 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45319 you can set the following things:
45322 \begin_layout Description
45324 \begin_inset space ~
45327 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
45328 should use for spell checking.
45329 Depending on your platform,
45340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45341 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
45342 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
45357 \begin_inset space ~
45360 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
45363 \begin_layout Description
45365 \begin_inset space ~
45368 language If this field is not empty,
45370 will always use the given language for the spell checking,
45371 no matter what the document language is.
45374 \begin_layout Description
45376 \begin_inset space ~
45379 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker should escape,
45381 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45385 \begin_inset space \space{}
45389 This should normally not be needed.
45392 \begin_layout Description
45394 \begin_inset space ~
45398 \begin_inset space ~
45401 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words like
45402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45412 \begin_layout Description
45414 \begin_inset space ~
45417 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
45418 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
45419 By right-clicking on an underlined word,
45420 suggestions from the spellchecker appear in a context menu.
45421 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested word.
45424 \begin_layout Description
45426 \begin_inset space ~
45430 \begin_inset space ~
45434 \begin_inset space ~
45437 comments If enabled,
45438 the spelling of non-printed document content is checked as well.
45441 \begin_layout Section
45443 \begin_inset Index idx
45448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45455 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45457 name "sec:Thesaurus"
45464 \begin_layout Standard
45466 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
45467 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice,
45468 OpenOffice and Firefox (namely the
45476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45477 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45479 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
45490 which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
45494 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
45495 which are available for many languages.
45498 \begin_layout Standard
45499 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for the use with \SpecialChar LyX
45503 \begin_layout Subsection
45504 Setting up the thesaurus
45507 \begin_layout Standard
45516 thesauri consist of two files per language:
45517 A file with the suffix
45521 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
45526 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language (e.
45527 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45531 \begin_inset space ~
45540 the US English files are named:
45543 \begin_layout Itemize
45547 \begin_layout Itemize
45551 \begin_layout Standard
45560 and its thesaurus installed,
45561 these files should be already on your system and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
45564 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45565 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45566 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
45568 \begin_inset space ~
45573 ) to the path where they are installed.
45577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45579 depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionaries,
45580 typical locations are
45587 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
45592 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
45597 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
45601 dictionaries are to be found at
45607 LibreOffice-<Version>
45615 the default location is
45617 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
45618 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
45619 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
45620 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
45621 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
45622 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
45631 you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation during the \SpecialChar LyX
45632 installation process,
45633 which will then be installed in the correct place right away.
45636 \begin_layout Standard
45637 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
45639 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069849
45641 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069853
45644 thesaurus dictionaries,
45645 you can download them from here:
45646 \begin_inset Newline newline
45650 \begin_inset Flex URL
45653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45655 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069803
45657 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
45658 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069803
45659 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
45669 \begin_layout Standard
45670 To install a new dictionary,
45671 download the two files for this dictionary into the thesaurus path (which is set in
45673 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45674 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45675 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
45677 \begin_inset space ~
45682 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
45684 If this path is not defined yet,
45685 you can use a dictionary of your choice and point \SpecialChar LyX
45689 \begin_layout Standard
45691 you can also install new dictionaries via
45693 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
45698 via your package manager (look for
45704 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
45708 make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
45709 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
45711 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45717 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45718 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45719 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
45721 \begin_inset space ~
45726 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
45729 \begin_layout Subsection
45730 Using the thesaurus
45733 \begin_layout Standard
45734 To start the thesaurus,
45737 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45740 or the toolbar button
45743 arg "thesaurus-entry"
45746 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is selected.
45747 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as a replacement.
45748 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
45750 for some languages (such as English),
45751 the thesaurus does not only show equivalent words (synonyms),
45752 but also generic terms (such as
45761 related terms (such as
45764 \begin_inset space ~
45777 \begin_inset space ~
45787 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
45797 related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
45800 \begin_layout Standard
45801 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor,
45802 but you can also switch it in the dialog,
45803 as you can enter new words to look up directly there.
45806 \begin_layout Standard
45807 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in the dictionary,
45813 and you have to use the so called lemma form,
45815 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45819 \begin_inset space \space{}
45822 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages:
45823 first person singular indicative active for nouns,
45824 infinitive for verbs).
45826 looking up the word form
45831 while results are shown for the word form
45836 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
45837 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45841 \begin_inset space \space{}
45853 then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in the dialog,
45854 and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only the highlighted part will be replaced;
45855 thus the ending remains).
45858 \begin_layout Section
45860 \begin_inset Index idx
45865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45872 \begin_inset Index idx
45877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45879 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
45882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45894 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45896 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
45903 \begin_layout Standard
45904 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
45905 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
45906 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
45908 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45910 \begin_inset space ~
45913 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
45915 \begin_inset space ~
45923 \begin_layout Standard
45924 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
45939 The color depends on the author that made the change.
45940 You can change the color in
45942 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45943 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45945 \begin_inset space ~
45949 \begin_inset space ~
45954 \SpecialChar menuseparator
45960 \begin_inset Index idx
45965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45967 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
45970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45981 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
45982 's status bar when the cursor is in changed text.
45983 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
45986 arg "changes-merge"
45992 \begin_layout Standard
45993 When change tracking is activated,
45994 you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
45996 \begin_inset Index idx
46001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46003 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46020 \begin_layout Standard
46021 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46027 \begin_layout Standard
46028 \begin_inset Graphics
46029 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
46037 \begin_layout Standard
46038 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46044 \begin_layout Standard
46045 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
46048 \begin_layout Standard
46049 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46055 \begin_layout Standard
46056 \begin_inset Tabular
46057 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
46058 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
46059 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
46060 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
46061 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46070 arg "changes-track"
46078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46084 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46086 \begin_inset space ~
46089 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46091 \begin_inset space ~
46100 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46109 arg "changes-output"
46117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46123 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46125 \begin_inset space ~
46128 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46130 \begin_inset space ~
46134 \begin_inset space ~
46138 \begin_inset space ~
46147 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46168 Jumps to the next change
46174 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46183 arg "change-accept"
46191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46197 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46199 \begin_inset space ~
46202 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46204 \begin_inset space ~
46213 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46222 arg "change-reject"
46230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46236 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46238 \begin_inset space ~
46241 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46243 \begin_inset space ~
46252 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46261 arg "changes-merge"
46269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46275 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46277 \begin_inset space ~
46280 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46282 \begin_inset space ~
46291 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46300 arg "all-changes-accept"
46308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46314 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46316 \begin_inset space ~
46319 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46321 \begin_inset space ~
46325 \begin_inset space ~
46334 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46343 arg "all-changes-reject"
46351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46357 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46359 \begin_inset space ~
46362 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46364 \begin_inset space ~
46368 \begin_inset space ~
46377 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46400 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46401 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
46403 \begin_inset space ~
46412 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46435 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
46437 \begin_inset space ~
46453 \begin_layout Standard
46454 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46460 \begin_layout Standard
46461 Not all changes are (yet) visualized,
46462 especially no format changes like from
46481 \begin_layout Standard
46482 The review toolbar helps you to accept,
46484 or merge changes – highlight the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
46485 When you merge changes,
46486 a window pops up showing you information about the next change after the current cursor position.
46487 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
46488 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and step to the next change.
46489 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
46492 \begin_layout Standard
46493 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important to describe a change.
46496 \begin_layout Standard
46498 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
46499 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46505 \begin_inset Index idx
46510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46513 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46528 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
46531 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46538 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
46544 \begin_layout Section
46545 Comparison of Documents
46546 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46548 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
46553 \begin_inset Index idx
46558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46559 Comparison of documents
46567 \begin_layout Standard
46568 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
46571 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46575 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
46576 file with change tracking enabled showing the differences.
46577 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
46578 should take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
46581 \begin_inset space ~
46585 \begin_inset space ~
46589 \begin_inset space ~
46598 \begin_inset space ~
46602 \begin_inset space ~
46606 \begin_inset space ~
46610 \begin_inset space ~
46614 \begin_inset space ~
46618 \begin_inset space ~
46623 enables the change tracking option
46626 \begin_inset space ~
46630 \begin_inset space ~
46634 \begin_inset space ~
46639 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
46642 \begin_layout Section
46643 International Support
46644 \begin_inset Index idx
46649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46650 International support
46658 \begin_layout Standard
46659 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
46660 with any language you want.
46661 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46664 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46666 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
46674 \begin_layout Standard
46677 also supports phonetic symbols,
46679 \begin_inset space ~
46683 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46685 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
46693 \begin_layout Subsection
46695 \begin_inset Index idx
46700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46702 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46717 \begin_inset Index idx
46722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46724 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46739 \begin_inset Index idx
46744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46746 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46763 \begin_layout Standard
46766 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46767 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46770 dialog lets you set
46773 the quote style and character encoding
46778 \begin_layout Standard
46783 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46788 \begin_inset space ~
46793 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
46794 For details about the different encoding options see section
46795 \begin_inset space ~
46799 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46801 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
46809 \begin_layout Subsection
46810 Keyboard mapping configuration
46811 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46813 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
46820 \begin_layout Standard
46821 If you have for example a U.
46822 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46825 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English,
46826 you can use an alternate keymap.
46828 if you want to write in Italian,
46829 you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
46830 to use an Italian keymap.
46833 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46834 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46835 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
46838 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings,
46840 \begin_inset space ~
46844 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46846 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
46852 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select which one you want to use.
46855 \begin_layout Standard
46857 you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely different keymap (for Vulcan,
46861 normally write in Italian on a U.
46862 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46865 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
46867 you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing one to support the characters you want.
46868 This and many other customizations are explained in the
46875 \begin_layout Chapter
46878 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46880 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
46887 \begin_layout Standard
46888 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
46889 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special topic inside the user's guide.
46892 \begin_layout Section
46894 \begin_inset Index idx
46899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46901 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46918 \begin_layout Standard
46923 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
46926 \begin_layout Subsection
46930 \begin_layout Standard
46931 Creates a new document.
46934 \begin_layout Subsection
46938 \begin_layout Standard
46939 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
46940 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for the document,
46941 features you would otherwise need to change manually.
46943 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
46945 templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring writing tasks.
46950 \begin_layout Subsection
46954 \begin_layout Standard
46958 \begin_layout Subsection
46962 \begin_layout Standard
46963 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
46964 Click there on a file to open it.
46967 \begin_layout Subsection
46969 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
46973 \begin_layout Standard
46975 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
46976 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
46980 \begin_layout Subsection
46984 \begin_layout Standard
46985 Closes the current document.
46988 \begin_layout Subsection
46992 \begin_layout Standard
46993 Closes all opened documents.
46996 \begin_layout Subsection
47000 \begin_layout Standard
47001 Saves the actual document.
47004 \begin_layout Subsection
47008 \begin_layout Standard
47009 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
47010 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
47014 \begin_layout Subsection
47016 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
47020 \begin_layout Standard
47022 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
47023 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use as a template.
47028 \begin_layout Subsection
47032 \begin_layout Standard
47033 Saves all opened documents.
47036 \begin_layout Subsection
47040 \begin_layout Standard
47041 Reloads the actual document from disk.
47044 \begin_layout Subsection
47048 \begin_layout Standard
47049 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
47050 It is described in the section
47052 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
47057 Additional Features
47062 \begin_layout Subsection
47066 \begin_layout Standard
47067 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
47073 plain text files and comma separated,
47074 table-like text files (CSV).
47075 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
47079 \begin_layout Standard
47080 When using the menu entry
47083 \begin_inset space ~
47089 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph;
47090 when using the menu entry
47093 \begin_inset space ~
47097 \begin_inset space ~
47101 \begin_inset space ~
47107 consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
47108 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
47111 \begin_layout Subsection
47113 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47115 name "subsec:Export"
47122 \begin_layout Standard
47123 You can export your document to various file formats.
47124 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
47126 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
47127 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
47128 during its configuration.
47131 \begin_layout Standard
47132 Here is a list of all available entries;
47133 some of them are explained in detail in section
47134 \begin_inset space ~
47138 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47140 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
47148 \begin_layout Description
47154 \begin_inset space ~
47157 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
47159 \begin_inset space ~
47162 1.4.x versions for Chinese,
47163 Japanese and Korean (CJK)
47164 \begin_inset Newline newline
47167 Since \SpecialChar LyX
47168 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
47172 \begin_layout Description
47173 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup language
47178 \begin_layout Description
47180 \begin_inset space ~
47183 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup language
47188 \begin_layout Description
47189 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
47190 's native DVI-format.
47191 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in files paths or file names in your document.
47193 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
47200 \begin_layout Description
47201 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces in files paths or file names
47204 \begin_layout Description
47206 \begin_inset space ~
47213 ) DVI-format using the program
47215 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47219 supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
47224 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47233 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
47241 \begin_layout Description
47243 \begin_inset space ~
47246 (cropped) the same as
47250 but with cropped page margins.
47253 \begin_layout Description
47255 \begin_inset space ~
47258 Dot text file with code in the programming language
47262 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
47267 \begin_layout Description
47272 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47281 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
47289 \begin_layout Description
47291 \begin_inset space ~
47295 \begin_inset space ~
47298 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
47303 as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and not in the format
47310 \begin_layout Description
47314 \begin_inset space ~
47323 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47324 source that is compilable with the program
47326 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47330 \begin_layout Description
47334 \begin_inset space ~
47339 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47341 additionally all images used in the document will be converted to a format that is readable by the
47351 \begin_layout Description
47355 \begin_inset space ~
47360 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47362 additionally all images used in the document will be converted to the EPS-format,
47363 only this format is readable by the
47370 \begin_layout Description
47374 \begin_inset space ~
47383 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47384 source that is compilable with the program
47390 \begin_layout Description
47392 \begin_inset space ~
47396 \begin_inset space ~
47403 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47404 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation software
47409 \begin_layout Description
47411 \begin_inset space ~
47414 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
47415 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
47417 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47421 \begin_inset space \space{}
47426 \begin_inset space ~
47431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47446 represent the version number)
47449 \begin_layout Description
47451 \begin_inset space ~
47455 \begin_inset space ~
47458 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary to compile it (images,
47460 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47465 \begin_layout Description
47466 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
47467 's internal XHTML engine
47470 \begin_layout Description
47472 \begin_inset space ~
47476 \begin_inset space ~
47480 \begin_inset space ~
47484 \begin_inset space ~
47487 XML Office Open XML file,
47493 For the conversion the program
47502 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
47505 \begin_layout Description
47506 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
47511 \begin_layout Description
47513 \begin_inset space ~
47516 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file,
47526 For the conversion the program
47535 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
47538 \begin_layout Description
47540 \begin_inset space ~
47543 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
47544 For the conversion the program
47553 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
47556 \begin_layout Description
47558 \begin_inset space ~
47561 (cropped) the same as
47564 \begin_inset space ~
47569 but with cropped page margins
47572 \begin_layout Description
47576 \begin_inset space ~
47581 PDF-format using the program
47586 produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
47589 \begin_layout Description
47593 \begin_inset space ~
47597 \begin_inset space ~
47605 \begin_inset space ~
47610 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
47611 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47615 \begin_inset space \space{}
47618 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermediate preview)
47621 \begin_layout Description
47625 \begin_inset space ~
47630 PDF-format using the program
47632 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47636 produces PDF-files directly
47639 \begin_layout Description
47643 \begin_inset space ~
47648 PDF-format using the program
47653 produces PDF-files directly
47656 \begin_layout Description
47660 \begin_inset space ~
47665 PDF-format using the program
47670 produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
47673 \begin_layout Description
47677 \begin_inset space ~
47682 PDF-format using the program
47688 produces PDF-files directly
47691 \begin_layout Description
47695 \begin_inset space ~
47703 \begin_layout Description
47707 \begin_inset space ~
47711 \begin_inset space ~
47717 the document will first be converted to Postscript format and then exported as text using the program
47722 \begin_layout Description
47727 PostScript format using the program
47736 options see section
47737 \begin_inset space ~
47741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47743 reference "subsec:General-output"
47751 \begin_layout Description
47752 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47753 source and also code in the statistical programming language
47766 it is possible to use
47770 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
47774 \begin_layout Standard
47775 If one of the menu entries
47783 \begin_inset space ~
47793 you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
47795 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
47798 \begin_inset space ~
47802 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47804 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
47810 \begin_inset Index idx
47815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47816 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
47825 \begin_layout Subsection
47829 \begin_layout Standard
47830 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
47833 \begin_inset space ~
47837 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47839 reference "sec:Paths"
47845 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
47854 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
47855 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
47856 's preferences as described in section
47857 \begin_inset space ~
47861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47863 reference "subsec:Converters"
47871 \begin_layout Subsection
47872 New and Close Window
47875 \begin_layout Standard
47876 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
47880 \begin_layout Subsection
47884 \begin_layout Standard
47885 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
47888 \begin_layout Section
47890 \begin_inset Index idx
47895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47897 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47914 \begin_layout Subsection
47918 \begin_layout Standard
47919 Described in section
47920 \begin_inset space ~
47924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47926 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
47934 \begin_layout Subsection
47942 \begin_layout Standard
47943 Described in section
47944 \begin_inset space ~
47948 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47950 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
47958 \begin_layout Subsection
47962 \begin_layout Standard
47963 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
47964 If the cursor is outside an inset,
47965 the whole document will be selected.
47968 \begin_layout Subsection
47972 \begin_layout Standard
47973 Selects the whole document.
47976 \begin_layout Subsection
47977 Find & Replace (Quick)
47980 \begin_layout Standard
47981 Described in section
47982 \begin_inset space ~
47986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47988 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
47996 \begin_layout Subsection
47997 Find & Replace (Advanced)
48000 \begin_layout Standard
48001 Described in section
48002 \begin_inset space ~
48006 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48008 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
48016 \begin_layout Subsection
48017 Move Paragraph Up/Down
48020 \begin_layout Standard
48021 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph up or down.
48024 \begin_layout Subsection
48026 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
48030 \begin_layout Standard
48032 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
48033 Described in section
48034 \begin_inset space ~
48038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48040 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
48050 \begin_layout Subsection
48052 \begin_inset Index idx
48057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48059 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
48062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48076 \begin_layout Standard
48077 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment,
48078 line spacing and label width.
48079 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently in.
48082 \begin_layout Standard
48083 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you have chosen to separate paragraphs with
48089 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48090 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48092 \begin_inset space ~
48098 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
48102 \begin_layout Subsection
48104 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
48108 \begin_layout Standard
48110 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
48111 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text passages.
48115 \begin_layout Enumerate
48117 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
48118 Customize text properties by means of the
48124 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
48128 this is described in section
48129 \begin_inset space ~
48133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48135 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
48143 \begin_layout Enumerate
48145 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
48146 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
48148 Apply last settings
48151 \begin_layout Enumerate
48153 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
48154 Change the casing of selected text (
48171 \begin_layout Subsection
48173 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
48177 \begin_layout Standard
48179 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
48180 This sub-menu only appears
48181 \change_inserted 630872221 1621860799
48183 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
48184 the document class or a module provides custom text styles (in the case of this document:
48210 \begin_inset space ~
48214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48216 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
48226 \begin_layout Subsection
48227 Table and Rows & Columns
48230 \begin_layout Standard
48231 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
48232 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells,
48233 add or remove borders of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
48236 \begin_layout Subsection
48240 \begin_layout Standard
48241 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
48242 It will dissolve this inset.
48243 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal text.
48246 \begin_layout Subsection
48250 \begin_layout Standard
48251 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
48252 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
48255 \begin_layout Subsection
48256 Increase/Decrease List Depth
48259 \begin_layout Standard
48260 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can be nested.
48261 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
48262 \begin_inset space ~
48266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48268 reference "sec:Nesting"
48274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48276 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
48284 \begin_layout Section
48286 \begin_inset Index idx
48291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48293 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
48296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48310 \begin_layout Standard
48311 At the bottom of the
48315 menu the opened documents are listed.
48318 \begin_layout Subsection
48319 Open/Close all Insets
48322 \begin_layout Standard
48323 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
48326 \begin_layout Subsection
48327 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
48330 \begin_layout Standard
48331 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
48334 \begin_layout Standard
48335 Math macros are described in the
48342 \begin_layout Subsection
48346 \begin_layout Standard
48347 Shows the outline window as described in sections
48348 \begin_inset space ~
48352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48354 reference "sec:Navigating"
48360 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48362 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
48370 \begin_layout Subsection
48374 \begin_layout Standard
48375 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document,
48376 as described in section
48377 \begin_inset space ~
48381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48383 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
48391 \begin_layout Subsection
48395 \begin_layout Standard
48396 Opens a window showing console messages.
48397 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
48399 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48403 hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background while \SpecialChar LaTeX
48404 is processing the document.
48407 \begin_layout Subsection
48409 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48411 name "subsec:Toolbars"
48416 \begin_inset Index idx
48421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48430 \begin_layout Standard
48431 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different toolbars.
48432 All toolbars and the
48435 \begin_inset space ~
48453 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
48455 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195495
48457 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195492
48461 \begin_layout Standard
48463 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195407
48467 \begin_inset space ~
48488 \begin_inset space ~
48501 \begin_inset space ~
48506 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
48509 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195728
48514 \change_inserted -712698321 1608196033
48516 The state of these toolbars is set and indicated in a submenu which lets you select
48531 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195563
48532 denoted in the menu with the suffix
48541 \begin_layout Standard
48546 state the toolbar is permanently shown
48547 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195803
48553 state it is never shown
48560 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment or when a certain feature is enabled.
48561 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking is activated,
48562 the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor is inside a formula or table respectively
48563 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195857
48565 the phonetic symbols toolbar only in the phonetic symbols environment
48570 \begin_layout Standard
48572 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
48573 \begin_inset space ~
48577 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48579 reference "sec:Toolbars"
48587 \begin_layout Subsection
48591 \begin_layout Standard
48595 \begin_inset space ~
48599 \begin_inset space ~
48603 \begin_inset space ~
48607 \begin_inset space ~
48611 \begin_inset space ~
48615 \begin_inset space ~
48620 will split \SpecialChar LyX
48621 's main window vertically while
48624 \begin_inset space ~
48628 \begin_inset space ~
48632 \begin_inset space ~
48636 \begin_inset space ~
48640 \begin_inset space ~
48644 \begin_inset space ~
48649 will split it horizontally.
48650 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them,
48651 or to view the same document,
48652 but at different positions.
48653 You can even split the main window several times to view,
48655 three or more documents at the same time.
48656 To close a split view,
48660 \begin_inset space ~
48664 \begin_inset space ~
48672 \begin_layout Subsection
48676 \begin_layout Standard
48677 Closes a split view.
48680 \begin_layout Subsection
48684 \begin_layout Standard
48685 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars so that you will see nothing but your text.
48686 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
48687 's main window fullscreen.
48688 To return from fullscreen to the normal view,
48690 or right-click and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
48693 \begin_layout Section
48695 \begin_inset Index idx
48700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48702 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
48705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48719 \begin_layout Subsection
48723 \begin_layout Standard
48724 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
48725 \begin_inset space ~
48729 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48731 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
48743 \begin_layout Subsection
48745 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48747 name "subsec:Special-Character"
48754 \begin_layout Standard
48755 Here you can insert the following characters:
48758 \begin_layout Description
48763 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
48765 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
48766 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48767 -packages you have installed.
48768 You can get a complete display by checking
48771 \begin_inset space ~
48777 \begin_inset Newline newline
48781 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48790 Not all characters will be visible in the
48794 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences dialog (see section
48795 \begin_inset space ~
48799 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48801 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
48806 ) can display every character.
48814 \begin_layout Description
48815 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis:
48820 \begin_layout Description
48822 \begin_inset space ~
48826 \begin_inset space ~
48829 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
48830 \begin_inset space ~
48834 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48836 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
48844 \begin_layout Description
48846 \begin_inset space ~
48849 Quote Inserts this quote:
48851 no matter what quote style you selected in the
48853 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48854 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48860 \begin_layout Description
48862 \begin_inset space ~
48865 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
48867 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48868 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48874 \begin_layout Description
48876 \change_deleted 177693 1654619391
48878 \change_inserted 177693 1654619396
48882 \begin_inset space ~
48885 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that
48886 \change_deleted 177693 1654619439
48888 \change_inserted 177693 1654619443
48892 \SpecialChar nobreakdash
48896 \begin_layout Description
48898 \begin_inset space ~
48901 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur:
48902 \SpecialChar breakableslash
48906 \begin_layout Description
48908 \begin_inset space ~
48912 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482504
48913 Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when pressing the
48919 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
48924 Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
48926 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48930 \begin_inset space \space{}
48933 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
48934 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
48941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48944 To insert a fraction use the command
48949 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
48953 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
48959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48962 The visible space is hereby the character before the
48969 \begin_layout Description
48971 \begin_inset space ~
48974 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign:
48975 \SpecialChar menuseparator
48979 \begin_layout Description
48981 \begin_inset space ~
48985 \begin_inset Index idx
48990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48997 \begin_inset Index idx
49002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49004 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49018 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these symbols.
49019 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49025 \begin_inset Index idx
49030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49033 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49048 \begin_inset Newline newline
49051 More information about this feature can be found in the
49057 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
49063 \begin_layout Description
49064 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
49069 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
49073 \begin_layout Subsection
49077 \begin_layout Standard
49078 Opens a submenu with the following options:
49081 \begin_layout Description
49082 Superscript Inserts a superscript:
49084 \begin_inset script superscript
49086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49096 \begin_layout Description
49097 Subscript Inserts a subscript:
49099 \begin_inset script subscript
49101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49110 \begin_layout Description
49112 \change_deleted 177693 1654619456
49114 \change_inserted 177693 1654619456
49118 \begin_inset space ~
49122 \change_deleted 177693 1654619466
49124 \change_inserted 177693 1654619468
49127 space as described in section
49128 \begin_inset space ~
49132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49134 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
49142 \begin_layout Description
49144 \begin_inset space ~
49147 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
49148 \begin_inset space ~
49152 \change_inserted 177693 1654667914
49154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49156 reference "subsec:Normal-Space"
49162 \change_deleted 177693 1654667914
49164 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49166 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
49176 \begin_layout Description
49178 \begin_inset space ~
49181 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
49182 \begin_inset space ~
49186 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49188 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
49196 \begin_layout Description
49198 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482457
49200 \begin_inset space ~
49203 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
49205 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49209 \begin_inset space \space{}
49212 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
49213 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
49220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49223 To insert a fraction use the command
49228 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
49232 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
49238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49241 The visible space is hereby the character before the
49250 \begin_layout Description
49252 \begin_inset space ~
49255 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
49256 \begin_inset space ~
49260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49262 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
49270 \begin_layout Description
49272 \begin_inset space ~
49275 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
49276 \begin_inset space ~
49280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49282 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
49290 \begin_layout Description
49292 \begin_inset space ~
49295 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
49296 \begin_inset space ~
49300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49302 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
49310 \begin_layout Description
49311 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
49312 \begin_inset space ~
49316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49318 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
49326 \begin_layout Description
49328 \begin_inset space ~
49331 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
49332 \begin_inset space ~
49336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49338 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
49346 \begin_layout Description
49348 \begin_inset space ~
49351 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
49352 \begin_inset space ~
49356 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49358 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
49366 \begin_layout Description
49368 \begin_inset space ~
49372 \begin_inset space ~
49375 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible in the output.
49377 \begin_inset space ~
49381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49383 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
49391 for a usage example.
49394 \begin_layout Description
49396 \begin_inset space ~
49400 \begin_inset space ~
49403 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
49404 \begin_inset space ~
49408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49410 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
49418 \begin_layout Description
49420 \begin_inset space ~
49423 Break Inserts a forced line break that
49424 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482910
49427 justifies the remaining text as described in section
49428 \begin_inset space ~
49432 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49434 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
49442 \begin_layout Description
49444 \begin_inset space ~
49447 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
49448 \begin_inset space ~
49452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49454 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
49462 \begin_layout Description
49464 \begin_inset space ~
49467 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page,
49468 as described in section
49469 \begin_inset space ~
49473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49475 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
49481 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005731
49485 \begin_layout Description
49487 \change_deleted 5863208 1686701518
49489 \change_inserted 5863208 1686701520
49491 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005924
49493 \begin_inset space ~
49497 \begin_inset space ~
49500 Break Instructs \SpecialChar LaTeX
49501 to prevent a page break at the given position.
49503 \begin_inset space ~
49507 \change_inserted 630872221 1621862329
49509 \begin_inset space ~
49513 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005924
49515 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49517 reference "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
49527 \begin_layout Description
49529 \begin_inset space ~
49532 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
49533 \begin_inset space ~
49537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49539 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
49547 \begin_layout Description
49549 \begin_inset space ~
49553 \begin_inset space ~
49556 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
49557 \begin_inset space ~
49561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49563 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
49571 \begin_layout Subsection
49573 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49577 \begin_layout Standard
49579 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49580 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
49581 The submenu allows you to insert
49584 \begin_layout Description
49586 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49588 \begin_inset space ~
49591 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
49594 \begin_layout Description
49596 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49598 \begin_inset space ~
49602 \begin_inset space ~
49605 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last save)
49608 \begin_layout Description
49610 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49612 \begin_inset space ~
49615 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
49618 \begin_layout Description
49620 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49622 \begin_inset space ~
49625 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
49628 \begin_layout Description
49630 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49632 \begin_inset space ~
49636 \begin_inset space ~
49639 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last save)
49642 \begin_layout Description
49644 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49646 \begin_inset space ~
49649 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
49652 \begin_layout Description
49654 \change_inserted 630872221 1621867346
49656 \begin_inset space ~
49660 \begin_inset space ~
49664 \begin_inset space ~
49667 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
49670 \begin_layout Description
49672 \change_inserted 630872221 1621867469
49674 \begin_inset space ~
49678 \begin_inset space ~
49681 Revision inserts the version control reference number (e.g.
49683 This submenu does not appear if the file is not under version control
49686 \begin_layout Description
49688 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49690 \begin_inset space ~
49693 Name inserts the user name as specified in
49695 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
49696 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
49702 \begin_layout Description
49704 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49706 \begin_inset space ~
49709 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
49711 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
49712 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
49718 \begin_layout Description
49720 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49721 Other\SpecialChar ldots
49722 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
49725 \begin_layout Subsection
49728 List/Contents/References
49731 \begin_layout Standard
49732 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
49736 \begin_inset space ~
49760 are described in section
49761 \begin_inset space ~
49765 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49767 reference "sec:toc"
49777 is described in section
49778 \begin_inset space ~
49782 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49784 reference "sec:Index"
49794 is described in section
49795 \begin_inset space ~
49799 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49801 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
49808 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49811 is described in section
49812 \begin_inset space ~
49816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49818 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
49826 \begin_layout Subsection
49830 \begin_layout Standard
49832 as described in section
49833 \begin_inset space ~
49837 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49839 reference "sec:Floats"
49844 and in detail the chapter
49851 \begin_inset space ~
49859 \begin_layout Subsection
49863 \begin_layout Standard
49865 described in section
49866 \begin_inset space ~
49870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49872 reference "sec:Notes"
49880 \begin_layout Subsection
49884 \begin_layout Standard
49885 Inserts a branch inset,
49887 and allowing you to create and insert a new branch.
49888 Branches are described in section
49889 \begin_inset space ~
49893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49895 reference "sec:Branches"
49903 \begin_layout Subsection
49907 \begin_layout Standard
49908 Inserts document class-specific insets.
49909 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain document class.
49910 An example is the document class
49911 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
49913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49921 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
49925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49930 with three custom insets.
49933 Flex insets and InsetLayout
49937 Installing New Document Classes,
49938 The Layout file format
49944 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
49947 \begin_layout Subsection
49949 \begin_inset Index idx
49954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49963 \begin_layout Standard
49964 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files in your document.
49965 For more information see chapter
49967 External Document Parts
49970 \begin_inset space ~
49976 \begin_layout Subsection
49978 \begin_inset Index idx
49983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49992 \begin_layout Standard
49993 Inserts a box in a certain style.
49994 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
50001 \begin_inset space ~
50009 \begin_layout Subsection
50013 \begin_layout Standard
50018 dialog as described in section
50019 \begin_inset space ~
50023 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50025 reference "sec:Bibliography"
50033 \begin_layout Subsection
50037 \begin_layout Standard
50042 as described in section
50043 \begin_inset space ~
50047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50049 reference "sec:Cross-References"
50057 \begin_layout Subsection
50061 \begin_layout Standard
50066 as described in section
50067 \begin_inset space ~
50071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50073 reference "sec:Cross-References"
50081 \begin_layout Subsection
50083 \begin_inset Index idx
50088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50095 \begin_inset Index idx
50100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50102 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50112 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50129 \begin_layout Standard
50130 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
50131 Floats are described in section
50132 \begin_inset space ~
50136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50138 reference "sec:Floats"
50144 captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
50147 \change_inserted -712698321 1590482693
50155 \begin_inset space ~
50163 \begin_layout Subsection
50167 \begin_layout Standard
50168 Inserts an index entry as described in section
50169 \begin_inset space ~
50173 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50175 reference "sec:Index"
50183 \begin_layout Subsection
50187 \begin_layout Standard
50188 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
50189 \begin_inset space ~
50193 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50195 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
50203 \begin_layout Subsection
50207 \begin_layout Standard
50208 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
50209 Tables are described in section
50210 \begin_inset space ~
50214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50216 reference "sec:Tables"
50221 and in detail in the chapter
50228 \begin_inset space ~
50236 \begin_layout Subsection
50240 \begin_layout Standard
50246 Graphics are described in section
50247 \begin_inset space ~
50251 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50253 reference "sec:Graphics"
50261 \begin_layout Subsection
50265 \begin_layout Standard
50266 Inserts a URL as described in section
50267 \begin_inset space ~
50271 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50273 reference "subsec:URLs"
50281 \begin_layout Subsection
50285 \begin_layout Standard
50286 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
50287 \begin_inset space ~
50291 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50293 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
50301 \begin_layout Subsection
50305 \begin_layout Standard
50306 Inserts a footnote as described in section
50307 \begin_inset space ~
50311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50313 reference "sec:Footnotes"
50321 \begin_layout Subsection
50325 \begin_layout Standard
50326 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
50327 \begin_inset space ~
50331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50333 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
50341 \begin_layout Subsection
50344 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
50347 \begin_layout Standard
50348 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environments of the same type.
50350 \begin_inset space ~
50354 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50356 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
50361 for an explanation.
50364 \begin_layout Subsection
50368 \begin_layout Standard
50369 Is only visible if the cursor is in front,
50370 in or behind a section heading,
50371 title or caption of a float.
50372 Inserts a short title as described in section
50373 \begin_inset space ~
50377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50379 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
50387 \begin_layout Subsection
50392 \begin_layout Standard
50393 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
50394 Code box as described in section
50395 \begin_inset space ~
50399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50401 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
50409 \begin_layout Subsection
50411 \begin_inset Index idx
50416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50425 \begin_layout Standard
50426 Inserts a program listings box.
50427 Program listings are explained in the chapter
50429 Program Code Listings
50434 \begin_inset space ~
50442 \begin_layout Subsection
50444 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
50448 \begin_layout Standard
50450 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
50451 Inserts the actual date.
50452 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for \SpecialChar LyX
50458 \begin_layout Subsection
50462 \begin_layout Standard
50463 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
50464 \begin_inset space ~
50468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50470 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
50478 \begin_layout Section
50480 \begin_inset Index idx
50485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50487 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50504 \begin_layout Standard
50505 This menu lists the existing chapters,
50510 \begin_inset space ~
50513 of the current document.
50514 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
50517 \begin_layout Subsection
50521 \begin_layout Standard
50522 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
50523 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have to jump,
50526 \begin_inset space ~
50530 To create bookmarks for this example,
50532 \begin_inset space ~
50535 2.5 and use the submenu
50538 \begin_inset space ~
50542 \begin_inset space ~
50549 \begin_inset space ~
50555 \begin_inset space ~
50559 \begin_inset space ~
50565 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by the key bindings
50568 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
50574 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
50577 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
50580 \begin_layout Standard
50582 \change_deleted 244031559 1613377262
50583 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
50589 \begin_inset space ~
50594 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
50597 \begin_inset space ~
50602 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
50605 \begin_layout Subsection
50611 \begin_layout Standard
50612 Jump to the next note,
50614 or cross-reference after the current cursor position.
50617 \begin_layout Subsection
50621 \begin_layout Standard
50622 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
50623 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
50624 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
50627 \begin_inset space ~
50631 \begin_inset space ~
50639 \begin_layout Subsection
50643 \begin_layout Standard
50644 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
50647 The \SpecialChar LyX
50648 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
50650 \begin_inset space ~
50658 \begin_inset space ~
50663 manual for a detailed description.
50666 \begin_layout Section
50668 \begin_inset Index idx
50673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50675 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50692 \begin_layout Subsection
50696 \begin_layout Standard
50697 Change Tracking is described in section
50698 \begin_inset space ~
50702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50704 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
50712 \begin_layout Subsection
50720 \begin_layout Standard
50721 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
50722 by viewing or exporting a document,
50723 this menu will be enabled.
50724 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50726 You can go to the next error or the next warning,
50728 copy something to the clipboard or update the view.
50729 \begin_inset Newline newline
50732 With the help of the logfile,
50733 experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
50737 \begin_layout Standard
50740 Open Containing Directory
50742 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
50743 's temporary folder for the document.
50744 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
50745 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
50746 For example some journals require to send the
50750 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50754 \begin_layout Subsection
50755 Start Appendix Here
50758 \begin_layout Standard
50759 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position as described in section
50760 \begin_inset space ~
50764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50766 reference "sec:Appendices"
50774 \begin_layout Subsection
50776 \begin_inset space ~
50782 \begin_layout Standard
50783 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as default output format for the document (menu
50785 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
50786 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
50787 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
50789 \begin_inset space ~
50793 \begin_inset space ~
50800 \begin_inset space ~
50804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50806 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
50811 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
50814 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
50815 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
50817 \begin_inset space ~
50820 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
50822 \begin_inset space ~
50825 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
50827 \begin_inset space ~
50831 \begin_inset space ~
50838 \begin_inset space ~
50842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50844 reference "sec:File-Formats"
50849 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
50850 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
50852 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
50853 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
50855 \begin_inset space ~
50858 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
50860 \begin_inset space ~
50863 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
50868 \begin_inset space ~
50872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50874 reference "sec:File-Formats"
50880 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
50881 when it is first configured.
50882 The default output format is
50885 \begin_inset space ~
50893 \begin_layout Subsection
50894 View (Other Formats)
50897 \begin_layout Standard
50898 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
50899 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the actual document with an external program.
50900 The menu entries are not the same on all installations —
50901 it depends on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50902 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
50904 All possible formats are listed in section
50905 \begin_inset space ~
50909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50911 reference "subsec:Export"
50917 You should at least see the menu entry
50923 you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
50925 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
50927 \begin_inset space ~
50931 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50933 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
50939 \begin_inset Index idx
50944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50945 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
50954 \begin_layout Standard
50955 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
50956 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
50958 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
50959 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
50961 \begin_inset space ~
50964 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
50966 \begin_inset space ~
50969 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
50974 \begin_inset space ~
50978 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50980 reference "sec:File-Formats"
50986 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
50987 when it is first configured.
50990 \begin_layout Subsection
50992 \begin_inset space ~
50998 \begin_layout Standard
50999 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
51002 \begin_layout Subsection
51003 Update (Other Formats)
51006 \begin_layout Standard
51007 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of your document without opening a new viewer window.
51010 \begin_layout Subsection
51011 View Master Document
51014 \begin_layout Standard
51015 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
51017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51031 \begin_inset space ~
51036 manual for more information on this topic).
51037 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
51039 if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a book,
51043 \begin_inset space ~
51047 \begin_inset space ~
51052 generates the output of the whole book,
51057 will just output the chapter alone.
51060 \begin_layout Standard
51061 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified in the document settings (menu
51063 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51064 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
51065 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
51067 \begin_inset space ~
51071 \begin_inset space ~
51078 \begin_inset space ~
51082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51084 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
51089 ) or in the preferences (menu
51091 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
51092 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
51094 \begin_inset space ~
51097 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
51099 \begin_inset space ~
51102 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
51104 \begin_inset space ~
51108 \begin_inset space ~
51115 \begin_inset space ~
51119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51121 reference "sec:File-Formats"
51129 \begin_layout Subsection
51130 Update Master Document
51133 \begin_layout Standard
51134 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
51136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51150 \begin_inset space ~
51155 manual for more information on this topic).
51156 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
51159 \begin_layout Standard
51160 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified in the document settings (menu
51162 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51163 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
51164 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
51166 \begin_inset space ~
51170 \begin_inset space ~
51177 \begin_inset space ~
51181 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51183 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
51188 ) or in the preferences (menu
51190 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
51191 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
51193 \begin_inset space ~
51196 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
51198 \begin_inset space ~
51201 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
51203 \begin_inset space ~
51207 \begin_inset space ~
51214 \begin_inset space ~
51218 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51220 reference "sec:File-Formats"
51228 \begin_layout Subsection
51230 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51232 name "subsec:Compressed"
51239 \begin_layout Standard
51240 Un/compresses the current document.
51241 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable compression (see the
51243 Additional Features
51245 manual for details).
51248 \begin_layout Subsection
51252 \begin_layout Standard
51253 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
51256 \begin_layout Subsection
51260 \begin_layout Standard
51261 The document settings are described in appendix
51262 \begin_inset space ~
51266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51268 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
51276 \begin_layout Section
51278 \begin_inset Index idx
51283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51285 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51302 \begin_layout Subsection
51306 \begin_layout Standard
51307 Spell checking is explained in section
51308 \begin_inset space ~
51312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51314 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
51322 \begin_layout Subsection
51326 \begin_layout Standard
51327 The thesaurus is described in section
51328 \begin_inset space ~
51332 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51334 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
51342 \begin_layout Subsection
51344 \begin_inset Index idx
51349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51356 \begin_inset Index idx
51361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51370 \begin_layout Standard
51371 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or the highlighted document part.
51374 \begin_layout Subsection
51380 \begin_inset Index idx
51385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51386 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
51395 \begin_layout Standard
51396 Generates with the help of the program
51398 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
51401 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
51402 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
51403 This feature is not available on Windows.
51406 \begin_layout Subsection
51412 \begin_inset Index idx
51417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51427 \begin_layout Standard
51428 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
51433 \begin_inset space ~
51438 to see the full filename paths.
51441 \begin_layout Subsection
51443 \begin_inset Index idx
51448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51457 \begin_layout Standard
51458 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
51459 files as described in section
51460 \begin_inset space ~
51464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51466 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
51474 \begin_layout Subsection
51476 \begin_inset Index idx
51481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51484 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51494 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
51497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51498 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
51510 \begin_inset Index idx
51515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51516 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
51525 \begin_layout Standard
51526 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
51530 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
51531 -packages and programs it needs;
51533 \begin_inset space ~
51537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51539 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
51547 \begin_layout Subsection
51551 \begin_layout Standard
51556 dialog as described in detail in appendix
51557 \begin_inset space ~
51561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51563 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
51571 \begin_layout Section
51573 \begin_inset Index idx
51578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51580 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51597 \begin_layout Standard
51598 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
51599 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
51601 If a file is not available in this language,
51602 the English version will be listed.
51605 \begin_layout Standard
51609 \begin_inset space ~
51614 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
51615 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51616 packages and classes found by \SpecialChar LyX
51618 \begin_inset space ~
51622 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51624 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
51632 \begin_layout Standard
51636 \begin_inset space ~
51641 gives information about the copyright,
51642 the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
51643 version you are using.
51646 \begin_layout Section
51648 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51650 name "sec:Toolbars"
51657 \begin_layout Standard
51658 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
51659 \begin_inset space ~
51663 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51665 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
51673 \begin_layout Standard
51674 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
51675 This is described in the
51677 Additional Features
51682 \begin_layout Subsection
51684 \begin_inset Index idx
51689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51691 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51708 \begin_layout Standard
51709 \begin_inset Graphics
51710 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
51718 \begin_layout Standard
51719 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
51725 \begin_layout Standard
51726 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following buttons:
51730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51742 \begin_inset Note Note
51745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51746 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
51751 manual for more information.
51759 \begin_layout Standard
51760 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
51766 \begin_layout Standard
51767 \begin_inset Tabular
51768 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
51769 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
51770 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
51771 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
51773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51777 \begin_inset Graphics
51778 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
51788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51792 pull-down box for the environments
51805 \begin_layout Standard
51806 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
51812 \begin_layout Standard
51814 \begin_inset Tabular
51815 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
51816 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
51817 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
51818 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
51819 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51842 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51849 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51872 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51879 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51902 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51909 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51918 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
51926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51932 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
51939 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51948 arg "spelling-continuously"
51956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51960 Spellcheck continuously
51966 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51989 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
51996 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52019 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52026 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52049 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52056 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52079 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52086 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52109 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52111 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
52116 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52125 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52134 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
52142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52148 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52150 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52154 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52158 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52167 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52174 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
52182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52188 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52190 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52194 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52198 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52207 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52216 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
52224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52230 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
52231 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
52238 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52261 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
52264 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52266 \begin_inset space ~
52269 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
52271 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
52277 arg "dialog-show character"
52288 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52309 Set text to noun style,
52311 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
52314 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52316 \begin_inset space ~
52319 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
52321 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
52327 arg "dialog-show character"
52338 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52344 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
52347 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
52355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52360 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
52363 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52370 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52376 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
52381 arg "textstyle-apply"
52391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52396 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
52397 Format text using the current settings in the
52399 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52401 \begin_inset space ~
52404 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
52415 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52438 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52439 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
52441 \begin_inset space ~
52450 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52459 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
52467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52473 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52480 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52487 arg "tabular-insert"
52495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52501 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52508 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52514 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
52517 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
52525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52530 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
52533 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52540 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52549 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
52557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52561 Toggle outline window on/off,
52564 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
52571 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52580 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
52588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52592 Toggle math toolbar on/off
52598 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52607 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
52615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52619 Toggle table toolbar on/off
52632 \begin_layout Subsection
52634 \begin_inset Index idx
52639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52641 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52658 \begin_layout Standard
52659 \begin_inset Graphics
52660 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
52668 \begin_layout Standard
52669 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
52675 \begin_layout Standard
52676 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following buttons:
52679 \begin_layout Standard
52680 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
52686 \begin_layout Standard
52687 \begin_inset Tabular
52688 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
52689 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
52690 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
52691 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
52692 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52719 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52728 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
52736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52746 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52755 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
52763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52773 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52782 arg "layout-toggle List"
52790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52800 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52809 arg "layout-toggle Description"
52817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52827 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52836 arg "depth-increment"
52844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52850 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52852 \begin_inset space ~
52856 \begin_inset space ~
52865 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52874 arg "depth-decrement"
52882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52888 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52890 \begin_inset space ~
52894 \begin_inset space ~
52903 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52912 arg "float-insert figure"
52920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52926 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52927 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
52934 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52943 arg "float-insert table"
52951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52957 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52958 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
52965 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52988 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52995 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53004 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
53012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53018 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53025 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53034 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
53042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53048 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53055 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53078 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53080 \begin_inset space ~
53089 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53098 arg "nomencl-insert"
53106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53112 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53114 \begin_inset space ~
53123 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53132 arg "footnote-insert"
53140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53146 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53153 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53162 arg "marginalnote-insert"
53170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53176 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53178 \begin_inset space ~
53187 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53210 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53211 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
53213 \begin_inset space ~
53222 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53231 arg "box-insert Frameless"
53239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53245 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53252 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53275 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53282 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53305 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53307 \begin_inset space ~
53316 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53325 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
53333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53339 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53340 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
53347 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53356 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
53364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53370 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53371 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
53373 \begin_inset space ~
53382 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53391 arg "dialog-show character"
53399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53405 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
53407 \begin_inset space ~
53410 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
53417 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53423 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
53428 arg "textstyle-apply"
53436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53441 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
53442 Format text using the recent settings in the
53445 arg "dialog-show character"
53454 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53463 arg "layout-paragraph"
53471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53477 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
53479 \begin_inset space ~
53488 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53497 arg "thesaurus-entry"
53505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53511 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
53525 \begin_layout Subsection
53526 View/Update Toolbar
53527 \begin_inset Index idx
53532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53534 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53551 \begin_layout Standard
53552 \begin_inset Graphics
53553 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
53560 \begin_layout Standard
53561 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
53567 \begin_layout Standard
53568 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following buttons:
53571 \begin_layout Standard
53572 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
53578 \begin_layout Standard
53579 \begin_inset Tabular
53580 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
53581 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
53582 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
53583 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
53584 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53607 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53614 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53623 arg "buffer-update"
53631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53637 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53644 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53653 arg "master-buffer-view"
53661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53667 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53669 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333746
53671 \begin_inset space ~
53677 \begin_inset space ~
53686 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53695 arg "master-buffer-update"
53703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53709 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53711 \begin_inset space ~
53715 \begin_inset space ~
53724 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53733 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
53741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53747 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53748 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
53750 \change_deleted -131811572 1600333766
53752 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333762
53755 \SpecialChar menuseparator
53756 Synchronize with Output
53762 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53773 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
53783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53789 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53790 View (Other Formats)
53796 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53803 arg "update-others"
53807 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
53815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53821 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53822 Update (Other Formats)
53835 \begin_layout Standard
53837 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
53838 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default icon set.
53843 \begin_layout Subsection
53847 \begin_layout Standard
53848 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
53849 \begin_inset space ~
53853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53855 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
53862 \begin_inset Index idx
53867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53869 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53886 \begin_inset space ~
53891 manual and the math macro toolbar
53892 \begin_inset Index idx
53897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53899 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53920 \begin_layout Chapter
53921 The Document Settings
53922 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53924 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
53929 \begin_inset Index idx
53934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53936 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53953 \begin_layout Standard
53957 \begin_inset space ~
53962 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and is called with the menu
53964 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53968 You can save your document settings as default with the
53970 Save as Document Defaults
53972 button in any dialog.
53973 This will create a template named
53977 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
53978 when you create a new document without using a template.
53981 \begin_layout Standard
53986 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
53987 This affects mostly class options,
53988 the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
53991 \begin_layout Standard
53992 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
53993 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while to find the one you are looking for.
53994 To find a setting quicker,
53995 you can use the search field which is above the submenus of the dialog.
53997 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54001 \begin_inset space \space{}
54005 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54009 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54013 you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
54014 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
54015 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
54018 \begin_layout Section
54022 \begin_layout Standard
54023 Here you set the document class,
54026 and a master document.
54027 Document classes are described in section
54028 \begin_inset space ~
54032 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54034 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
54042 \begin_layout Standard
54046 \begin_inset space ~
54051 you can load you own layout-file,
54052 that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
54057 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
54058 as a layout for a document class.
54059 For more about layout-files,
54062 Installing New Document Classes,
54063 Types of Layout Files
54072 \begin_layout Standard
54073 Some classes use special class options by default.
54074 If this is the case,
54075 they are listed in the field
54079 and you can decide to use them or not.
54080 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for,
54081 it is recommended you leave them untouched.
54086 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
54088 color and page layout packages.
54094 the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54096 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are doing.
54100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54101 When you want to use one of the following drivers
54102 \begin_inset Newline newline
54116 \begin_inset Newline newline
54119 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
54126 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54128 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
54141 \begin_layout Standard
54146 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
54147 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
54148 in the background if the child document is opened without its master.
54149 This way child documents are always compilable.
54150 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
54157 \begin_inset space ~
54165 \begin_layout Standard
54166 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54176 \begin_inset Index idx
54181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54184 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54199 \begin_inset Index idx
54204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54207 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54221 for cross-references,
54223 \begin_inset space ~
54227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54229 reference "sec:Cross-References"
54237 \begin_layout Section
54241 \begin_layout Standard
54242 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
54243 Please refer to the section
54246 \begin_inset space ~
54254 \begin_inset space ~
54259 manual for details.
54262 \begin_layout Section
54266 \begin_layout Standard
54267 Modules are explained in section
54268 \begin_inset space ~
54272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54274 reference "subsec:Modules"
54282 \begin_layout Section
54286 \begin_layout Standard
54288 \begin_inset space ~
54292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54294 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
54302 \begin_layout Section
54306 \begin_layout Standard
54307 The document font settings are described in section
54308 \begin_inset space ~
54312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54314 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
54322 \begin_layout Section
54326 \begin_layout Standard
54327 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
54339 \begin_inset space ~
54344 and whether it should be a
54347 \begin_inset space ~
54352 can also be specified here.
54355 \begin_layout Standard
54356 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
54357 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
54358 That would be impractical,
54360 and is not part of the WYSIWYM concept.
54362 it will be as you specified in the output.
54365 \begin_layout Standard
54368 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
54371 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
54372 justifies the text on screen.
54373 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
54375 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
54379 \begin_layout Standard
54381 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
54390 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
54395 \begin_layout Section
54399 \begin_layout Standard
54400 This dialog is described in sections
54401 \begin_inset space ~
54405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54407 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
54413 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54415 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
54423 \begin_layout Section
54427 \begin_layout Standard
54428 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
54429 \begin_inset space ~
54433 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54435 reference "subsec:Margins"
54443 \begin_layout Section
54445 \begin_inset CommandInset label
54447 name "sec:Language-encodings"
54452 \begin_inset Index idx
54457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54459 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54476 \begin_layout Standard
54477 The document language and quote styles are set here.
54478 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
54479 (the \SpecialChar LyX
54480 file is always encoded in utf8).
54481 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
54482 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
54483 -command is not known for a particular character).
54484 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
54488 \begin_layout Standard
54490 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
54493 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
54494 files in Unicode – or utf8,
54495 for that matter (which is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
54496 's default encoding).
54497 This should normally fit your needs,
54498 since \SpecialChar LaTeX
54499 's Unicode support covers the characters of most scripts.
54500 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive,
54501 so there might be cases where using one of the traditional,
54503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54511 encodings is necessary.
54514 \begin_layout Standard
54516 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
54518 provides support for these traditional encodings.
54521 Traditional (auto-selected)
54529 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for the given language(s).
54531 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
54535 \begin_layout Standard
54537 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
54538 If you use the option
54544 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
54547 If the document contains text in more than one language you
54548 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
54551 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54554 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
54555 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use exactly one encoding.
54556 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
54561 \begin_layout Standard
54563 \change_deleted 630872221 1621942852
54572 any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
54574 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
54578 \begin_layout Standard
54580 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
54582 you can also select
54587 which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
54588 Note that this encoding is then used for
54593 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation below).
54596 \begin_layout Standard
54598 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
54600 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943769
54604 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943773
54605 Do not load inputenc
54606 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
54610 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943234
54612 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943236
54614 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
54616 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943278
54617 in the next dropdown menu
54618 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
54619 does what it states:
54621 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943783
54623 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943782
54625 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
54626 t prevents \SpecialChar LyX
54627 from automatically loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54633 \begin_inset Index idx
54638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54640 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
54645 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54650 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
54664 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
54666 you probably need to load some additional packages manually in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign languages in \SpecialChar TeX
54668 Note that this option is only available for the standard
54674 Traditional (auto-selected)
54681 \begin_layout Standard
54683 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
54685 also supports Unicode output,
54686 which is particularly useful if you need lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts,
54688 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
54689 installation supports Unicode),
54690 choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
54691 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
54692 is quite incomplete,
54693 so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine with
54697 (when \SpecialChar LyX
54698 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
54700 but does not work with a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
54701 -commands is not used,
54702 because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
54703 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
54704 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
54706 two new alternative engines to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
54708 Both engines support Unicode natively.
54710 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
54713 \begin_inset space ~
54722 \begin_inset space ~
54730 \begin_inset space ~
54737 \begin_inset space ~
54741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54743 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
54749 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
54754 you might try out one of these new engines.
54759 \begin_layout Standard
54763 \begin_inset space ~
54768 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54769 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation of strings like
54770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54778 The possible settings are:
54781 \begin_layout Description
54782 Default uses the language package that is selected in
54784 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
54785 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
54789 \begin_inset space ~
54793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54795 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
54803 \begin_layout Description
54804 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export format you will use.
54805 In many cases this will be
54810 \begin_inset Index idx
54815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54818 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54833 If the newer package
54838 \begin_inset Index idx
54843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54846 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54860 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
54861 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
54862 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
54864 this package will be used instead of
54871 \begin_layout Description
54873 \begin_inset space ~
54884 would be more appropriate.
54887 \begin_layout Description
54888 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
54889 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
54893 (for German texts),
54897 \begin_inset Newline newline
54902 usepackage{ngerman}
54905 \begin_layout Description
54906 None will not use a language package.
54907 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
54910 \begin_layout Standard
54911 Here is a list with the important encodings:
54914 \begin_layout Description
54916 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
54918 \begin_inset space ~
54922 \begin_inset space ~
54926 \begin_inset space ~
54934 but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54940 \begin_inset Index idx
54945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54948 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54964 you probably need to load some additional packages manually in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign languages in \SpecialChar TeX
54970 \begin_layout Description
54971 ASCII the ASCII encoding,
54972 covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
54974 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
54976 which may result in a big file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
54977 -commands are needed.
54979 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943931
54980 This is the same as the
54993 \begin_layout Description
54995 \begin_inset space ~
54999 \begin_inset space ~
55002 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
55005 \begin_layout Description
55007 \begin_inset space ~
55011 \begin_inset space ~
55014 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
55017 \begin_layout Description
55019 \begin_inset space ~
55022 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
55025 \begin_layout Description
55027 \begin_inset space ~
55031 \begin_inset space ~
55034 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian,
55035 Latvian and Lithuanian,
55036 the same as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
55039 \begin_layout Description
55041 \begin_inset space ~
55045 \begin_inset space ~
55048 8859-13) for Estonian,
55049 Latvian and Lithuanian,
55050 a superset of the ISO-8859-4 encoding
55053 \begin_layout Description
55055 \begin_inset space ~
55059 \begin_inset space ~
55062 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian,
55063 Latvian and Lithuanian,
55064 a subset of the ISO-8859-13 encoding
55067 \begin_layout Description
55069 \begin_inset space ~
55073 \begin_inset space ~
55077 \begin_inset space ~
55080 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
55081 \begin_inset space ~
55087 \begin_layout Description
55089 \begin_inset space ~
55093 \begin_inset space ~
55097 \begin_inset space ~
55100 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian,
55107 Slovak and Slovenian
55110 \begin_layout Description
55112 \begin_inset space ~
55116 \begin_inset space ~
55119 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese,
55120 used especially on UNIX OSes,
55121 since 2001 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030,
55122 as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
55123 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
55124 \begin_inset space ~
55128 \begin_inset space ~
55134 \begin_layout Description
55136 \begin_inset space ~
55140 \begin_inset space ~
55143 (GBK) for simplified Chinese,
55144 is the same as the Windows code page CP 936 except for the Euro currency sign,
55145 since 2001 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030,
55146 as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
55147 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
55148 \begin_inset space ~
55152 \begin_inset space ~
55158 \begin_layout Description
55160 \begin_inset space ~
55164 \begin_inset space ~
55167 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
55170 \begin_layout Description
55172 \begin_inset space ~
55176 \begin_inset space ~
55179 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
55182 \begin_layout Description
55184 \begin_inset space ~
55188 \begin_inset space ~
55191 8859-5) covers Belorussian,
55194 Serbian and Ukrainian
55197 \begin_layout Description
55199 \begin_inset space ~
55202 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
55205 \begin_layout Description
55207 \begin_inset space ~
55210 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
55213 \begin_layout Description
55215 \begin_inset space ~
55219 \begin_inset space ~
55222 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
55225 \begin_layout Description
55227 \begin_inset space ~
55231 \begin_inset space ~
55237 \begin_layout Description
55239 \begin_inset space ~
55243 \begin_inset space ~
55246 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew,
55247 a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
55250 \begin_layout Description
55252 \begin_inset space ~
55256 \begin_inset space ~
55262 \begin_layout Description
55264 \begin_inset space ~
55268 \begin_inset space ~
55271 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese,
55272 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55278 \begin_inset Index idx
55283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55286 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55302 set the document language to
55307 \begin_layout Description
55309 \begin_inset space ~
55313 \begin_inset space ~
55316 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese,
55317 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55324 set the document language to
55327 \begin_inset space ~
55333 \begin_layout Description
55335 \begin_inset space ~
55339 \begin_inset space ~
55342 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese,
55343 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55349 \begin_inset Index idx
55354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55357 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55373 set the document language to
55378 \begin_layout Description
55380 \begin_inset space ~
55384 \begin_inset space ~
55387 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese,
55388 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55395 set the document language to
55400 \begin_layout Description
55402 \begin_inset space ~
55406 \begin_inset space ~
55409 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese,
55410 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55417 set the document language to
55422 \begin_layout Description
55424 \begin_inset space ~
55427 (EUC-KR) for Korean
55430 \begin_layout Description
55432 \begin_inset space ~
55436 \begin_inset space ~
55440 \begin_inset space ~
55443 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto,
55445 Maltese and Turkish
55448 \begin_layout Description
55450 \begin_inset space ~
55454 \begin_inset space ~
55458 \begin_inset space ~
55461 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian,
55470 Romanian and Slovenian,
55471 is designed to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
55474 \begin_layout Description
55476 \begin_inset space ~
55480 \begin_inset space ~
55486 \begin_layout Description
55488 \begin_inset space ~
55492 \begin_inset space ~
55495 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish,
55496 is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
55499 \begin_layout Description
55501 \begin_inset space ~
55505 \begin_inset space ~
55508 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55514 \begin_inset Index idx
55519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55522 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55536 (for the languages Chinese,
55537 Japanese and Korean)
55538 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
55540 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
55541 with the default encoding (
55543 Unicode (utf8) [default]
55549 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
55550 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
55555 \begin_layout Description
55557 \begin_inset space ~
55565 \begin_inset space ~
55568 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
55575 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
55579 which use Unicode directly,
55580 without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55587 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
55588 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
55590 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
55593 \begin_layout Description
55595 \begin_inset space ~
55599 \begin_inset space ~
55602 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55608 \begin_inset Index idx
55613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55616 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55631 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
55637 Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
55639 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
55640 This used to be more comprehensive than
55643 \begin_inset space ~
55649 but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
55654 \begin_layout Description
55656 \begin_inset space ~
55659 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55665 \begin_inset Index idx
55670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55673 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55689 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
55690 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts) is supported.
55691 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
55692 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
55693 with the default encoding (
55695 Unicode (utf8) [default]
55701 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
55702 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
55707 \begin_layout Description
55709 \begin_inset space ~
55713 \begin_inset space ~
55717 \begin_inset space ~
55720 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
55721 \begin_inset space ~
55727 \begin_layout Description
55729 \begin_inset space ~
55733 \begin_inset space ~
55737 \begin_inset space ~
55740 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian,
55755 Spanish and Swedish;
55756 better use the ISO-8859-15 encoding instead
55759 \begin_layout Description
55761 \begin_inset space ~
55765 \begin_inset space ~
55769 \begin_inset space ~
55772 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding,
55773 but with the Euro currency sign,
55774 the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
55777 \begin_layout Section
55779 \begin_inset Index idx
55784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55786 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55801 \begin_inset Index idx
55806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55808 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55823 \begin_inset Index idx
55828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55830 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55845 \begin_inset Index idx
55850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55852 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55869 \begin_layout Standard
55870 Here you can alter the font color for the
55879 \begin_inset space ~
55885 light grey)for the background color for the
55893 \begin_inset space ~
55904 sets the color back to the default.
55907 \begin_layout Standard
55908 Clicking any button showing
55916 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
55917 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them later more quickly.
55920 \begin_layout Standard
55925 \begin_inset space ~
55930 font color and use the option
55933 \begin_inset space ~
55938 in the document settings under
55941 \begin_inset space ~
55947 you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
55948 \begin_inset space ~
55952 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55954 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
55962 \begin_layout Standard
55963 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
55969 \begin_layout Standard
55973 \begin_inset space ~
55982 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as \SpecialChar TeX
55984 \begin_inset space ~
55987 Code after a forced page break:
55990 \begin_layout Itemize
55991 For the page color:
55992 \begin_inset Newline newline
55999 pagecolor{color name}
56002 \begin_layout Itemize
56003 For the text color:
56004 \begin_inset Newline newline
56014 \begin_layout Standard
56015 You are restricted to one of
56057 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
56064 \begin_inset space ~
56070 \begin_inset Newline newline
56073 If you have changed a text or background color,
56074 you can use the following names to refer to them:
56077 \begin_layout Itemize
56083 \begin_inset Newline newline
56088 page_backgroundcolor
56091 \begin_layout Itemize
56095 \begin_inset space ~
56101 \begin_inset Newline newline
56109 \begin_layout Itemize
56113 \begin_inset space ~
56119 \begin_inset Newline newline
56127 \begin_layout Itemize
56131 \begin_inset space ~
56137 \begin_inset Newline newline
56145 \begin_layout Standard
56146 To see how to define and use custom colors,
56150 \begin_inset space ~
56158 \begin_inset space ~
56166 \begin_layout Section
56168 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
56172 \begin_layout Standard
56174 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
56175 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
56176 \begin_inset space ~
56180 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56182 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
56191 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar,
56192 you can set here whether changes are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
56195 \begin_layout Standard
56197 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
56200 \change_inserted 630872221 1622044204
56203 \change_deleted 630872221 1622044196
56205 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
56206 to place a change bar in the margin of the output.
56207 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
56210 \begin_layout Section
56214 \begin_layout Standard
56215 Here you can adjust the
56219 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
56223 as described in section
56224 \begin_inset space ~
56228 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56230 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
56236 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
56240 \begin_layout Standard
56242 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
56243 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox at the bottom.
56244 The functionality is handled by package lineno and additional options of this package can be used as well.
56245 The most common one are:
56248 \begin_layout Description
56250 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
56251 right Line numbers to the right margin
56254 \begin_layout Description
56256 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
56257 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages,
56261 \begin_layout Description
56263 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
56264 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
56267 \begin_layout Description
56269 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989692
56270 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
56273 \begin_layout Description
56275 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989752
56276 pagewise Restart numbering for each page
56279 \begin_layout Description
56281 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
56283 \begin_inset space ~
56286 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
56291 \begin_layout Section
56295 \begin_layout Standard
56296 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
56302 \begin_inset Index idx
56307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56310 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56330 \begin_inset Index idx
56335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56338 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56357 \begin_inset Index idx
56362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56365 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56380 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
56384 Sectioned bibliography
56386 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
56392 \begin_inset Index idx
56397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56400 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56420 you can select the style files and specify further options.
56422 you can select a document-specific
56426 for the generation of the bibliography.
56427 For a further description of these possibilities see section
56428 \begin_inset space ~
56432 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56434 reference "sec:Bibliography"
56442 \begin_layout Section
56446 \begin_layout Standard
56447 Here you can define the
56451 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see section
56452 \begin_inset space ~
56456 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56458 reference "sec:Index"
56466 \begin_layout Section
56470 \begin_layout Standard
56471 The PDF properties are explained in section
56472 \begin_inset space ~
56476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56478 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
56486 \begin_layout Section
56490 \begin_layout Standard
56491 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
56492 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
56498 \begin_inset Index idx
56503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56506 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56526 \begin_inset Index idx
56531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56534 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56554 \begin_inset Index idx
56559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56562 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56582 \begin_inset Index idx
56587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56590 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56610 \begin_inset Index idx
56615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56618 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56638 \begin_inset Index idx
56643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56646 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56666 \begin_inset Index idx
56671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56674 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56694 \begin_inset Index idx
56699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56702 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56722 \begin_inset Index idx
56727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56730 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56749 \begin_inset Index idx
56754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56757 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56772 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
56775 \begin_layout Description
56776 amsmath is needed for many constructs,
56777 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
56778 -errors in formulas,
56779 ensure that you have this enabled.
56782 \begin_layout Description
56783 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek letters,
56784 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
56785 -errors in formulas,
56786 ensure that you have this enabled.
56789 \begin_layout Description
56790 cancel is used for canceled formulas,
56794 \begin_inset space ~
56806 \begin_layout Description
56807 esint is used for special integral characters,
56811 \begin_inset space ~
56823 \begin_layout Description
56824 mathdots is used for special ellipses,
56836 \begin_layout Description
56837 mathtools is used for the math commands
56878 and labeled arrows,
56879 see the corresponding sections in the
56886 \begin_layout Description
56887 mhchem is used for chemical equations,
56890 Chemical Symbols and Equations
56899 \begin_layout Description
56900 stackrel is used for the math command
56918 \begin_layout Description
56919 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
56922 \begin_layout Description
56923 undertilde is used for the math command
56932 Accents for one Character
56941 \begin_layout Section
56943 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
56945 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
56951 \begin_layout Standard
56953 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
56954 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
56957 \begin_layout Standard
56959 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
56960 The float placement options
56961 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
56964 are described in the section
56967 \begin_inset space ~
56971 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
56973 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
56981 \begin_inset space ~
56989 \begin_layout Section
56993 \begin_layout Standard
56994 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
56996 Program Code Listings
57001 \begin_inset space ~
57009 \begin_layout Section
57013 \begin_layout Standard
57014 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
57023 set to be used and set the
57028 The itemize environment is described in section
57029 \begin_inset space ~
57033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57035 reference "sec:Itemize"
57043 \begin_layout Standard
57044 You can furthermore specify a
57047 \begin_inset space ~
57052 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57053 command of the desired character.
57054 For example to use the € sign,
57055 you have to insert the command
57062 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
57064 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
57068 \begin_inset space \space{}
57072 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
57082 To find the command for a math symbol,
57083 create a formula and hover the mouse over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
57086 \begin_layout Standard
57087 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
57090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57096 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
57097 -packages in the preamble (menu
57099 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
57100 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
57103 \begin_inset space ~
57109 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
57113 usepackage{textcomp}
57116 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
57120 usepackage{amssymb}
57130 \begin_layout Section
57134 \begin_layout Standard
57135 Branches are described in section
57136 \begin_inset space ~
57140 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57142 reference "sec:Branches"
57150 \begin_layout Section
57152 \change_deleted 5863208 1685691759
57154 \change_inserted 5863208 1685691762
57158 \begin_inset CommandInset label
57160 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
57167 \begin_layout Standard
57168 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
57171 \begin_layout Description
57173 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692056
57175 \begin_inset space ~
57180 Save transient properties
57182 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that are specific to the user are saved with the document.
57183 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
57187 \begin_layout Itemize
57189 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692056
57190 the activation of change tracking
57193 \begin_layout Itemize
57195 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692056
57196 the output of tracked changes
57199 \begin_layout Itemize
57201 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692056
57202 the recording of the document directory path.
57205 \begin_layout Standard
57207 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692056
57208 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts)
57212 \begin_layout Description
57214 \begin_inset space ~
57218 \begin_inset space ~
57222 The format that is used when you enter
57223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57244 View Master Document
57245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57252 Update Master Document
57253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57260 menu or the toolbar.
57261 The default is set in
57263 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
57264 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
57266 \begin_inset space ~
57269 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
57274 \begin_inset space ~
57278 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57280 reference "sec:File-Formats"
57288 \begin_layout Description
57290 \change_deleted 5863208 1685692088
57292 \begin_inset space ~
57296 \begin_inset space ~
57300 \begin_inset space ~
57303 programs If this is switched on,
57309 option which is needed with some packages.
57310 Note that this comes with security risks,
57311 so please use this only when really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
57312 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647276
57316 \begin_layout Description
57318 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647006
57320 \begin_inset space ~
57324 \begin_inset space ~
57327 Options offers settings for the
57335 \begin_layout Itemize
57339 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646679
57341 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646679
57343 \begin_inset space ~
57349 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646686
57351 \begin_inset space ~
57355 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646686
57361 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646719
57363 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646729
57364 settings for the menu
57366 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
57370 \begin_inset space ~
57374 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646752
57377 and allows to customize the macro used in this process
57378 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646757
57383 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
57385 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646759
57387 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
57390 or a detailed description see section
57392 Reverse DVI/PDF search
57397 \begin_inset space ~
57403 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646762
57407 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647009
57411 \begin_layout Itemize
57413 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647929
57416 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
57418 determines whether so-called
57419 \begin_inset Quotes els
57423 \begin_inset Quotes ers
57427 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
57428 \begin_inset Quotes els
57432 \begin_inset Quotes ers
57435 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
57436 (such as sections or captions),
57437 even if the corresponding insets are placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
57439 This setting is on by default,
57440 since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
57442 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic macros,
57443 you can uncheck this.
57444 If you don't know what we are talking about here,
57446 just leave it checked.
57452 \begin_layout Description
57454 \begin_inset space ~
57458 \begin_inset space ~
57461 Options offers settings for the export format
57469 \begin_inset space ~
57474 will assure that the output follows exactly version
57475 \begin_inset space ~
57478 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
57482 \begin_inset space ~
57487 settings are described in detail in section
57489 Math Output in XHTML
57494 \begin_inset space ~
57503 \begin_inset space ~
57507 \begin_inset space ~
57512 is used for the size of equations in the output.
57513 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692496
57517 \begin_layout Description
57519 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692661
57521 \begin_inset space ~
57525 \begin_inset space ~
57528 Options offers settings for the export format
57531 The details for the options are described in the chapter
57537 Additional Features
57544 \begin_layout Description
57546 \change_deleted 5863208 1685692051
57548 \begin_inset space ~
57553 Save transient properties
57555 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that are specific to the user are saved with the document.
57556 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
57560 \begin_layout Itemize
57562 \change_deleted 5863208 1685692051
57563 the activation of change tracking
57566 \begin_layout Itemize
57568 \change_deleted 5863208 1685692051
57569 the output of tracked changes
57572 \begin_layout Itemize
57574 \change_deleted 5863208 1685692051
57575 the recording of the document directory path.
57578 \begin_layout Standard
57580 \change_deleted 5863208 1685692051
57581 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts)
57584 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692091
57589 \begin_layout Description
57591 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692091
57593 \begin_inset space ~
57597 \begin_inset space ~
57601 \begin_inset space ~
57604 programs If this is switched on,
57610 option which is needed with some packages.
57611 Note that this comes with security risks,
57612 so please use this only when really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
57617 \begin_layout Section
57625 \begin_layout Standard
57626 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
57627 -packages or to define \SpecialChar LaTeX
57629 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
57631 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are doing.
57634 \begin_layout Standard
57635 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57636 -syntax is given in section
57637 \begin_inset space ~
57641 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57643 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
57651 \begin_layout Chapter
57657 \begin_inset CommandInset label
57659 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
57664 \begin_inset Index idx
57669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57678 \begin_layout Standard
57679 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
57681 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
57685 It has the following submenus.
57688 \begin_layout Section
57692 \begin_layout Subsection
57696 \begin_layout Subsubsection
57697 User Interface File
57698 \begin_inset Index idx
57703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57705 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57720 \begin_inset Index idx
57725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57727 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57744 \begin_layout Standard
57745 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user interface (ui) file.
57746 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
57754 \begin_layout Description
57759 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
57762 \begin_layout Description
57769 the menu entries in popup context menus
57772 \begin_layout Description
57777 specifies the toolbar buttons
57780 \begin_layout Standard
57781 To create your own menu and toolbar layout,
57782 start with a copy of these files and edit the entries.
57785 \begin_layout Standard
57786 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward:
57800 entries must be finished with an explicit
57830 and in the case of the
57831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57843 The syntax for the entries is:
57846 \begin_layout Standard
57847 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
57853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57876 \begin_layout Standard
57878 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
57881 All the \SpecialChar LyX
57882 -functions are listed in the menu
57884 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
57886 \begin_inset space ~
57894 \begin_layout Standard
57895 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
57901 \begin_layout Standard
57903 assuming you use the menu
57905 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
57908 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks,
57909 you can add the line
57912 \begin_layout Standard
57913 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
57919 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57927 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57931 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57937 \begin_layout Standard
57939 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
57943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57954 to have the sixth bookmark.
57957 \begin_layout Standard
57961 \begin_inset space ~
57966 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
57967 's toolbar buttons.
57968 The currently available icon sets are compared in
57969 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57972 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
57980 \begin_layout Subsubsection
57984 \begin_layout Standard
57987 Enable tool tips in main work area
57989 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries or footnotes.
57992 \begin_layout Subsubsection
57996 \begin_layout Standard
58001 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
58002 should display in the menu
58004 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
58006 \begin_inset space ~
58012 \change_inserted 5863208 1686648655
58016 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58018 \change_inserted 5863208 1686648655
58022 \begin_layout Standard
58024 \change_inserted 5863208 1686648655
58025 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
58030 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
58031 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen;
58032 the text then appears centered.
58037 \begin_layout Subsection
58041 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58045 \begin_layout Standard
58048 Restore window layouts and geometries
58051 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in the last \SpecialChar LyX
58055 \begin_layout Standard
58058 Restore cursor positions
58060 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of the last session.
58063 \begin_layout Standard
58066 Load opened files from last session
58068 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
58072 \begin_layout Standard
58075 Clear all session information
58077 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
58078 sessions (cursor positions,
58079 names of last opened documents,
58083 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58085 \begin_inset CommandInset label
58087 name "subsec:Backup documents"
58092 \begin_inset Index idx
58097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58099 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58116 \begin_layout Standard
58119 Backup original documents when saving
58121 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was
58122 \change_deleted -712698321 1676618729
58123 opened or when it was
58125 saved the last time.
58126 It is stored in the
58129 \begin_inset space ~
58135 \begin_inset space ~
58139 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58141 reference "sec:Paths"
58146 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
58149 \begin_inset space ~
58155 The backup file has the file extension
58156 \change_deleted -712698321 1676618692
58160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58166 \change_deleted -712698321 1676618694
58170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58174 \change_inserted -712698321 1676618670
58175 and the same name than the original file.
58179 \begin_inset space ~
58185 the file has the full path in its file name,
58187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58196 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
58202 !MyDir!MySubDir!Filename.lyx~
58205 \change_deleted -712698321 1676618585
58211 \begin_layout Standard
58213 \change_inserted -712698321 1676622933
58216 Make auto-save snapshots every X minutes
58219 LyX furthermore automatically saves snapshots of the current document (including unsaved changes) in the specified interval if there are unsaved changes.
58220 These files which are stored as
58224 in the document's directory are overwritten on each auto-save cycle and deleted when the document is closed normally.
58225 Should \SpecialChar LyX
58226 crash with unsaved changes and the restoration from the emergency file fail,
58227 this file can be used as a resort.
58230 \begin_layout Standard
58232 \change_inserted -712698321 1676623063
58233 Please read section
58234 \begin_inset space ~
58238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58240 reference "sec:Safety-Nets"
58244 for more details on \SpecialChar LyX
58245 's diverse backup and safety mechanisms.
58250 \begin_layout Standard
58252 \change_deleted -712698321 1676619117
58259 you can specify the time between backup saves.
58264 \begin_layout Standard
58267 Save documents compressed by default
58269 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
58270 \begin_inset space ~
58274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58276 reference "subsec:Compressed"
58282 This applies to newly created documents only.
58283 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
58284 \change_inserted -712698321 1676619181
58288 \begin_layout Standard
58290 \change_inserted -712698321 1676619393
58293 Save the document directory path
58295 stores the path of the document in the \SpecialChar LyX
58297 This is particularly handy if you have included files (such as graphics or child documents) which are referred to with relative paths.
58298 The option then allows moving the document elsewhere and still finding these included files if they are still in their original directories.
58303 \begin_layout Standard
58305 \change_deleted -712698321 1676618508
58306 Apart from that LyX autosaves document in regular intervals.
58307 It is used to restore unsaved changes in the document if the program crashes.
58308 The temporary file name is
58317 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58318 Windows & work area
58321 \begin_layout Standard
58324 Open documents in tabs
58327 every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
58331 \begin_layout Standard
58336 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
58341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58343 \begin_inset space ~
58347 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58349 reference "sec:Paths"
58354 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
58363 documents will be opened in the same running instance of \SpecialChar LyX
58365 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
58366 instance is created for each file.
58369 \begin_layout Standard
58372 Single close-tab button
58375 there will only be one close button (
58385 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
58386 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
58387 Regardless of this option,
58388 one can always close a tab by middle-clicking it in the tab bar.
58391 \begin_layout Standard
58392 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
58395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58401 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
58402 before the change takes effect.
58410 \begin_layout Standard
58415 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view is closed.
58416 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
58418 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
58422 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several instances of \SpecialChar LyX
58423 and only want to close the view in once instance.
58426 \begin_layout Subsection
58428 \begin_inset Index idx
58433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58435 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58450 \begin_inset CommandInset label
58452 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
58459 \begin_layout Standard
58460 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
58464 \begin_layout Standard
58465 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
58468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58474 This section only deals with the fonts
58478 the \SpecialChar LyX
58480 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts,
58481 and set in the menu
58483 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
58484 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
58495 \begin_layout Standard
58515 (depends on the system) as its
58518 \begin_inset space ~
58534 \begin_layout Standard
58535 You can change the font size with the
58542 \begin_layout Standard
58547 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
58549 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
58552 points have the size of 1
58553 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
58558 \begin_inset space ~
58562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58564 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
58570 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
58571 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
58575 The sizes are explained in detail in section
58576 \begin_inset space ~
58580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58582 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
58590 \begin_layout Subsection
58592 \begin_inset Index idx
58597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58599 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58615 \begin_inset Index idx
58620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58622 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58639 \begin_layout Standard
58640 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
58641 by choosing an item in the list and selecting the
58648 \begin_layout Standard
58649 By checking the option
58653 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
58661 \begin_inset space ~
58665 \begin_inset space ~
58670 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
58673 \begin_layout Subsection
58675 \begin_inset Index idx
58680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58682 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58699 \begin_layout Standard
58700 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
58704 \begin_layout Standard
58709 enables previewing snippets of your document.
58710 This feature is described in section
58711 \begin_inset space ~
58715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58717 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
58725 \begin_layout Standard
58726 Checking the option
58729 \begin_inset space ~
58733 \begin_inset space ~
58737 \begin_inset space ~
58742 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
58745 \begin_layout Section
58747 \begin_inset Index idx
58752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58754 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58771 \begin_layout Subsection
58775 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58779 \begin_layout Standard
58782 Cursor follows scrollbar
58784 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when scrolling.
58787 \begin_layout Standard
58788 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
58789 If you set the value to zero,
58790 the thickness of the cursor scales relative to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
58793 \begin_layout Standard
58796 Scroll below end of document
58798 is self-explanatory.
58801 \begin_layout Standard
58802 In \SpecialChar LyX
58803 one can jump from word to word by pressing
58810 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
58812 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
58813 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
58814 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924606
58818 \begin_layout Standard
58820 \change_inserted -712698321 1607270592
58823 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
58825 is only relevant in documents that
58831 change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as is (keeping
58839 markup) with this option selected.
58840 It the option is not selected,
58841 pasted text will be inserted without any markup (i.
58842 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
58847 \begin_inset Quotes els
58851 \begin_inset Quotes ers
58855 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
58856 dissolving from insets.
58867 \begin_inset Quotes els
58871 \begin_inset Quotes ers
58874 notwithstanding the state of this option.
58879 \begin_layout Standard
58882 Sort environments alphabetically
58884 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
58887 \begin_layout Standard
58890 Group environments by their category
58892 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
58895 \begin_layout Standard
58900 options determine the editing style for math macros,
58910 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509726
58914 \begin_layout Standard
58916 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
58919 Search drive for cited files
58921 allows \SpecialChar LyX
58922 to query your disk for cited documents when using the
58925 \begin_inset space ~
58929 \begin_inset space ~
58933 \begin_inset space ~
58937 \begin_inset space ~
58940 Content\SpecialChar ldots
58943 context menu on a citation.
58947 \change_deleted 630872221 1622118829
58949 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
58952 field determines the search pattern.
58954 \begin_inset space ~
58958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58960 reference "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
58970 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58972 \change_deleted 5863208 1686648616
58976 \begin_layout Standard
58978 \change_deleted 5863208 1686648616
58979 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
58984 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
58985 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen;
58986 the text then appears centered.
58991 \begin_layout Subsection
58993 \begin_inset Index idx
58998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59005 \begin_inset Index idx
59010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59012 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59029 \begin_layout Standard
59034 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
59036 Several binding files are available,
59040 \begin_layout Description
59041 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
59044 \begin_layout Description
59045 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
59056 \begin_layout Description
59057 mac.bind a set of bindings for
59060 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59068 \begin_layout Standard
59069 There are also binding files designed for special document classes,
59075 and binding files for special languages.
59076 The names of language binding files begin with a language code,
59078 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59082 \begin_inset space \space{}
59086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
59090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
59094 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
59095 in a certain language,
59097 will try to use the appropriate binding file.
59100 \begin_layout Standard
59101 Some binding files,
59107 only have a limited scope.
59108 When looking at the end of the file
59113 you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
59116 \begin_layout Standard
59120 \begin_inset space ~
59124 \begin_inset space ~
59129 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function in the selected key binding file.
59132 \begin_layout Subsubsection
59134 \begin_inset CommandInset label
59136 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
59141 \begin_inset Index idx
59146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59148 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59165 \begin_layout Standard
59166 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
59167 functions and the bound shortcuts.
59168 To find functions easily,
59169 they are grouped by categories and the dialog provides the field
59171 Show key-bindings containing
59174 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
59175 Insert there for example as keyword
59176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
59180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
59183 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different functions that contain
59184 \begin_inset Quotes eld
59188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
59193 one function can have more than one shortcut.
59194 All \SpecialChar LyX
59195 functions are also listed in the file
59200 that you will find in the
59207 \begin_layout Standard
59209 to add the shortcut
59218 select the function and press the
59223 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
59224 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
59227 \begin_layout Standard
59228 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
59229 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
59230 Function definition with “
59233 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337868
59235 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337869
59240 ” and following it with the different function names as a semicolon separated list.
59242 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document part.
59245 \begin_layout Standard
59246 If you don't like a particular shortcut,
59250 \begin_layout Standard
59251 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with a text editor.
59252 The syntax of the entries is:
59255 \begin_layout Standard
59261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
59265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
59269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
59274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
59280 \begin_layout Standard
59283 that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
59284 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
59285 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59318 respectively) as well as to the other keys.
59319 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly in the definition of the key combination,
59320 but must use commands following the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for a model).
59321 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
59326 you needed to specify it as
59331 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings,
59332 you don't have to care for these specifics.
59334 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
59337 \begin_layout Subsection
59339 \begin_inset CommandInset label
59341 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
59346 \begin_inset Index idx
59351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59358 \begin_inset Index idx
59363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59365 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59382 \begin_layout Standard
59383 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
59384 For the case where this is not possible,
59386 provides keyboard maps.
59389 you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it is a Romanian one,
59393 \begin_inset space ~
59397 \begin_inset space ~
59402 and select the keyboard map file named
59409 \begin_layout Standard
59424 you can select the first and second with
59427 arg "keymap-primary"
59433 arg "keymap-secondary"
59436 respectively or toggle between them with
59439 arg "keymap-toggle"
59445 \begin_layout Standard
59446 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
59449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59455 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all systems.
59463 \begin_layout Standard
59464 You can also specify the mouse
59466 Wheel scrolling speed
59469 The standard value is 1.0;
59470 higher values speed up the scrolling,
59471 lower ones slow it down.
59474 Middle mouse button pasting
59476 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel) inserts the content of the clipboard.
59479 \begin_layout Standard
59487 \begin_inset space ~
59491 \begin_inset space ~
59497 you can select a key for zooming.
59498 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated,
59499 the text is zoomed.
59502 \begin_layout Subsection
59506 \begin_layout Standard
59507 Input completion is described in section
59508 \begin_inset space ~
59512 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
59514 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
59522 \begin_layout Section
59524 \begin_inset CommandInset label
59531 \begin_inset Index idx
59536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59543 \begin_inset Index idx
59548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59550 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59567 \begin_layout Standard
59568 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
59569 are normally determined during the installation.
59570 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
59573 \begin_layout Description
59575 \begin_inset space ~
59578 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
59579 's working directory.
59580 It is the default when you
59592 \begin_inset space ~
59600 \begin_layout Description
59602 \begin_inset space ~
59605 templates This directory
59606 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
59607 contains the templates that are shown
59608 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
59609 will be opened when you use the menu
59610 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
59615 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
59617 \begin_inset space ~
59621 \begin_inset space ~
59629 \begin_layout Description
59631 \begin_inset space ~
59634 files This directory
59635 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
59636 will be opened when you use the
59637 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
59638 contains the example files that are listed in
59641 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
59650 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
59652 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
59654 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
59660 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
59662 \begin_inset Newline newline
59666 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
59669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59679 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
59680 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
59690 \begin_layout Description
59692 \begin_inset space ~
59696 \begin_inset Index idx
59701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59703 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59717 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
59718 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
59719 \begin_inset space ~
59723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
59725 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
59735 will be used to save the backups.
59736 \begin_inset Newline newline
59739 Backup files have the ending
59740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
59744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
59750 \begin_layout Description
59752 \begin_inset space ~
59755 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
59756 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
59758 \begin_inset Newline newline
59766 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
59772 You can edit this file with the program
59781 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
59782 in its preferences under
59785 \begin_inset space ~
59791 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation,
59796 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
59798 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position in your \SpecialChar LyX
59805 and \SpecialChar LyX
59806 need to be running the same time.
59807 \begin_inset Newline newline
59810 The pipe is also used for the
59816 \begin_inset space ~
59820 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
59822 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
59828 \begin_inset Newline newline
59831 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
59832 Server-Pipe on Windows,
59833 you must use this pipe name:
59834 \begin_inset Newline newline
59850 \begin_layout Description
59852 \begin_inset space ~
59855 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
59858 \begin_layout Description
59860 \begin_inset space ~
59863 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
59864 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
59867 \begin_layout Description
59869 \begin_inset space ~
59872 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
59877 You only need to specify it if you are using
59881 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
59882 For \SpecialChar LyX
59887 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying a directory.
59890 \begin_layout Description
59892 \begin_inset space ~
59895 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
59896 When \SpecialChar LyX
59897 needs to use an external program,
59898 it looks in this list to see where to find it on the system.
59899 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
59901 so you normally don't have to modify it.
59903 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59907 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59911 the path list will need to be set only if there are external programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
59914 \begin_layout Description
59916 \begin_inset space ~
59919 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
59920 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
59921 code or in the document preamble.
59922 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by a single dot '.').
59923 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
59924 If files are included,
59925 the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be scanned for the input files.
59926 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
59928 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths;
59929 otherwise compilation may fail for some documents.
59932 \begin_layout Section
59936 \begin_layout Standard
59937 Here you can insert your
59946 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking,
59947 as described in section
59948 \begin_inset space ~
59952 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
59954 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
59960 to mark changes you make as yours.
59963 \begin_layout Section
59965 \begin_inset Index idx
59970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59972 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59987 \begin_inset Index idx
59992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59994 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60011 \begin_layout Subsection
60013 \begin_inset CommandInset label
60015 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
60022 \begin_layout Description
60024 \begin_inset space ~
60028 \begin_inset space ~
60031 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
60033 You can find its actual translation status here:
60035 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60037 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
60043 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
60047 \begin_layout Subsubsection
60049 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
60050 LaTeX Language Support
60055 \begin_layout Description
60057 \begin_inset space ~
60060 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
60061 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
60062 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
60063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
60067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
60071 \begin_inset Quotes eld
60075 \begin_inset Quotes erd
60079 The most widespread language package is
60084 \begin_inset Index idx
60089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60092 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60107 it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
60109 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
60110 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
60111 come with the alternative language package
60116 \begin_inset Index idx
60121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60124 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60138 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
60140 there are also specific language packages for languages not covered by
60145 The available selections are described in section
60146 \begin_inset space ~
60150 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
60152 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
60160 \begin_layout Description
60162 \begin_inset space ~
60166 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
60167 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
60168 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
60170 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
60174 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
60178 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
60180 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
60184 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
60185 that is used to switch to a different language
60186 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
60187 to start the package
60191 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
60192 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
60196 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
60197 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands,
60200 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
60204 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
60213 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
60221 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
60224 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
60226 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
60231 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
60249 selectlanguage{$$lang}
60250 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
60258 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
60263 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
60269 this setting is ignored.
60274 \begin_layout Description
60276 \begin_inset space ~
60280 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
60287 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
60288 Use this if the language switch set in
60292 needs to be explicitly ended,
60297 's alternative command
60301 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
60302 \SpecialChar allowbreak
60305 end{otherlanguage*}
60309 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
60312 don't have an end command since the start command toggles the package on and off
60313 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
60319 selectlanguage{$$lang}
60321 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the next
60325 selectlanguage{$$lang}
60331 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
60337 this setting is ignored.
60342 \begin_layout Description
60344 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
60346 \begin_inset space ~
60350 \begin_inset space ~
60353 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point alignment).
60356 \begin_layout Description
60358 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
60360 \begin_inset space ~
60364 \begin_inset space ~
60367 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
60373 \begin_layout Description
60375 \begin_inset space ~
60379 \begin_inset space ~
60383 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
60385 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
60388 this option is set,
60389 the languages used in the document will be added
60390 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
60393 to the document class options
60394 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
60395 rather than the language package options.
60396 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
60401 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
60402 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
60404 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
60405 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
60407 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this way
60411 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
60412 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
60421 \begin_layout Description
60423 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
60425 \begin_inset space ~
60429 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
60431 \begin_inset space ~
60435 \begin_inset space ~
60439 \begin_inset space ~
60445 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
60447 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
60450 this option is set,
60452 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
60453 the language switch defined in
60456 \begin_inset space ~
60461 is output at the beginning of the document,
60462 thereby explicitly switching to the document language.
60463 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
60464 This might be needed if you use a non-default
60467 \begin_inset space ~
60472 or if a package resets the document language.
60474 the language that is active at document start is used (this usually should be the document language).
60475 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
60476 documents start with the chosen document language.
60477 When this option is not set,
60481 \begin_inset space ~
60486 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
60488 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
60491 \begin_inset space ~
60501 \begin_layout Description
60503 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
60505 \begin_inset space ~
60509 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
60511 \begin_inset space ~
60515 \begin_inset space ~
60519 \begin_inset space ~
60525 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
60529 \begin_inset space ~
60533 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
60534 Set document language explicitly
60540 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
60542 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
60549 \begin_inset space ~
60555 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
60557 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
60561 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
60563 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
60566 the end of the document.
60567 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
60571 \begin_layout Subsubsection
60572 \paragraph_spacing single
60574 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
60580 \begin_layout Description
60582 \begin_inset space ~
60586 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
60588 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
60592 \begin_inset space ~
60596 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
60599 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
60601 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
60605 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
60608 in a language different
60609 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
60611 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
60614 the document language will be
60615 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
60616 marked (by default with a blue
60619 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
60621 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
60625 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
60629 \begin_layout Description
60631 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
60633 \begin_inset space ~
60637 \begin_inset space ~
60641 \begin_inset space ~
60646 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is switched via the operating system.
60647 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different scripts (e.
60648 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
60652 English and Hebrew:
60654 switching the keyboard to Hebrew will automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well,
60660 \begin_layout Description
60662 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
60664 \begin_inset space ~
60668 \begin_inset space ~
60671 support Enables the use of languages,
60672 written from right to left (RTL),
60679 \begin_layout Description
60681 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
60683 \begin_inset space ~
60687 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
60689 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
60693 \begin_inset space ~
60697 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
60698 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
60699 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
60701 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
60705 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
60707 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
60708 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g.,
60712 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
60714 you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually to the left or right,
60718 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
60723 \begin_layout Standard
60728 means that the cursor
60729 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
60730 follows the logic of the text direction,
60731 and the arrows' direction relates to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
60733 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
60737 in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say,
60738 Hebrew embedded in English),
60739 the cursor starts at the right (that is,
60744 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the left.
60745 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part;
60746 right arrow in this specific case always means:
60751 in text (even if this means:
60758 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
60759 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
60760 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
60761 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left scripts,
60762 since the cursor then follows a coherent
60763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
60767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
60774 \begin_layout Standard
60776 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
60782 always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
60784 in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
60785 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
60790 ) when coming from the left.
60791 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases,
60792 at the expense of the text logic.
60793 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
60794 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
60795 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
60800 \begin_layout Subsubsection
60802 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
60806 \begin_layout Description
60808 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
60810 \begin_inset space ~
60814 \begin_inset space ~
60817 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal separator alignment).
60819 the appropriate character for the current language is selected (e.
60820 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
60826 but you can also specify a specific (static) custom character here.
60829 \begin_layout Description
60831 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
60833 \begin_inset space ~
60837 \begin_inset space ~
60840 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
60846 \begin_layout Subsection
60850 \begin_layout Standard
60851 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
60852 \begin_inset space ~
60856 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
60858 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
60866 \begin_layout Section
60870 \begin_layout Subsection
60872 \begin_inset CommandInset label
60874 name "subsec:General-output"
60881 \begin_layout Description
60883 \begin_inset space ~
60886 search Commands that will be used for the menu
60888 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
60890 \begin_inset space ~
60896 For a detailed description see section
60898 Reverse DVI/PDF search
60903 \begin_inset space ~
60911 \begin_layout Description
60913 \begin_inset space ~
60916 Options Options for the program
60920 that is used for the export format
60926 \begin_inset space ~
60930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
60932 reference "subsec:Export"
60938 Possible options are listed in the
60943 \begin_inset Newline newline
60947 \begin_inset Flex URL
60950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60952 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
60962 \begin_layout Description
60964 \begin_inset space ~
60968 \begin_inset space ~
60971 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using the menu
60973 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
60974 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
60976 \begin_inset space ~
60982 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
60985 \begin_layout Description
60987 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
60989 \begin_inset space ~
60993 \begin_inset Index idx
60998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61005 \begin_inset Index idx
61010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61012 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
61015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61026 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
61027 \begin_inset Newline newline
61031 \begin_inset Flex URL
61034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61036 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
61042 \begin_inset Newline newline
61045 For example the format
61046 \begin_inset Newline newline
61050 \begin_inset Newline newline
61053 prints the date as day/month/year.
61058 \begin_layout Description
61060 \begin_inset space ~
61064 \begin_inset space ~
61067 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
61068 is allowed to overwrite on export.
61071 \begin_layout Subsection
61077 \begin_inset CommandInset label
61079 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
61084 \begin_inset Index idx
61089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61091 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
61094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61109 \begin_layout Description
61111 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
61113 \begin_inset space ~
61121 \begin_inset space ~
61125 \begin_inset space ~
61128 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
61133 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
61157 are used for Cyrillic.
61158 Combinations of the encodings are possible,
61160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
61169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
61173 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages \SpecialChar LyX
61174 sets up in the background.
61175 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
61180 \begin_layout Description
61182 \begin_inset space ~
61186 \begin_inset space ~
61190 \begin_inset space ~
61194 \begin_inset space ~
61197 options They only have an effect when the program
61201 is used as DVI-viewer,
61202 read its manual to find out more.
61205 \begin_layout Standard
61206 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
61207 But before you change something,
61208 it is strongly recommended to read the manuals of the applications.
61211 \begin_layout Description
61213 \begin_inset space ~
61216 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography,
61218 \begin_inset space ~
61222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
61224 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
61232 \begin_layout Description
61234 \begin_inset space ~
61237 generation Settings for the generation of the index,
61239 \begin_inset space ~
61243 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
61245 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
61253 \begin_layout Description
61255 \begin_inset space ~
61258 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature,
61260 \begin_inset space ~
61264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
61266 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
61274 \begin_layout Description
61280 \begin_inset space ~
61283 command Command for the program
61285 Check\SpecialChar TeX
61288 that is described in the section
61290 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
61295 Additional Features
61300 \begin_layout Standard
61301 There are additionally the following options:
61304 \begin_layout Description
61306 \begin_inset space ~
61310 \begin_inset space ~
61314 \begin_inset space ~
61318 \begin_inset space ~
61323 \begin_inset space ~
61326 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows,
61328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
61334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
61338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
61342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
61345 to separate folders.
61346 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
61348 \begin_inset Index idx
61353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61360 \begin_inset Index idx
61365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61367 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
61370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61384 \begin_layout Description
61386 \begin_inset space ~
61390 \begin_inset space ~
61394 \begin_inset space ~
61398 \begin_inset space ~
61402 \begin_inset space ~
61406 \begin_inset space ~
61409 changes Removes all manually set
61415 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
61416 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
61418 \begin_inset space ~
61423 dialog when changing the document class.
61426 \begin_layout Section
61428 \begin_inset space ~
61432 \begin_inset Index idx
61437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61446 \begin_layout Subsection
61448 \begin_inset CommandInset label
61450 name "subsec:Converters"
61455 \begin_inset Index idx
61460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61469 \begin_layout Standard
61470 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material from one format to another.
61471 You can modify converters or create new ones.
61472 To modify a converter,
61474 change the entry of the
61481 \begin_inset space ~
61486 field and press the
61491 To create a new converter,
61492 select an existing one,
61493 select a different format in the
61496 \begin_inset space ~
61506 field and press the
61513 \begin_layout Standard
61516 Converter File Cache
61523 conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
61525 Maximum Age (in days
61528 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen a document;
61529 the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
61532 \begin_layout Standard
61533 More about converters,
61534 like the flags that can be used in the converter definition,
61535 is described in the section
61546 \begin_layout Subsection
61548 \begin_inset CommandInset label
61550 name "sec:File-Formats"
61555 \begin_inset Index idx
61560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61567 \begin_inset Index idx
61572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61581 \begin_layout Standard
61582 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
61592 programs that should be used for certain formats.
61595 \begin_layout Standard
61596 You can also define the
61598 Default output format
61600 that is used when you use
61604 View Master Document
61608 Update Master Document
61614 menu or the toolbar.
61617 \begin_layout Standard
61618 More about formats and their options is described in the section
61629 \begin_layout Standard
61630 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
61631 's temporary directory,
61632 it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
61633 This is done by specifying a
61638 More about this is described in the section
61649 \begin_layout Chapter
61650 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
61652 \begin_inset Index idx
61657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61664 \begin_inset CommandInset label
61666 name "chap:Units-available-in"
61673 \begin_layout Standard
61675 \begin_inset space ~
61679 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
61681 reference "tab:Units"
61686 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
61687 and used in this documentation.
61690 \begin_layout Standard
61691 \begin_inset Float table
61698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61699 \begin_inset Caption Standard
61701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61702 \begin_inset CommandInset label
61716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61717 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
61723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61725 \begin_inset Tabular
61726 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
61727 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
61728 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
61729 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
61730 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
61732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61776 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61780 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61813 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61817 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61879 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61883 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
61887 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62044 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62048 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62081 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62085 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62118 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62122 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62154 scaled point (65536
62155 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62222 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
62227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62346 % of original image width
62351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62435 \begin_layout Standard
62436 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
62439 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
62446 \begin_layout Bibliography
62447 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62448 LatexCommand bibitem
62455 The \SpecialChar LyX
62458 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62461 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
62467 \begin_inset Newline newline
62471 \begin_inset Flex URL
62474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62476 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
62484 \begin_layout Bibliography
62485 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62486 LatexCommand bibitem
62487 key "latexcompanion"
62492 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
62495 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
62496 Companion Second Edition.
62503 \begin_layout Bibliography
62504 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62505 LatexCommand bibitem
62511 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
62515 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
62523 \begin_layout Bibliography
62524 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62525 LatexCommand bibitem
62536 A Document Preparation System.
62544 \begin_layout Bibliography
62545 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62546 LatexCommand bibitem
62556 The \SpecialChar TeX
62564 \begin_layout Bibliography
62565 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62566 LatexCommand bibitem
62572 The \SpecialChar TeX
62574 \begin_inset Newline newline
62578 \begin_inset Flex URL
62581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62583 https://ctan.org/topic
62591 \begin_layout Bibliography
62592 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62593 LatexCommand bibitem
62599 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
62601 \begin_inset Newline newline
62605 \begin_inset Flex URL
62608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62610 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
62618 \begin_layout Bibliography
62619 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62620 LatexCommand bibitem
62627 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62629 name "Documentation"
62630 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
62637 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
62641 \begin_inset Newline newline
62645 \begin_inset Flex URL
62648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62650 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
62658 \begin_layout Bibliography
62659 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62660 LatexCommand bibitem
62667 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62669 name "Documentation"
62670 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
62675 how to use the program
62677 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
62681 \begin_inset Newline newline
62685 \begin_inset Flex URL
62688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62690 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
62698 \begin_layout Bibliography
62699 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62700 LatexCommand bibitem
62707 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62709 name "Documentation"
62710 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
62715 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
62721 \begin_inset Index idx
62726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62729 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
62732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62744 \begin_inset Newline newline
62748 \begin_inset Flex URL
62751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62753 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
62761 \begin_layout Bibliography
62762 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62763 LatexCommand bibitem
62770 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62772 name "Documentation"
62773 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
62778 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
62784 \begin_inset Index idx
62789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62792 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
62795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62807 \begin_inset Newline newline
62811 \begin_inset Flex URL
62814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62816 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
62824 \begin_layout Bibliography
62825 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62826 LatexCommand bibitem
62833 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62835 name "Documentation"
62836 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
62846 \begin_inset Newline newline
62850 \begin_inset Flex URL
62853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62855 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
62863 \begin_layout Bibliography
62864 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62865 LatexCommand bibitem
62866 key "makeindex-man"
62872 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62875 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
62885 \begin_inset Newline newline
62889 \begin_inset Flex URL
62892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62894 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
62900 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119703
62904 \begin_layout Bibliography
62906 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119754
62907 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62908 LatexCommand bibitem
62915 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62917 name "Documentation"
62918 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/xindex/doc/xindex-doc.pdf"
62928 \begin_inset Newline newline
62932 \begin_inset Flex URL
62935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62937 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119749
62939 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/xindex/doc/xindex-doc.pdf
62951 \begin_layout Bibliography
62952 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62953 LatexCommand bibitem
62960 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62962 name "Documentation"
62963 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
62973 \begin_inset Newline newline
62977 \begin_inset Flex URL
62980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62982 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
62990 \begin_layout Bibliography
62991 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62992 LatexCommand bibitem
62999 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63001 name "Documentation"
63002 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
63007 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
63009 \begin_inset Newline newline
63013 \begin_inset Flex URL
63016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63018 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
63026 \begin_layout Bibliography
63027 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63028 LatexCommand bibitem
63035 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63037 name "Documentation"
63038 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
63043 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63049 \begin_inset Index idx
63054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63057 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63072 \begin_inset Newline newline
63076 \begin_inset Flex URL
63079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63081 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
63089 \begin_layout Bibliography
63090 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63091 LatexCommand bibitem
63098 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63100 name "Documentation"
63101 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
63106 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63112 \begin_inset Index idx
63117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63120 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63135 \begin_inset Newline newline
63139 \begin_inset Flex URL
63142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63144 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
63152 \begin_layout Bibliography
63153 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63154 LatexCommand bibitem
63161 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63163 name "Documentation"
63164 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
63169 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63175 \begin_inset Index idx
63180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63183 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63198 \begin_inset Newline newline
63202 \begin_inset Flex URL
63205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63207 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
63215 \begin_layout Bibliography
63216 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63217 LatexCommand bibitem
63224 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63226 name "Documentation"
63227 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
63232 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63238 \begin_inset Index idx
63243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63246 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63261 \begin_inset Newline newline
63265 \begin_inset Flex URL
63268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63270 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
63278 \begin_layout Bibliography
63279 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63280 LatexCommand bibitem
63287 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63289 name "Documentation"
63290 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
63295 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63301 \begin_inset Index idx
63306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63309 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63324 \begin_inset Newline newline
63328 \begin_inset Flex URL
63331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63333 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
63341 \begin_layout Bibliography
63342 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63343 LatexCommand bibitem
63350 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63352 name "Documentation"
63353 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
63358 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63364 \begin_inset Index idx
63369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63372 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63387 \begin_inset Newline newline
63391 \begin_inset Flex URL
63394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63396 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
63404 \begin_layout Bibliography
63405 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63406 LatexCommand bibitem
63413 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63415 name "Documentation"
63416 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
63421 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63427 \begin_inset Index idx
63432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63435 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63450 \begin_inset Newline newline
63454 \begin_inset Flex URL
63457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63459 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
63467 \begin_layout Bibliography
63468 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63469 LatexCommand bibitem
63476 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63478 name "Documentation"
63479 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
63484 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63490 \begin_inset Index idx
63495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63498 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63513 \begin_inset Newline newline
63517 \begin_inset Flex URL
63520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63522 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
63530 \begin_layout Bibliography
63531 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63532 LatexCommand bibitem
63539 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63542 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
63547 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
63549 \begin_inset Newline newline
63553 \begin_inset Flex URL
63556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63558 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
63566 \begin_layout Bibliography
63567 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63568 LatexCommand bibitem
63575 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63578 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
63583 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
63585 \begin_inset Newline newline
63589 \begin_inset Flex URL
63592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63594 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
63602 \begin_layout Bibliography
63603 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63604 LatexCommand bibitem
63611 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63614 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
63619 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
63620 for Cyrillic languages:
63621 \begin_inset Newline newline
63625 \begin_inset Flex URL
63628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63630 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
63638 \begin_layout Bibliography
63639 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63640 LatexCommand bibitem
63647 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63650 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
63655 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
63657 \begin_inset Newline newline
63661 \begin_inset Flex URL
63664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63666 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
63674 \begin_layout Bibliography
63675 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63676 LatexCommand bibitem
63683 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63686 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
63691 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
63693 \begin_inset Newline newline
63697 \begin_inset Flex URL
63700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63702 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
63710 \begin_layout Bibliography
63711 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63712 LatexCommand bibitem
63719 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63722 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
63727 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
63729 \begin_inset Newline newline
63733 \begin_inset Flex URL
63736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63738 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
63746 \begin_layout Standard
63747 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
63754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63782 \begin_inset Note Note
63785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63792 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
63793 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following bibliography is the second one:
63801 \begin_layout Standard
63802 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
63803 LatexCommand bibtex
63804 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
63805 options "biblio/alphadin"
63812 \begin_layout Standard
63813 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
63817 \begin_layout Standard
63821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63827 pagedeclaration}[1]{
63830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63837 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
63845 \begin_inset Note Note
63848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63849 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink,
63851 \begin_inset space ~
63855 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
63857 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
63870 \begin_layout Standard
63871 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
63872 LatexCommand printnomenclature
63878 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
63879 LatexCommand printindex